Laser Beam Printer
User's Guide
IMPORTANT:
Read this manual carefully before using your printer.
Save this manual for future reference.
ENG
LBP5970
Laser Printer
User's Guide
Manuals for the Printer
The manuals for this printer are arranged as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Installation
• Connecting to a Computer
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
accompanying CD-ROM.
Getting Started Guide
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
User's Guide
(This Manual)
CD-ROM
• Setting Up the Network Environment for
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Printing
• Managing the Printer in the Network
Environment
• Operating/Setting the Printer from the Web
Browser
To view the manuals in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required. If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your
system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Before You Start
Chapter 2
Using the Printer
Chapter 3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Chapter 4
The Printing Environment
Chapter 5
Printing Environment Settings
Chapter 6
Routine Maintenance
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 8
Appendix
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Operating Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Product Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
EMC requirements of EC Directive (220 - 240 V model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Laser Safety (220 - 240 V model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
International Energy Star-Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
License Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
IPv6 Ready Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images . . . . . xvi
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Chapter 1
Before You Start
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Printer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Inner View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
ii
Chapter 2
Using the Printer
Turning the Printer ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
When Not Using a Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
When Using a Hard Disk (Only When a Hard Disk Is Installed) . . . . . . . .2-5
Power Saving (Power Save Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Setting the Printer to Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Types of Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Releasing Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Placing the Printer Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Placing the Printer Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Direct Printing from the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Printing the Image File Using the Direct Print Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Direct Printing from Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
E-mail Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
E-mail Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
E-mail Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
If You are Using the POP3 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
If You are Using the SMTP Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
When E-mail Print Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Job Process Method Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Printing with a Password Specified (Secured Print/Encrypted Secured Print). . .2-52
Printing a Job Saved in a Box (Stored Job Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Types of the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
If Auto-Switch Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Outputting Data (Forced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
iii
Chapter 3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Storing Printouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Capacity of Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette . . . . . .
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Paper Capacity of the Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Paper in Cassette 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Standard Size Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Custom Size Paper or Paper at a Size of 8K or 16K in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . .
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-28
3-37
3-46
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
3-49
3-54
3-59
3-61
2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and 1-sided Printing . . . . . . 3-64
Manual 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Printing with a Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Specifying a Gutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Paper Loading Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Chapter 4
The Printing Environment
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
How to Use the Operation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to View the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
iv
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
How to View the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Menu Functions and Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
SETUP Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Operating Procedure for the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
UTILITY Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Operating Procedure for the UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
JOB Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Operating Procedure for the JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
RESET Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Operating Procedure for the RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
CANCEL JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
CANCEL JOB Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Operating Procedure for the CANCEL JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
SELECT FEEDER Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Operating Procedure for the SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Initializing the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Chapter 5
Printing Environment Settings
Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
SETUP Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
CONTROL MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
FEEDER MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
LAYOUT MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
QUALITY MENU Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
INTERFACE MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
PRINT MODE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
USER MAIN. Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
PCL SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-75
UFR II SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
IMAGING SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81
PDF1.5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
PS Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-95
UTILITY Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-104
v
JOB Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
RESET Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Chapter 6
Routine Maintenance
Replacing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
When <PREP."color" TNR>/<CHG."color" TNR> Appears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Precautions on Replacing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Replacing a Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Resetting the Counter of a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Storing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Replacing Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When <PREP."color" DRM>/<CHG."color" DRUM> Appears . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Replacing a Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Drum Cartridge to Be Replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a New Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for Handling Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-20
6-20
6-25
6-40
6-42
Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When the Message <PREP.FIX.UNIT> Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the Counter of the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
6-43
6-43
6-45
6-52
Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When the Message <PRE.WST.T.CTN>/<CHG.WST.T.CTN> Appears. . . .
Precautions on Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-56
Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Handling the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jam Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
7-4
7-4
7-6
7-7
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Service Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Problems with the Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
When Any Print Defect Appears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
Precautions on Cleaning the Inside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
Printing Test Chart 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87
Printing Test Chart 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-89
Print Defect Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-91
Adjusting the Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-95
Chapter 8
Appendix
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Typeface Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
PS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Symbol Sets Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Character Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
vii
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon LASER SHOT LBP5970. Please read this manual
thoroughly before operating the printer in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities,
and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place
for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the printer
safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to
use the printer safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully in order to operate the printer correctly, and to
avoid damage to the printer.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following button names are a few examples of how keys and buttons to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Keys
on the Control Panel: [Key Name]
Example: [Online]
[Utility]
• Buttons on Computer Operation Screen: [Button Name]
Example: [OK]
[Details]
viii
Illustrations Used in This Manual
• The
names of the indicators and keys are described in English in the illustrations
of the control panel used in this manual.
Also, the panel sheet on which the names of the indicators or key on the control
panel are indicated is supplied with the printer depending on the country or region.
Attach the panel sheet to the control panel as needed.
Online
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
• Although
the power cord used in this manual is as the one in the following
illustration, the form of the power cord may differ depending on the country or
region.
Operating Systems
For details on the procedures, instructions, and so on for Windows 7 and Server
2008, refer to those for Windows Vista.
For details on the latest status of the supported operating systems and Service
Pack, see the Canon Web site (http://www.canon.com/).
ix
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:
Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system:
x
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP operating system:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system:
Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system:
Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows 7 operating system:
Windows 7
Microsoft Windows operating system:
Windows
Wireless Network Interface Board NB-W2:
NB-W2
Legal Notices
Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered.
In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s) in ( ) may be
registered instead.
LBP5970 (F151500)
EMC requirements of EC Directive (220 - 240 V model)
This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive. We
declare that this product conforms with the EMC requirements of EC Directive at
nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220 to
240 V, 50/60 Hz. Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical
EMC requirements of EC Directive.
Laser Safety (220 - 240 V model)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser
radiation emitted inside this printer is hermetically sealed within the protective
housing and external cover. No radiation can leak from the printer in the normal
operation of the product by the user.
xi
This printer is classified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007,
EN60825-1:2007, and as for the U.S.A., it is classified as Class 1 under the Code of
Federal Regulations, 1040.10 of Title 21.
This printer has been classified under IEC60825-1:2007, EN60825-1:2007 and
conforms to the following classes:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
CAUTION
Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
xii
International Energy Star-Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this
product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an
international program that promotes energy saving through the
use of computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of
products with functions that effectively reduce energy
consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors
can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as
computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The
standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
WEEE Directive
European Union (and EEA) only.
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of
with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive
(2002/96/EC) and your national law. This product should be
handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an
authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product
or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical
and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of
waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment
and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that
are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your
cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to
the effective usage of natural resources. For more information
about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling,
please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved
WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal service. For
more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE
products, please visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.
(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
License Notice
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST ® under
license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype
Imaging Inc.
xiii
IPv6 Ready Logo
This machine has acquired IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1, as
established by the IPv6 Forum.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon Logo, LASER SHOT, LBP, and NetSpot are trademarks of
Canon Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, Mac OS, Macintosh, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL, PCL 5, and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Novell, NetWare are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
UFST ® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States
Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Concerning typeface credit, the actual names on a FONTS LIST for this machine
may differ from those listed below.
CG and UFST are trademarks of Agfa Monotype Corporation or its affiliated
companies and may be registered in some jurisdictions.
Marigold is trademark of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC Lubalin Graph, ITC Mona Lisa, ITC
Symbol, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
xiv
Clarendon, Helvetica, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino, and Times are
trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries. Univers is a trademark of
Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries and may be registered in some jurisdictions.
Coronet is a registered trademark of Ludlow Type Foundry.
Wingdings is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Albertus, Arial, Century Gothic, and Times New Roman are trademarks of the
Monotype Corporation plc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions.
CG Omega is a product of Agfa Corporation and CG Times, based on Times New
Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa
Corporation.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Copyright
Copyright 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON
INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
xv
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the
Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and
the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your
product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A
non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be
a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the
images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance
with your legal advisor for guidance.
xvi
•
Paper Money
•
Travelers Checks
•
Money Orders
•
Food Stamps
•
Certificates of Deposit
•
Passports
•
Postage Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
•
Immigration Papers
•
Identifying Badges or Insignias
•
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled
or uncanceled)
•
Selective Service or Draft Papers
•
Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
•
Checks or Drafts Issued by
Governmental Agencies
•
Stock Certificates
•
Motor Vehicle Licenses and
Certificates of Title
•
Copyrighted Works/Works of Art
without Permission of Copyright
Owner
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the
printer. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other
persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also,
since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation
unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this
machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the printer near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.
If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, it
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the printer. If these items come into contact with
a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the
power switch a and disconnect the USB cable b if it is connected. Then, unplug the
power plug from the AC power outlet c and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
xvii
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
b
a
c
a
CAUTION
• Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the
printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots on the printer. The ventilation slots are provided for
proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Never place the printer on a soft
surface, such as a sofa or rug. Blocking the ventilation slots can cause the printer to
overheat, resulting in a fire.
• Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location exposed to smoke and steam such as cookeries and humidifiers
- A location exposed to rain or snow
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• When installing the printer, gently lower the printer onto the floor or other machine to
avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.
• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly following the instructions in
this manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical
shock.
• When moving the printer, follow the instructions in this manual to hold it correctly.
Failure to do so may cause you to drop the printer, resulting in personal injury. (See
"Moving the Printer," on p. 6-71)
xviii
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the
power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage
and result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power
cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical
shock.
• Do not plug the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet, as failure to do so may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords or plug extension cords to a multiple
power strip. If extension cords must be used or plugged to a multiple power strip,
however, use them observing the following points on user's own authority. If you use
extension cords improperly, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
- Do not connect one extension cord to another.
- Make sure that the voltage of the power plug is the one indicated in the rating label
(attached on the back of the printer) when you use the printer.
- Use an extension cord that allows the current value greater than the necessary one
indicated in the rating label (attached on the back of the printer).
- When you use an extension cord, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the
power cord and the extension cord.
- Periodically check that the extension cord is not overheated.
CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the plug when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord
may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power
cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If
objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an
emergency.
xix
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the printer. There are high-temperature and
high-voltage components inside the printer which may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. To avoid injury, do not
allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not let them
touch any electrical contacts or gears that are exposed.
• If the printer makes strange noises, or emits smoke, heat or unusual smells,
immediately turn OFF the printer and computer, and disconnect the USB cable if it is
connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer. Otherwise, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the printer. If gas from these sprays comes
into contact with the electrical components inside the printer, it may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the printer and computer, and disconnect the interface cables when
moving the printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the printer. Also, do
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,
etc.) inside the printer. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the printer and computer,
and disconnect the USB cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from
the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When plugging or unplugging the USB cable when the power plug is plugged in an
AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in
electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the printer, as they may tip over or fall resulting in
personal injury.
• Be careful when handling the main board, expansion board, and RAM. Touching the
edges or a sharp portion of the main board, expansion board, RAM, ROM may result
in personal injury.
• Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the printer will not be used for a long
period of time such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the power switch on the right of the
printer and unplug the power plug for safety when the printer will not be used for an
extended period of time such as during consecutive holidays.
• Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the
printer is not printing, sudden rotation of the roller may catch your hands or clothing,
resulting in personal injury.
xx
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the
printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the printer during any phase of user operation. Read
the following remarks and instructions for safety.
- Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
- If the laser beam escapes from the printer, exposure may cause serious damage to
your eyes.
Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the printer and computer, remove the USB cable,
and then unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet regularly, and clean the area around
the base of the power plug's metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to
ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power plug is plugged for a long
period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the
power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the printer using a slightly dampened cloth with water or a mild detergent
diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable
substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside
the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this
may result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not throw a used drum cartridge, toner cartridge, or waste toner container into
open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite,
resulting in burns or a fire.
xxi
CAUTION
• Never attempt to service this printer yourself, except as explained in this manual.
There are no user serviceable parts inside the printer. Adjust only those controls that
are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment could result in
personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered
under your Limited Warranty.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not touch the
fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing a drum cartridge, toner cartridge, or
waste toner container, take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and
make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper jammed inside the printer, remove the jammed paper gently to
prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If
the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with
the edges of the paper.
• When removing a used toner cartridge from the toner cartridge slot, remove the
cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold
water and immediately consult a physician.
xxii
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause toner
remaining inside the cartridge to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
• Do not store a toner cartridge or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as
this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
• Place the toner cartridge or drum cartridge into a plastic bag to prevent its toner from
scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge or drum cartridge according to
local regulations.
CAUTION
• Keep toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If
these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge, drum cartridge, or waste toner
container. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately
consult a physician.
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, drum cartridge, or waste toner container, be
careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into contact with your skin directly.
If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash it out with soap. If you have an
irritation on your skin, or if you inhaled the toner, immediately consult a physician.
Others
WARNING
The drum cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac
pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the drum cartridge and
consult your physician immediately.
xxiii
xxiv
Before You Start
1
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the major features and basic functions of this printer.
Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Printer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
1-1
Features and Benefits
This section describes the major features.
Before You Start
1
Standard Features
■ High Quality A3 Full Color Print
This printer is fitted with an A3 full color laser printer engine. Moreover, 600dpi/multi-value
data process resolution delivers high quality full-color printing on A3 size paper.
■ High Speed Printing
Adoption of high-speed CPU and new-type PDL has increases the speed of the controller
processing. Moreover, the four development drums have shortened the time of color
printing, which used to require four times longer time than when printing in black and
white, to as short as 30 sheets of paper per minute (32 sheets of paper per minute for
black and white printing).
■ Super High-Definition Image Quality
The equipped 1200dpi engine enables super high-definition image quality on printing data
that contains photographs and gradation as well as text. The printer driver achieves
"Super Fine Mode" by supporting 1200dpi data resolution process and enhances
expression of clear images. "Fine Mode" also supports "High Mode" in which the
gradation expression has been enhanced. This enables the compatibility between
high-quality printing and super high-speed printing.
■ Various Paper Handling Options
In addition to the standard multi-purpose tray and universal cassette, optional 550-sheet
paper feeders are available, enabling the continuous automatic feeding of up to 1970
sheets of paper of 5 different sizes. The multi-purpose tray has a wide array of uses,
allowing you to perform 2-sided printing manually and print on various kinds of paper from
such as A5 and Envelope Monarch to paper as large as A3 and long size paper.
■ User-Friendly Color Control
The user interface with color matrixes delivers intuitive and easy to use color tone
adjustment. The sample print function that outputs the samples of images after
adjustment on a sheet of paper allows you to easily and rightly check the colors that you
want to use.
The auto color function that automatically detects color pages frees you from having to
switch between the black-and-white mode and color mode. As a matter of course,
LBP5970 is equipped with ColorGear, Canon's original color management system that
recreates the colors as you expect. This system achieves the user-friendly control of color
matching that corrects color by each element of text, photographs, and pictures that make
up a document.
1-2
Features and Benefits
■ Network Printer
Equipped with a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX print server as standard. Because LBP5970
compatible with the TCP/IP, AppleTalk, SMB, and NetWare protocols, you can instantly
use this printer as a network printer that supports various kinds of host/operating system
environments. Also the high-speed DMA transfer that directly transfers data to the printer
memory and automatic interface switch function enable fine printing process in a network
environment.
■ Well-developed Security Functions
By installing an optional hard disk, you can use the "Secured Print" function that requires
entering a password on printing and the "Encrypted Secured Print" function in which the
security for data communication is reinforced. The "Hard Disk Data All Erase" function that
completely erases all the data in the hard disk and the capability of using SSL for
communication by the Remote UI achieve a safer printing environment.
NOTE
If you want to use the encrypted secured print function, you need to install "Encrypted
Secured Print Driver Add-in".
For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM.
■ Software Compatibility and Language Switching
The printer supports Hewlett-Packard's PCL 5c/PCL 6 printer language, which enables
the printer to work with a wide variety of software applications supporting PCL. This
printer also supports UFR II. UFR II, a printing system compatible with the latest operating
systems, distributes the printing process to a computer and printer, achieving a
high-speed print output. Additionally, this printer supports "PostScript 3 Emulation"*,
making it possible to print from Windows as well as Macintosh with PostScript.
* The optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is required.
■ Energy Saving
The on-demand fusing technology of the printer provides improved energy efficiency.
Because of this power saving feature, the printer meets the guidelines for the International
Energy Star Program.
■ Reducing Toner Consumption
To save toner, you can select toner save to print rough drafts using less toner. The printed
page is much lighter, similar to the toner save mode found on many dot matrix printers.
■ Interface Features
The printer uses a USB port that supports Microsoft Plug & Play technology. It also comes
with a print server as standard, being used as a network printer for Ethernet.
Features and Benefits
1-3
Before You Start
1
NOTE
For details on the operating systems that the print server equipped with this printer
support and the configuration procedures, see "Network Guide".
■ Typefaces
The printer comes with 80 scalable typefaces in 27 typeface families (Agfa 80 MicroType
fonts), all compatible with application software supporting Microsoft Windows. In addition,
10 bitmapped typefaces of the Line Printer family are also included. The printer uses the
Universal Font Scaling Technology (UFST) for outline fonts, provided under license from
Agfa Monotype Corporation. 31 TrueType screen fonts are also included along with Canon
Font Manager for easy management of installed fonts in Microsoft Windows 2000/XP.
This printer also has 136 standard fonts and 115 Central Europe fonts available in
"PostScript 3 Emulation"*.
Before You Start
1
* The optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is required.
■ Printer Drivers and Utilities
LBP5970 is provided with the printer driver for PCL 5c/PCL 6 that supports Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista and UFR II/PS Printer Driver that supports Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003/Vista and Mac OS X, allowing you to print from a various kinds of system
environment.
Also, NetSpot Device Installer supplied with LBP5970 simplifies the management and
settings of the printer on a network environment.
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the
printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon website. If you
cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon
website, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
■ Remote UI Support
The printer supports a Remote UI function that allows you to control or monitor the status
of the printer from a computer. (See Remote UI Guide.)
1-4
Features and Benefits
Optional Equipment
Below is a list of the options available for this printer. For more information, consult
your local authorized Canon dealer.
■ Paper Feeder
PAPER FEEDER PF-98B consists of a paper feeder and paper cassette.
The paper cassette can be loaded with up to approximately 550 sheets of plain paper (80
g/m2) at sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K,
and paper at the following custom paper sizes.
• When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 210.0 to
431.8 mm
• When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used):
Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
■ Expansion RAM
Expansion RAM is an extended memory that expands the amount of memory. This printer
comes with 256 MB of memory. One expansion RAM module can be added, and the
memory capacity can be expanded up to a maximum of 768 MB. It is recommended that
you should use Canon Expansion RAM ER-128A, ER-256A, or ER-512A as the
expansion RAM.
■ PS ROM
By installing PS ROM, "PostScript 3 Emulation" which makes it possible to print with
PostScript is available.
Also, by installing a hard disk and expansion RAM module (256 MB or more), you can
print PDF files using the direct print function.
■ PS/Barcode ROM
By installing PS/Barcode ROM, the following bar code fonts are also available as well as
the functions of PS ROM.
• OCR-B
• Symb. FontInform
• Symbole stethos
• BarDIMM ©1997
• USPS ZEBRA+4Stat
Features and Benefits
1-5
1
Before You Start
This printer is supplied with 2 paper sources: the paper cassette and multi-purpose tray.
By installing three optional paper feeders, up to 5 paper sources can be used.
■ Hard Disk
You can use a hard disk that can be built in the printer to save the received print jobs
temporarily. By installing the hard disk, you can use various functions such as print job
spooling, e-mail print, encrypted secured print, secured print, electronic sort, and RIP
Once.
Before You Start
1
1-6
Features and Benefits
Parts and Their Functions
This printer consists of components that perform various functions. This section
describes the name and function of each part in order for you to use this printer
properly to make full use of its functions.
Before You Start
1
Printer Unit
The following are the parts and functions of the printer unit.
CAUTION
Never block the ventilation slots on this printer. If any ventilation slot is blocked,
the temperature inside the printer may rise, resulting in a fire.
Front View
The following are the parts on the front side of the printer and their functions.
NOTE
Remove the film attached to the control panel before using the panel.
h
a
i
b
c
d
e
f
j
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
k
l
g
a Control Panel
Displays the printer status and allows you to specify
the settings. (See p. 1-11)
b Front Cover
Opened when replacing the fixing unit or removing
jammed paper. (See p. 6-43)
Parts and Their Functions
1-7
c Paper Guides
Adjust the position of the paper guides to the width
of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. You
can load paper up to the load limit marks on this
tray.
d Multi-purpose Tray
Before You Start
1
Load paper when feeding the paper from the
multi-purpose tray. (See p. 3-48)
e Auxiliary Tray
Pulled out to prevent the paper from hanging out of
the multi-purpose tray when loading large-size
paper, such as B4.
f Tray Extension
Opened to prevent the paper from hanging out of
the multi-purpose tray when loading long-size paper,
such as A3.
g Paper Size Guide
Insert the paper size indicator for the paper loaded
in the paper cassette into the paper size slot. (See
p. 3-25)
h Toner Cover
Opened when replacing the toner cartridges. (See
p. 6-2)
i Top Cover/Output Tray
The top cover is opened when a drum cartridge is
replaced or the inside of the printer is cleaned (You
do not need to open the cover when you remove
jammed paper). Before opening the top cover, open
the front cover, tilt the fixing unit toward you, and
then press the lock release button. For the position
of the lock release button, see "Inner View," on p.
1-10.
The output tray outputs paper with the printed side
facing down. (See p. 3-16)
1-8
Parts and Their Functions
j Power Switch
Turns the power of the printer ON/OFF. (See p. 2-2)
k Lift Handles
Hold these handles when moving the printer. (See p.
6-74)
l Paper Cassette
Can be loaded with up to 230 sheets of plain paper
at sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17),
Legal, Letter, and Executive. (See p. 3-18)
m Expansion Slot
This slot is used to expand the functions.
n LAN Connector
Connects to a LAN cable (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX).
o 100 Indicator (Green)
Comes on when the printer is connected to a
network by 100BASE-TX.
p 10 Indicator (Green)
Comes on when the printer is connected to a
network by 10BASE-T.
q ACT Indicator (Green)
Blinks while communicating with the print server.
r Ventilation Slots
Ventilate air to cool the insides of the printer.
s Hard Disk Slot
An optional hard disk is installed in this slot. (See
Getting Started Guide)
t USB Connector
Connected to the USB cable. (See Getting Started
Guide)
Rear View
The following are the parts on the rear side of the printer and their functions.
Before You Start
1
a
b
e
c
f
d
a Ventilation Slots
Ventilate air to cool the insides of the printer.
b Rear Cover
Opened when installing an optional RAM or ROM
module.
c Power Socket
Connect the supplied power cord to this socket.
d Rating Label
The current value indicated in this rating label shows
the average power current consumption.
e Waste Toner Cover
Opened when replacing the waste toner container.
(See p. 6-54)
f Ventilation Slots
Ventilate air to cool the insides of the printer.
Parts and Their Functions
1-9
Inner View
The following are the parts inside the printer and their functions.
c
a
Before You Start
d
1
b
e
a ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit
Transfers the toner of the four colors onto paper.
b Fixing Unit (When laid)
Fixes toner onto paper.
c Top Cover (When opened)
Opened when a drum cartridge is replaced or the
inside of the printer is cleaned (You do not need to
open the cover when you remove jammed paper).
Before opening the top cover, open the front cover,
tilt the fixing unit toward you, and then press the lock
release button.
1-10
Parts and Their Functions
d Lock Release Button
Pressed when the top cover is opened.
e Serial Number Label
The serial number for printer identification is
indicated on this label. The number is required for
receiving service or repairs.
Control Panel
The control panel on the top of the printer allows you to check the printer status and
use the printer functions.
a
b
d e
j
km o
1
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
Before You Start
Online
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
c
f g h i
l
n p
IMPORTANT
Depending on the settings, the printer may operate differently from the description of the
following "On menu operation". For more details, see the instructions for each setting.
a [Online] Key/Online Indicator (Green)
Turns on (online)/off (offline) the connection to the
computer.
This key also has the function that, when an error
has occurred, releases the printer from the error
temporarily and continues the paused job. However,
depending on the error, you may not be able to
cancel it out.
The Online indicator under the Online key indicates
the following printer status with its status.
On:
Online (The printer can receive print data from the
computer.)
Off:
Offline (The printer cannot receive print data from
the computer.)
However, if the printer has entered Power Save
Mode, the Online indicator is off even when the
printer is online. (See p. 2-10)
b [Cancel Job] Key
On offline:
Cancels the job when the Job indicator is on or
blinking. Does not function when the Job indicator is
off.
On online:
Cancels the job when the Job indicator is on or
blinking. Does not function when the Job indicator is
off.
c [Feeder Selection] Key
On offline:
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
On online:
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
On menu operation:
Does not function.
d Paper Source Indicators (Green)
On:
The indicator for the currently selected paper source
comes on.
Blinking:
There is no paper in the currently selected paper
source, or the paper cassette is not set. For the
multi-purpose tray, the indicator comes on even
when no paper is loaded.
Off:
No paper source is selected. No paper cassette
including the optional one or paper feeder is set.
e Display
Displays the printer status, messages, the settings
and setting values of the menu functions. (See p.
1-13)
Parts and Their Functions
1-11
f Ready Indicator (Green)
Before You Start
1
On:
The printer is ready to print. (If the printer has
entered Power Save Mode when it is online, only the
Ready indicator (green) is on, and all the other
indicators are off.)
Blinking:
The printer is performing a self-diagnostic test. The
printer is in a warm-up state.
Off:
The printer cannot print.
g Message Indicator (Orange)
On:
The printer cannot print because a problem has
occurred in the printer. (If the printer has entered
Power Save Mode when it is offline, only the
Message indicator (orange) is on, and all the other
indicators are off.)
Off:
The printer is in a normal state.
h HDD Indicator (Green)
On:
Data is being read from the hard disk or being
written to the hard disk.
Off:
Data is not being read from the hard disk or being
written to the hard disk.
i Job Indicator (Green)
On:
The printer is receiving print data, or any print data
remains in the printer memory.
Blinking:
The printer is processing print data.
Off:
There is no print data in the printer memory.
j [Utility] (
) Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Displays the UTILITY menu.
On menu operation:
Displays the next left item in the menu. Decreases
the setting value.
k [Job] (
) Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Displays the JOB menu.
On menu operation:
Goes back to the previous menu (Goes back up the
hierarchy).
l [Reset] (
) Key
On offline:
Displays the RESET menu.
On online:
Displays the RESET menu.
On menu operation:
Goes to the next menu (Goes down the hierarchy).
In a lowest menu level (When a setting value is
displayed), determines the setting.
m [OK] Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Does not function when the printer is online.
On menu operation:
Goes to the next menu (Goes down the hierarchy).
In a lowest menu level (When a setting value is
displayed), determines the setting.
n [Settings] (
) Key
On offline:
Displays the SETUP menu.
On online:
Displays the SETUP menu. However, the [User
Maintenance Menu] options cannot be specified
when the printer is online.
On menu operation:
Displays the next right item in the menu. Increases
the setting value.
o Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power
Supply)
If POWER SAVE MODE is set to a setting other
than OFF, the printer enters Power Save Mode. (See
p. 2-6)
Hold down the switch for 4 seconds or more to
execute SHUT DOWN. (See p. 2-5)
p Main Power Indicator (Green)
On:
The printer is ON.
Off:
The printer is OFF.
1-12
Parts and Their Functions
Display
The display on the printer's control panel is shown as the following. It displays the
printer status, messages, items and settings of the menu functions.
a
00 READY
A4 b
a Status/Operation Field
Displays the printer status and print mode.
When operating the printer
using the control panel
CONTROL MENU
1
→
b Paper Source/Paper Size Field
Displays the size of paper in the currently selected
paper source using an abbreviation. The names of
the following paper sizes are indicated by an
abbreviation. (12 x 18: TxE, Ledger (11 x 17): LD,
Legal: LG, Letter: LT, Executive: EX, Statement: ST,
Envelope DL: DL, Envelope COM10: CO, Envelope
C5: EC5, Envelope Monarch: MO, Envelope B5:
EB5, Custom Size: 80 to 99, Custom SizeR/Long
Size Paper: 80R to 99R, Free/Mixed Sizes: FR)
Parts and Their Functions
1-13
Before You Start
When the printer is ready to print
Before You Start
1
1-14
Parts and Their Functions
Using the Printer
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic functions of this printer.
Turning the Printer ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Power Saving (Power Save Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Placing the Printer Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Placing the Printer Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Direct Printing from the Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Direct Printing from Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
E-mail Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
E-mail Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
E-mail Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
When E-mail Print Fails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Job Process Method Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Printing with a Password Specified (Secured Print/Encrypted Secured Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Printing a Job Saved in a Box (Stored Job Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Types of the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
If Auto-Switch Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Outputting Data (Forced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
2-1
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
The printer can be turned ON/OFF using the power switch on the right side of the
printer body. Be sure to observe the following instructions in order to prevent
unexpected problems.
Using the Printer
2
Turning the Printer ON
To use this printer, press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON. After
running a self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories, the
printer will be ready to print.
IMPORTANT
• Do not turn the power ON immediately after turning it OFF. If you want to turn the printer
ON again after turning it OFF, wait at least 10 seconds after turning the printer OFF
before turning it ON again.
• If the printer does not operate properly or an error message appears, see "Message List"
(p. 7-23) and "Service Call Display" (p. 7-45).
• Be sure to set the paper cassette in the printer before you turn the power ON for the first
time after you install the printer.
NOTE
When you turn the power ON for the first time after you install a hard disk or when a
problem has occurred to the hard disk, the printer is ready to print after approximately 60
seconds after it is turned ON because the hard disk is formatted after the printer is turned
ON.
2-2
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
Press " " of the power switch on the printer.
2
The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates a
self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories.
If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the Online indicator,
Ready indicator and Paper Source indicator for the currently selected paper
source come on, <00 READY> appears in the display, and the printer is ready to
print.
Online
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
Online
Indicator
Paper Source Ready
Indicators
Indicator
The following information is displayed in the display.
Printable and not processing
print data
00 READY
A4
Size of paper in the
currently selected paper
source
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
2-3
Using the Printer
1
Turning the Printer OFF
Turn the printer OFF using the following procedure. The procedure for turning the
printer OFF is different between when a hard disk is used and when it is not used.
IMPORTANT
• When using the hard disk, be sure to turn the printer OFF as the procedure for the
protection of the hard disk. (See p. 2-4)
• If the printer is connected to a network, make sure that other computers are not sending
print data to the printer before turning the printer OFF.
• If you turn the printer OFF when the Job indicator is on, all the print data remaining in the
printer memory will be erased. If there is any necessary print data remaining in the
printer, wait until it is output, or press [Reset] in the offline state and then select FORM
FEED to output the data before turning the printer OFF. (See p. 2-61)
• Do not turn the power OFF when the printer is in any of the following status:
- During printing
- While the printer is running a self-diagnostic test immediately after turning the power
ON
- While a message informing you that the NVRAM is being initialized or being written is
displayed
- While <02 STARTING UP> or <02 CALIBRATING> is displayed
• When you are using a hard disk, make sure that the HDD indicator is not on. If you turn
the printer OFF while the HDD indicator is on (while data is being read from the hard disk
or being written to the hard disk), the hard disk may be damaged and disabled.
Using the Printer
2
When Not Using a Hard Disk
When you are not using a hard disk, turn the printer OFF using the following
procedure.
1
Make sure that the Job indicator is off.
Online
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
Off
2-4
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
Power
OK
2
Press "
" of the power switch on the printer.
Using the Printer
2
When Using a Hard Disk (Only When a Hard Disk Is Installed)
When using the optional hard disk, turn the printer OFF using the following
procedure.
IMPORTANT
• If you perform a shutdown when any job of which you stopped the operation or of
secured print is in the hard disk, the message <CANNOT EXECUTE> is displayed.
If you want to execute a shutdown, perform a soft reset to delete the job, and then
perform a shutdown again.
If you do not want to execute a shutdown, press [Online].
• Once you perform a shutdown, you cannot cancel the operation in midstream. When you
want to turn the printer ON again, turn the printer OFF once following the instruction of
the message, and then turn the printer ON.
NOTE
You can also perform SHUT DOWN in the RESET menu by pressing [Reset] on the
control panel. (See "SHUT DOWN," on p. 5-115)
1
Make sure that the Job indicator and HDD indicator are off.
Online
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
Off
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
2-5
Power
2
Hold down the control panel power switch (sub power supply)
on the control panel until <02 SHUTTING DOWN> is displayed,
then release the switch.
Hold down the switch (approximately 4 seconds) until <02 SHUTTING DOWN> is
displayed. If the switch is released in less than 4 seconds, and POWER SAVE
MODE is set to a setting value other than OFF, the printer enters Power Save
Mode. (See p. 2-6)
02 SHUTTING DOWN
Using the Printer
2
3
Confirm the message.
TURN OFF POWER
When the printer is ready to be turned OFF after the process for it is performed,
the message <TURN OFF POWER> appears.
4
When the message <TURN OFF POWER> appears, press "
of the power switch on the printer.
"
Power Saving (Power Save Mode)
You can reduce power consumption efficiently by using POWER SAVE MODE
when the printer is idle or not in use.
IMPORTANT
• Even if " " of the power switch located on the right side of the printer is pressed, power
is consumed only slightly while the power plug is inserted into the AC power outlet. To cut
the power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
• For more details on each setting, see "Printing Environment Settings," on p. 5-1.
2-6
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
Setting the Printer to Power Save Mode
There are the following four methods for setting the printer to Power Save Mode.
Specify the time interval until the printer enters Power
Save Mode in POWER SAVE TIME. You can specify the
time interval between 5 to 180 minutes. The default is 10
minutes.
Setting the printer to Power
Press the control panel power switch (sub power supply)
Save Mode using the printer's
on the printer's control panel.
control panel
Setting the printer to Power
Save Mode from a network
computer
Select the option in the Remote UI in the following order:
[Device Manager] ➞ [Status] ➞ [Device Control] ➞
[Power Save], then click [Execute].
Specify the time when the printer is to enter Power Save
Setting the printer to Power
Mode in POWER SAVE TIME.
Save Mode on the designated
If POW. SAVE TIMER is set to ON, POWER SAVE TIME
time every day
is enabled.
If the above operations or settings are performed, and the entering conditions
described in "Types of Power Save Mode" (See p. 2-7) are fulfilled, the printer is set
to Power Save Mode which consumes less power.
Types of Power Save Mode
There are the following three types of Power Save Mode, and they vary in the
entering conditions.
Types of
Power Save
Mode
Power Save
Mode 1 (the
Panel Off
mode)
Power saving
effect: Small
Settings for "POWER SAVE MODE"
Which Can be Entered
Entering Conditions
OFF
-
PANEL
OFF
ON
DEEP
SLEEP
- Panel operation has not
been performed.
- No data has been sent from
the computer.
- The printer is not starting up.
- A shutdown is not being
performed.
- The hard disk is not being
initialized.
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
2-7
2
Using the Printer
Setting the printer to Power
Save Mode automatically
when it is not operating
Types of
Power Save
Mode
Power Save
Mode 2 (the
Printer Power
Save mode)
Power saving
effect: Middle
Using the Printer
2
Power Save
Mode 3 (the
Deep Sleep
mode)
Power saving
effect: Large
Settings for "POWER SAVE MODE"
Which Can be Entered
Entering Conditions
OFF
-
-
PANEL
OFF
ON
DEEP
SLEEP
-
- The printer has already
entered Power Save Mode 1.
- The 10 minutes for which the
printer is ready to print has
elapsed since the printer was
turned ON or Power Save
Mode 2 was released.
- There is no job on the print
queue.
- A service call is not
occurring.
- A paper jam is not occurring.
- No cover is open.
- The toner cartridge is
installed.
-
- The printer has already
entered Power Save Mode 2.
- The following settings in
NETWORK MENU are set to
OFF.
- APPLETALK
- SMB SERVER* in SMB
- A USB cable is not
connected.
- The 15 minutes for which the
printer is ready to print has
elapsed since the printer was
turned ON or Power Save
Mode 2 was released.
-
* If [Server Name] for SMB is not specified, the printer can enter Power Save Mode regardless of the setting for SMB
SERVER.
NOTE
• When the printer enters Power Save Mode 1 or 2, the Ready indicator and Main Power
indicator come on. However, when the printer is in the following statuses, indicators other
than the Ready indicator also come on.
- When the printer is offline (Only the Message indicator comes on.)
- While a job is being stored in a box* (The Job indicator comes on.)
* A job can be stored in a box only when a hard disk is installed.
• When the printer enters Power Save Mode 3, only the Main Power indicator comes on.
• To configure the printer so that it does not enter Power Save Mode when an error is
occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or when the number in the
message is blinking), set PWR SAVE IN ERR to OFF.
2-8
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
• In the state that the SNTP or DHCP communication is going to be performed within a
minute or that the Wake Up function is going to be executed within a minute, the printer
does not enter Power Save Mode 3.
Releasing Power Save Mode
The following are the methods to release Power Save Mode.
Press the key on the printer's control panel.*
* If the printer has entered Power Save Mode 3, you can
release the mode only when the control panel power
switch (sub power supply) is pressed.
Releasing Power Save Mode
on the designated time every
day
Specify the time when Power Save Mode is to be
released in WAKE UP TIME. If WAKE UP TIMER in
TIMER SETTINGS is set to ON, the setting for WAKE UP
TIME is enabled.
Releasing Power Save Mode
from a computer
- Send data to the printer (except for storing a job into a
box).
- Perform the following in the Remote UI.
- Operating the UTILITY menu
- Performing calibration
- Performing device controls
- Displaying the [User Maintenance Menu] page in the
[Device Settings] menu and specifying the settings
NOTE
• Power Save Mode 1 and 2 are released also when an error occurs (However, Power
Save Mode 2 may not be released depending on the error type.).
• Additionally, if CALIBRATE TIMER in TIMER SETTINGS is set to ON, and if the time
specified in CALIBRATE TIME has elapsed, Power Save Mode is released.
Turning the Printer ON/OFF
2-9
2
Using the Printer
Releasing Power Save Mode
using the printer's control
panel
Online and Offline
When the printer can receive data from the computer and print the data, the printer
is in the state of "Online", and when the printer is disconnected with the computer
and cannot receive data, the printer is in the state of "Offline".
2
Using the Printer
To perform the settings for each menu using the control panel, switch the printer
status as follows:
: The status that you can enter the menu
-: The status that you cannot enter the menu
When the printer is
online
SETUP Menu
When the printer is
offline
*
SELECT FEEDER Menu
RESET Menu
JOB Menu
-
UTILITY Menu
-
* The [User Maintenance Menu] options cannot be specified when the printer is online.
Placing the Printer Online
When printing from the computer, the printer has to be online. Before printing, make
sure that the printer is online. If not, place the printer online using the following
procedure. The printer comes online automatically after you turn it ON.
Online
1
Press [Online].
The Online indicator comes on, and the printer is ready to print.
IMPORTANT
When an error is occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or the
number in the message blinks), the printer does not come online. Eliminate the
cause of the error before you place the printer online.
2-10
Online and Offline
NOTE
If the printer has entered Power Save Mode, the Online indicator is off even when
the printer is online, and only the Ready indicator is on. If the printer receives data
while it is in Power Save Mode, the mode is released, the Online indicator comes
on, and the printer is ready to print.
Placing the Printer Offline
Online
1
Press [Online].
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control
panel.
IMPORTANT
This printer comes online automatically if left in the offline state for five minutes or
longer. However, when an error is occurring in the printer (when the Message
indicator is on, or the number in the message blinks), or while you are performing
any setting, such as selecting the menu functions or a paper source, or when
specifying the paper size, the printer does not come online.
Online and Offline
2-11
2
Using the Printer
To configure the printer so that it does not receive data from the computer or
specify the settings for all the options in the SETUP menu, place the printer offline
using the following procedure.
Direct Print
Direct Print
The direct print function is a function that transmits a file from the host terminal to
the printer without the printer driver and allows the printer to detect the file and
print. Therefore, you do not need to open a file to print.
Using the Printer
2
To perform printing, from the Remote UI, specify the PDF file, PS/EPS file, or image
file in TIFF/JPEG format that you want to print. You can also print PDF files by
specifying a URL on the Web.
This printer also supports direct printing by command entry from Command Prompt
(the LPR command).
■ Printing from the Remote UI (See p. 2-12)
■ Printing from Command Prompt (See p. 2-33)
Direct Printing from the Remote UI
You can perform direct printing from the Remote UI by specifying a PDF file, PS/
EPS file, or image file in TIFF/JPEG format. For details on the Remote UI, see
"Remote UI Guide".
NOTE
Even if you cannot print or the printing position is skewed by the direct print function, you
may be able to print successfully by opening the file from the application and using the
printer driver.
Printing the PDF File Using the Direct Print Function
IMPORTANT
Note the following when printing the PDF files using the direct print function.
- To print the PDF files using the direct print function, the following optional accessories
are required.
- Hard disk
- PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM
- RAM (ER-256A, ER-512A)
2-12
Direct Print
1
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
NOTE
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
• When you want to specify the settings with the Remote UI using SSL encrypted
communication, enter "https://the IP address or name of the printer/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the
message.
Direct Print
2-13
2
Using the Printer
- Although the printer is compatible with PDF version 1.5, some of the functions are not
supported by the printer. The PDF files of version 1.6 or later are processed by the
functions compatible with the version 1.5 (However, some of the functions are
excluded.).
- The following items are not supported for PDF version 1.5.
- JBIG2 decoder
- JPX (JPEG2000) decoder
- File Specifications (Reference to an external file is not supported.)
- Public Key Security Handler (Support is limited to the PDF Standard Security
Handler.)
- PS X Object
- Transfer Functions
- Halftones
- Transparency Groups
- Free Text Annotations (XHTML, XML, and CSS are not supported.)
- Field Dictionaries (Rich Text strings are not supported.)
- Digital Signatures (A signature will be printed although its authenticity will not be
verified. If an icon exists to indicate the presence of a signature in the PDF file or of an
edited signature, printing will be still performed without an indication of authenticity.)
- File Identifiers (Reference to an external file is not supported.)
- Output Intents
- Open Prepress Interface (OPI)
• SSL encrypted communication can be used only when an optional hard disk is
installed. To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to
have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for
registering the default key, see "Remote UI Guide".
2
Select the mode in which you want to log on to the Remote UI
([Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode]), then click [OK].
If you select [Administrator Mode], enter the values for [Password], and then
click [OK].
Using the Printer
2
2-14
Direct Print
3
Select [PDF File] from the [Direct Print] menu.
If IDs are managed on a departmental basis, a screen to enter [User Name] and
[Password] appears. Enter [Department ID] and [Password] specified in
[Department ID Management], and then click [OK].
Using the Printer
2
4
Perform [Select the PDF File].
• If specifying a file path (See p. 2-15)
• If specifying a URL (See p. 2-16)
● If specifying a file path
❑ Select [File Path].
Direct Print
2-15
❑ Click [Browse], select the PDF file, and then click [Open].
Using the Printer
2
❑ Proceed to Step 5.
● If specifying a URL
❑ Select [URL].
❑ Enter the URL at which the PDF file to be printed is located.
2-16
Direct Print
If you specified a URL which requires a user authentication, enter [User Name] and
[Password].
Using the Printer
2
❑ Proceed to Step 5.
NOTE
• When printing with a URL specified, you cannot print the next job until the PDF file
download finishes or the connection to the web server is disconnected.
• The protocol for printing with a URL specified supports only HTTP.
5
If a password is set to open the PDF file, enter it in [Document
Password].
Direct Print
2-17
IMPORTANT
• If you try to print without entering the password, the error message <DA DATA
DECDE ER> is displayed and printing is canceled.
• If you want to print the PDF file which is prohibited to be printed, enter the master
password in [Document Password].
• If only the password for changing the security settings is set, you do not need to
enter the master password.
6
2
Specify the setting for [Specify Print Range].
Using the Printer
If you select [All], all pages are printed.
If you select [Pages] and enter the page range, only the pages within the entered
range are printed.
2-18
Direct Print
Specify the settings for [Quality Settings] as the following, as
needed.
2
Using the Printer
7
[Resolution]
Specifies the resolution for when processing print data.
[Gradation Level]
Specifies the gradation level for printing data. Specify
[High 1] when printing pictures or other data in general
quality and specify [High 2] when printing in higher
quality.
[Black and White
Halftones]
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium
gradation) for black-and-white data.
[Color Halftones]
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium
gradation) for color data.
[Advanced
Smoothing (AST)]
Specifies whether to use the smoothing process which
can print the outlines of graphics (illustrations created by
an application) and text smoothly.
You can select a target for the smoothing process by
selecting the [Graphics]/[Text] check box.
Direct Print
2-19
8
Specify the settings for [Color Settings] as the following, as
needed.
Using the Printer
2
2-20
Direct Print
[Color Mode]
Specifies whether to print in color or in black and white.
[Render Color
Space]
Specifies the method for rendering a PDF file.
[RGB Source
Profile]
Selects the profile appropriate for RGB data according to
the monitor you are using.
[CMYK Simulation
Profile]
Specifies the setting for simulating the ink properties on
printing CMYK data.
[Output Profile]
Specify the output profile. The output profile is applied to
all the print data.
[Matching Method]
Specifies the color adjusting method for when "RGB
Source Profile" is applied. Select the adjustment method
according to your use or preference.
[Use Grayscale
Profile]
If the check box for this option is selected, gray color data
is converted into CMYK data by "Grayscale Profile" of
this printer.
[Use Pure Black
Text]
If the check box for this option is selected, you can print
black color created by an application, using only the black
(Bk) toner.
If the check box for this option is selected, the printer
prints black text over a color background. If this option is
used with [Use Pure Black Text], the printer prints all the
background first, and then prints the text over the color
background using only the black (Bk) toner. This
alleviates the phenomenon in which the outlines of the
printed black text are rimmed with white.
[Use CMYK
Overprinting]
If the check box for this option is selected, you can
overprint CMYK data in the composite output.
[Brightness]
Adjusts the brightness of the whole image. The smaller
the specified value is, the brighter the color is, and the
larger, the darker it is.
[Perform Gray
Compensation]
Specifies whether to print gray color data with the black
(Bk) toner only.
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as
needed.
[Copies]
Enter the number of copies (1 to 9999) to be printed.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of the paper to be printed.
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of the paper to be printed.
[Manual Feed]
If the check box for this option is selected, you can fix the
paper source at the multi-purpose tray.
Direct Print
2-21
2
Using the Printer
9
[Use Black
Overprinting]
[Fit to Page]
If the check box for this option is selected, the printer
prints with the page size of a PDF file reduced to fit within
the printable area when the page size is larger than the
printable area. Also, when the page size of a PDF file is
smaller than the printable area, the printer prints with the
page size expanded to the margins of the printable area.
[Enlarge Print
Area]
Specifies whether the printer should print a document
with its printable area expanded. If the check box for this
option is selected, the printer prints with the printable
area expanded to the edges of the paper, with no
margins. However, depending on the print data to be
printed, the edge of paper may be missing partly during
printing or may blot during color printing.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should perform automatic
2-sided printing. If the check box for this option is
selected, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
Select the binding location from [Short Edge] and [Long
Edge].
[Page Layout]
Prints multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
[Page Order]
Specifies this option when using [Page Layout]. You can
specify the page order layout.
[Finishing]
If you select [Off], printouts of a complete job are
grouped. If you select [Collate], printouts of a complete
job are collated.
[Booklet]
By printing 2 pages on both sides of paper and folding
the paper in half, the pages are aligned properly and
ready to be bound into a booklet (that is, 4 pages in total
are printed on a single sheet of paper).
[Appropriate
Layout]
Specifies the binding location for when you selected the
[Booklet] check box.
[Comment Print]
Specifies whether the printer should print comments.
[Store In Box]
If you want to store the data on the hard disk (boxes) of
the printer, select the check box for this option, and then
select the box to store the data.
Using the Printer
2
2-22
Direct Print
10 Click [Start Print].
NOTE
• To reset the settings to the default values, click [Reset].
• Do not click [Start Print] repeatedly during the transmission of a PDF file. It may
take a long time to transmit a PDF file. If you click the button repeatedly during the
transmission, you may have a problem with the PDF file, failing to transmit the file.
Printing the PS/EPS File Using the Direct Print Function
IMPORTANT
To print the PS/EPS files using the direct print function, the optional PS ROM or PS/
Barcode ROM is required.
1
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
Direct Print
2-23
Using the Printer
2
NOTE
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
• When you want to specify the settings with the Remote UI using SSL encrypted
communication, enter "https://the IP address or name of the printer/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the
message.
• SSL encrypted communication can be used only when an optional hard disk is
installed. To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to
have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for
registering the default key, see "Remote UI Guide".
Using the Printer
2
2
Select the mode in which you want to log on to the Remote UI
([Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode]), then click [OK].
If you select [Administrator Mode], enter the values for [Password], and then
click [OK].
2-24
Direct Print
3
Select [PS/EPS File] from the [Direct Print] menu.
If IDs are managed on a departmental basis, a screen to enter [User Name] and
[Password] appears. Enter [Department ID] and [Password] specified in
[Department ID Management], and then click [OK].
Using the Printer
2
4
Specify [File Path].
Click [Browse], select the file, and then click [Open].
Direct Print
2-25
5
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as
needed.
Using the Printer
2
2-26
Direct Print
[Color Mode]
Specifies whether to print in color or in black and white.
[Resolution]
Specifies the resolution for when processing print data.
[Copies]
Enter the number of copies (1 to 9999) to be printed.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should perform automatic
2-sided printing. If the check box for this option is
selected, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
Select the binding location for 2-sided printing from
[Short Edge] and [Long Edge].
[Finishing]
If you select [Off], printouts of a complete job are
grouped. If you select [Collate], printouts of a complete
job are collated.
[Store In Box]
If you want to store the data on the hard disk (boxes) of
the printer, select the check box for this option, and then
select the box to store the data.
6
Click [Start Print].
Using the Printer
2
NOTE
• To reset the settings to the default values, click [Reset].
• Do not click [Start Print] repeatedly during the transmission of a PS/EPS file. It may
take a long time to transmit a PS/EPS file. If you click the button repeatedly during
the transmission, you may have a problem with the PS/EPS file, failing to transmit
the file.
Printing the Image File Using the Direct Print Function
IMPORTANT
Note the following when printing image files using the direct print function.
- JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF
data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision6.0.
- The supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data is as follows.
- Supported encoding method
DCT baseline
- Unsupported encoding methods
DCT extension
Reversible compression
Hierarchical
- The supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data is as follows.
- Supported encoding methods
Uncompressed
ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding
ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only)
PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits)
Direct Print
2-27
- Unsupported encoding methods
LZW
ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC
1
2
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
Using the Printer
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
NOTE
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
• When you want to specify the settings with the Remote UI using SSL encrypted
communication, enter "https://the IP address or name of the printer/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the
message.
• SSL encrypted communication can be used only when an optional hard disk is
installed. To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to
have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for
registering the default key, see "Remote UI Guide".
2-28
Direct Print
2
Select the mode in which you want to log on to the Remote UI
([Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode]), then click [OK].
If you select [Administrator Mode], enter the values for [Password], and then
click [OK].
Using the Printer
2
3
Select [Image File] from the [Direct Print] menu.
If IDs are managed on a departmental basis, a screen to enter [User Name] and
[Password] appears. Enter [Department ID] and [Password] specified in
[Department ID Management], and then click [OK].
Direct Print
2-29
4
Specify [File Path].
Click [Browse], select the file, and then click [Open].
Using the Printer
2
5
Specify the print range.
If [Specify Print Range] is set to [All], entire range of the file is printed.
If [Specify Print Range] is set to [Pages], data is printed on the print range
specified by page number. Enter the starting page number and ending page
number.
2-30
Direct Print
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as
needed.
2
Using the Printer
6
[Color Mode]
Specifies whether to print in color or in black and white.
[Copies]
Enter the number of copies (1 to 9999) to be printed.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of the paper to be printed.
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of the paper to be printed.
[Image Orientation]
Select the orientation of the image to be printed from
[Auto], [Vertical] (portrait), and [Horizontal] (landscape).
[Print Position]
Select the printing position for the image from [Auto],
[Center], and [Top Left]. If [Auto] is selected, and if the
data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing
position is specified, the image is printed on the specified
position. If a printing position is not specified, the image
is printed in the center of the paper. You cannot specify a
printing position for data in JPEG format. Therefore, if
[Auto] is selected, the image is printed in the center of the
paper.
[Zoom]
Select [Off] or [Auto] based on whether the printer should
print with scaling outputs according to the printable area.
[Enlarge Print
Area]
Specifies whether the printer should print a document
with its printable area expanded. If the check box for this
option is selected, the printer prints with the printable
area expanded to the edges of the paper, with no
margins. However, depending on the print data to be
printed, the edge of paper may be missing partly during
printing or may blot during color printing.
Direct Print
2-31
[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should perform automatic
2-sided printing. If the check box for this option is
selected, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
Select the binding location for 2-sided printing from
[Short Edge] and [Long Edge].
[Show Warnings]
Select the display setting for the warning message in
case of an error occurring from [Print], [Panel], and [Off].
[Print]: The printer prints the content of the error and exits
the job.
[Panel]: The error message appears in the display, and
the printer stops printing.
[Off]: The printer exits the job without displaying anything
even if an error occurs.
[Print Guarantee]
Specify whether the printer should guarantee jobs of
TIFF data. (Displayed only when a hard disk is used.)
[Enable Exif
Adjustment]
Specify whether image data should be adjusted based on
the settings for when it was taken by a digital camera.
Using the Printer
2
7
Click [Start Print].
NOTE
• To reset the settings to the default values, click [Reset].
• Do not click [Start Print] repeatedly during the transmission of a image file. It may
take a long time to transmit an image file. If you click the button repeatedly during
the transmission, you may have a problem with the image file, failing to transmit the
file.
2-32
Direct Print
Direct Printing from Command Prompt
You can perform direct printing from Command Prompt using LPR.
Enter the command using the following format. You cannot use any other
commands.
lpr (a space) -P (a space) <the printer name> (a space) <the file name>
1. Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address entry
field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
2. Click [Information] from the [Device Manager] menu.
3. Check [Device Name] in [Device Information].
Te file name:
Enter the name of the file to be printed.
<Input Example: If the printer name is "LBP-Printer" and the file name is
"sample.jpg">
lpr -P LBP-Printer sample.jpg
NOTE
The settings specified using the printer's control panel become effective. The settings
that can be used by the direct printing function are the following SETUP menu. For
details on the settings in each menu, see "Chapter 5 Printing Environment Settings".
- CONTROL MENU Options
- FEEDER MENU Options
- LAYOUT MENU Options
- QUALITY MENU Options
- INTERFACE MENU Options
- USER MAIN. Options
- IMAGING SETUP Options
- PDF1.5 Options
Direct Print
2-33
2
Using the Printer
The printer name: Enter the name of the printer. You can check the printer name
using the following procedure.
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
E-mail Print
E-mail print is a function in which this printer receives e-mails sent from the host
terminal and prints the text as well as the attached files. Therefore, you do not need
to use a printer driver or open the attached files to print.
Using the Printer
2
Available Protocol
POP3
Requirements
The UIDL command of the POP3 protocol needs to be supported.
You can access the mail server but cannot receive e-mails in the
following circumstances. For details on the mail server, as your
network administrator.
- The UIDL command is not supported
- The response to the UIDL command is <negative ("-ERR")>
Set POP3 RECEIVE to ON using any one of the following methods.*
- Control Panel of the Printer (See Chapter 5 Printing Environment
Settings)
- Remote UI, FTP Client (See Network Guide)
Specify the IP address of the printer. (See Network Guide)
SMTP
Set SMTP RECEIVE to ON using any one of the following methods.*
- Control Panel of the Printer (See Chapter 5 Printing Environment
Settings)
- Remote UI, FTP Client (See Network Guide)
* For other settings, see "E-mail Print Settings," on p. 2-36 and specify them as needed.
IMPORTANT
• There are the following restrictions on e-mail print.
- Attached files are printable only when they are in TIFF or JPEG format.
- Attached files are printable only when the size of each file is 100 MB or less. Attached
files of 100 MB or more are not printed.
- The number of attached files has to be 14 or less for each mail. If the number exceeds
14, the first 14 files are printed. However, the files of the 15th or later are not printed.
- E-mail text in HTML format are not printed.
- If text data of an e-mail exceeds 25 MB, the text is not printed.
- E-mail text is printed with its mail header information.
- If the number of characters in one text line (without a line break) in an e-mail exceeds
998, an automatic linefeed is performed. Because of this, the text in the next line may
not be printed properly.
2-34
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
• On e-mail print with this printer, JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-35
2
Using the Printer
ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe
TIFF Revision6.0 and IETF RFC2301 (File Format for Internet FAX).
• The e-mail print function of this printer supports Internet FAX Simple Mode.
• For this printer, the supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data is as follows.
- Supported encoding method
DCT baseline
- Unsupported encoding methods
DCT extension
Reversible compression
Hierarchical
• For this printer, the supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data is as follows.
- Supported encoding methods
Uncompressed
ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding
ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only)
PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits)
- Unsupported encoding methods
LZW
ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC
• For this printer, the supporting status of encoding formats is as follows.
- 7bit
- 8bit
- binary
- quoted-printable
- base64
- uuencode
- x-uuencode
• For this printer, the supporting status of character sets is as follows (If no character sets
are specified, the data is processed with "us-ascii".).
- us-ascii
- iso-8859-1
- iso-8859-15
E-mail Print Settings
The settings related to e-mail print are as follows. You can specify the settings from
the printer's control panel, the Remote UI, and FTP Client. For more details on the
settings, see "Chapter 5 Printing Environment Settings", "Remote UI Guide", and
"Network Guide". The symbol " " indicates that the setting is specifiable; the
symbol "-" indicates that the setting is not specifiable.
■ Settings for Using the POP3 Protocol
2
Using the Printer
Setting Method
Option
2-36
Setting
Control
Panel
POP3 Server
Name
Specifies the name or IP
address of the server which
receives e-mails.
-
POP3 User
Name
Specifies the name of the user
which receives e-mails.
-
POP3
Password
Specifies the password for the
name of the user which receives
e-mails.
-
POP3 Receive
Interval
Specifies the interval for
automatically connecting to the
server which receives e-mails,
by minutes.
POP3 Receive
Specifies whether to enable the
e-mail print function.
POP3 Server
Port Number
Specifies the port number for the
server which receives e-mails.
Receive E-mails
Performs manual receiving of
e-mails.
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
-
■ Settings for Using the SMTP Protocol
Setting Method
Setting
SMTP Receive
Specifies whether to enable the
e-mail print function.
SMTP Server
Port Number
Specifies the port number for the
server which receives e-mails.
Control
Panel
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
-
2
■ Other Settings
Setting Method
Option
Setting
Control
Panel
Remote
UI
FTP
Client
Print Log List
Prints e-mail print logs.
E-mail
Transmission
Error
Specifies whether a message
should appear or any indicator
should blink when a reception
error has occurred on printing
e-mails.
-
-
Specifies whether the printer
Print E-mail Text should print the text on printing
e-mails.
-
-
-
-
Limit E-mail
Print
Specifies whether to limit the
number of the print pages of
e-mail text.
-
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-37
Using the Printer
Option
E-mail Printing
The method for receiving and printing e-mails varies depending on the protocol you
are using.
• If You
are Using the POP3 Protocol (See p. 2-38)
• If You
are Using the SMTP Protocol (See p. 2-41)
If You are Using the POP3 Protocol
2
Using the Printer
There are the following two methods for receiving and printing e-mails.
■ Receiving e-mails automatically and printing them
Specify the setting for [POP3 Receive Interval] using the printer's control panel, the
Remote UI, or FTP Client. The printer connects to the mail server to receive e-mails
automatically and print them at the intervals specified in [POP3 Receive Interval].
• Control Panel of the Printer (See Chapter 5 Printing Environment Settings)
• Remote UI, FTP Client (See Network Guide)
■ Receiving e-mails manually and printing them
You connect the printer to the mail server to receive e-mails manually and print them
using the printer's control panel or the Remote UI.
• Control Panel of the Printer
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to display E-MAIL UTILITY.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [ ] and [ ] to display RECEIVE E-MAILS.
6. Press [OK].
• Remote UI
You can receive e-mails manually and print them from the Remote UI using the
following procedure. For details on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
IMPORTANT
• The printer can receive e-mails only when it is online.
• You can receive e-mails manually even if the setting for [POP3 Receive Interval] is
specified to receive e-mails automatically. However, while the printer is receiving e-mails,
an attempt to receive e-mails manually is ignored.
2-38
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
2
NOTE
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
• When you want to specify the settings with the Remote UI using SSL encrypted
communication, enter "https://the IP address or name of the printer/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the
message.
• SSL encrypted communication can be used only when an optional hard disk is
installed. To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to
have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for
registering the default key, see "Remote UI Guide".
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-39
Using the Printer
1
2
Select the mode in which you want to log on to the Remote UI
([Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode]), then click [OK].
If you select [Administrator Mode], enter the values for [Password], and then
click [OK].
Using the Printer
2
3
2-40
From the [Device Manager] menu, select [Network].
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
4
Click [Receive E-mails].
Using the Printer
2
The printer is connected to the mail server. The printer receives e-mails
addressed to the printer and print them.
If You are Using the SMTP Protocol
If the printer receives e-mails, it prints them automatically.
NOTE
If you are using the SMTP protocol, you do not need to receive e-mails manually.
Printing the E-mail Receive Log List
You can print the e-mail receive log list. Information such as "Subject" and "From" of
the e-mails is printed in the e-mail receive log list. Print the e-mail receive log list
using the printer's control panel or the Remote UI.
• Control
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Panel of the Printer
Make sure that the printer is online.
Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
Press [ ] and [ ] to display E-MAIL UTILITY.
Press [OK].
Press [ ] and [ ] to display RX LOG LIST.
Press [OK].
• Remote
UI
You can print the e-mail receive log list from the Remote UI using the following
procedure. For details on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-41
IMPORTANT
If you format the hard disk using HDD MAINTENANCE in the [User Maintenance Menu]
options in the SETUP menu, all the e-mail receive logs are erased.
NOTE
• Up to 96 e-mail receive logs can be printed.
• If an e-mail is not printed properly for some reason, an error code is printed in <Receive
Result> in the e-mail receive log list. For details on error codes, see "When E-mail Print
Fails," on p. 2-45.
2
Using the Printer
1
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
• When you want to specify the settings with the Remote UI using SSL encrypted
communication, enter "https://the IP address or name of the printer/". If the
[Security Alert] dialog box or other dialog box appears, follow the directions in the
message.
• SSL encrypted communication can be used only when an optional hard disk is
installed. To use SSL encrypted communication, a key and its certificate need to
have been created and the key needs to have been registered as the default key.
For details on the SSL encrypted communication function and the procedure for
registering the default key, see "Remote UI Guide".
2-42
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2
Select [Administrator Mode], enter [Password], and then click
[OK].
Using the Printer
2
3
From the [Device Manager] menu, select [Status].
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-43
4
Click [Utility] in the [Status] page.
5
Select [Print Log List (E-mail Print) ], then click [Execute].
Using the Printer
2
The e-mail receive log list is printed.
2-44
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
When E-mail Print Fails
If an e-mail is not printed properly for some reason, an error message appears in
the display on the printer, the Remote UI, and N/W Status Print, or an error code is
displayed in the e-mail receive log list. Apply the following remedies according to
the displayed error message or code.
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-45
2
Using the Printer
NOTE
• In the Remote UI, error messages appear in [E-mail Print] in the [Network] page in the
[Device Manager] menu.
• For details on the procedures for performing N/W Status Print, see "The Lists Common to
All the Settings in the Print Mode," on p. 8-2, and for printing the e-mail receive log list,
see "Printing the E-mail Receive Log List," on p. 2-41.
■ The error messages that appear in the display, Remote UI, and N/W Status
Print
Error Message
Display
Remote UI,
N/W Status
Print
Using the Printer
2
Remedy
Check the following points.
- Whether the following settings in
the [Network] page in the
Remote UI are correct
- [POP3 Server Name] and
[POP3 Server Port Number] in
[E-mail Print].
- DNS in [TCP/IP]
- Whether the POP3 server and
the DNS server are operating
properly
POP3 Server
Connection
Error
Could not
connect to the
POP3 server
when printing
e-mails.
POP3 Server
User Name
Error
Check the following points.
- Whether the setting for [POP3
Failed to
User Name] in [E-mail Print] in
authenticate the
the [Network] page in the
user name in the
Remote UI is correct
POP3 server
- Whether the user name is
when printing
registered in the POP3 server
e-mails.
properly
POP3 Server
Password
Error
Failed to
authenticate the
password in the
POP3 server
when printing
e-mails.
POP3 Server
UIDL Error
Could not
connect to the
POP3 server
Use a POP3 server that supports
when printing
e-mails, because UIDL.
the server does
not support the
UIDL command.
EM SERVER
ERROR
2-46
Cause
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Check the following points.
- Whether the setting for [POP3
Password] in [E-mail Print] in the
[Network] page in the Remote UI
is correct
- Whether the password is
registered in the POP3 server
properly
Error Message
EM E-MAIL
ERROR
Remote UI,
N/W Status
Print
-
Cause
Remedy
The printer could
not connect to
the POP3 server Clear the hard disk error on the
because an error POP3 server.
had occurred in
its hard disk.
■ The error codes that are displayed in the e-mail receive log list*
*If multiple errors have occurred, only the error of the highest priority is displayed (high:
407 > low: 499).
Error Code
407
Cause
Remedy
There was no response
for more than 5 minutes
when receiving e-mails. - Consult your network administrator.
Could not receive data - If errors occur many times on the same e-mail
data, check if the e-mail data is normal.
of 1 Kbyte (1024 byte)
for 10 minutes while
receiving e-mails.
408
The response <ERR>
was returned from the
POP server.
412
There was no response - Consult your network administrator.
for more than 5 minutes - If errors occur many times on the same e-mail
when receiving e-mails.
data, check if the e-mail data is normal.
413
The IP address of the
- Consult your network administrator.
computer which sent
the e-mail is restricted in - Confirm the setting for [Receive/Print Range
Setting]. (See Network Guide)
[Receive/Print Range
Setting].
420
The size of the e-mail
data exceeded 1.5 GB.
Reduce the size of the e-mail data to 1.5 GB or
less.
421
The size of the e-mail
text exceeded 25 MB.
Reduce the amount of the e-mail text.
422
The size of the attached Reduce the size of the attached files to 100 MB
files exceeded 100 MB. or less.
Consult your network administrator.
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-47
2
Using the Printer
Display
Error Code
Remedy
423
An attached file in an
Change the format of the attached file into TIFF
unsupported format was
or JPEG.
sent.
424
The number of the
Reduce the number of the attached files to 14
attached files exceeded
or less.
14.
430
An e-mail in which
[From] is blank was
sent.
Using the Printer
2
Cause
Enter a name in [From].
Apply the following remedies to send the e-mail
so that it is not divided.
- Reducing the size of the e-mail to be sent
(Reducing it to the size which cannot be
Received a divided mail.
divided).
- Specifying the application settings so that the
e-mail is sent without being divided.
An e-mail which
included unsupported
encoding or character
encoding was sent.
Change the encoding or character encoding
into that supported by this printer (See p. 2-34).
Received a mail of an
unsupported type
(message type).
Change the content type into any one of the
following types that are supported by this
printer.
- text/plain
- image/jpeg
- image/tiff
- image/tiff-fx
- application/octet-stream
Received an
unsupported multipart
mail.
Change the content type of the multipart mail
into any one of the following types that are
supported by this printer.
- multipart/mixed
- multipart/parallel
- multipart/alternative
If the mail is nested, the mail is supported only
when "multipart/alternative" is nested in
"multipart/mixed".
432
Invalid data was sent.
Check if the sent e-mail data is normal.
433
An e-mail in HTML
format was sent.
This printer does not support e-mails in HTML
format.
431
2-48
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
The e-mail does not
contain a text.
Enter the text.
440
The job was canceled
for some reason.
Send the e-mail again.
441
An error has occurred
during the process.
Send the e-mail again.
499
An error has occurred in
See "Message List," on p. 7-23.
the printer.
2
Using the Printer
434
E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-49
Printing/Saving Jobs
(Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
If you install an optional hard disk in this printer, you can use various print job
process functions with the printer driver for this printer.
NOTE
You cannot use this function on the DOS application, UNIX or other computer on which
the printer driver cannot be used. Print jobs are processed in the [Print] mode.
Using the Printer
2
Job Process Method Types
You can use the following functions with the printer driver for this printer.
NOTE
• The message <53 SEC.PRINT ERR> or <53 STORE ERROR> appears when the
amount of data or number of jobs exceeds the limit that you can save on the hard disk. If
either of these messages appear, skip the error by pressing [Online]. However, the jobs
in which you skipped the error are deleted. Therefore, delete any unnecessary job from
among the jobs saved on the hard disk before performing a secured print or saving a job.
• If you want to use the "Encrypted Secured Print" function in which the security for data
communication is reinforced, you need to install "Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in".
For details on the installation procedure, see "Readme.txt" in the supplied CD-ROM.
■ [Print] Mode
Performs regular printing.
NOTE
You can use this mode even if a hard disk is not installed in the printer.
■ [Secured Print] Mode
Allows you to specify a user name and password for print jobs. Print jobs are saved on the
hard disk in the printer, and you can print by entering passwords from the printer's control
panel or the Remote UI. This function is convenient when you print a confidential
document etc. that you do not want others to read.
NOTE
• The jobs saved on the hard disk using the [Secured Print] mode are deleted in the
following circumstances:
- When the printer is turned OFF
- When a hard reset or soft reset is performed
- After a secured print job is printed
- When no printing operation has been performed by the printer's control panel or
Remote UI for a fixed period
2-50
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
• The time interval from when no printing operation is not performed by the Remote UI or
printer's control panel for a fixed period until the printer deletes encrypted secured print
jobs is set to "1 hour" in the default settings. You can change the setting for the time
interval. For more details, see "SECURING TIME," on p. 5-26.
■ [Store] Mode
NOTE
The print jobs printed in the [Store] mode are saved on the hard disk, and they are not
deleted even after turning the printer OFF. When you want to delete these jobs, use the
Remote UI.
■ [Edit and Preview] Mode
This mode is used for editing multiple print jobs in [Canon PageComposer]. The edit
function allows you to change the page order, display the preview of printout results, or
print with the number of copies specified. This function is convenient when you print
documents to make a simple booklet or edit and print document data from multiple
applications or files into a booklet.
NOTE
You can use this mode even if a hard disk is not installed in the printer.
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-51
2
Using the Printer
This mode is used for saving print jobs in the hard disk (boxes) in the printer. To print any
of the saved jobs, specify the job in a box using the printer's control panel or Remote UI.
The Remote UI is convenient when you print the forms that you use frequently, because it
allows you to specify the number of copies or pages to be printed. Also, because you can
specify the box when saving data, you can classify the jobs by use.
Printing with a Password Specified (Secured Print/
Encrypted Secured Print)
In a secured print or encrypted secured print, a password-protected job is saved in
the printer, and the job is printed by the printer's control panel or Remote UI. For
details on using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
This section describes the procedure for printing using the printer's control panel.
2
Using the Printer
1
Print a secured print job or encrypted secured print job using
the printer driver on the computer.
NOTE
• Print a secured print job by selecting [Secured Print] in the printer driver, and then
entering the user name and password.
• Specify the user name for a secured print with 15 or less alphanumeric characters
and the password with 1 to 7 characters.
• For the character restriction for the password for an encrypted secured print and
the procedure for printing encrypted secured print jobs, see Online Help of the
encrypted secured print driver.
You can display the Online Help from the Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add-in
For Client PC after installing the printer driver.
2
Move to the printer when printing.
NOTE
• Secured print jobs/encrypted secured print jobs are deleted in the following
circumstances:
- When the printer is turned OFF
- When a hard reset or soft reset is performed
- After a secured print job/encrypted secured print job is printed
- When no printing operation has been performed by the printer's control panel or
Remote UI for a fixed period
• The time interval from when no printing operation is not performed by the Remote
UI or printer's control panel for a fixed period until the printer deletes encrypted
secured print jobs is set to "1 hour" in the default settings. You can change the
setting for the time interval. For more details, see "SECURING TIME," on p. 5-26.
Online
3
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
2-52
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Job
4
Press [Job].
JOB
SECURED PRINT
→
The JOB menu is displayed.
5
Settings
OK
Utility
6
Settings
Select SECURED PRINT or ENCRYPTED PRINT using [
[ ], then press [OK].
SECURED PRINT
→
UserName01
→
If the user names appear, select the target user name using
[ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
UserName01
OK
] and
→
FileName01.txt →
Utility
7
Settings
If the file names appear, select the name of the target file
using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
FileName02.txt →
OK
PASSWORD
OK
8
<PASSWORD> is displayed. Press [OK].
PASSWORD
_
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-53
2
Using the Printer
Utility
Job
9
Select a number using [
[ ] and [ ].
] and [
], then move a digit using
Reset
Repeat this operation to enter the password.
Utility
1
Settings
1
NOTE
• Only numbers can be entered from the control panel.
• Depending on the version of the encrypted secured print driver, you can specify
alphabetic characters and marks for passwords. Print an encrypted secured print
job from the Remote UI if the password contains any alphabetic characters or
marks (See Remote UI Guide).
Using the Printer
2
OK
10 After entering the specified password, press [OK].
1234
The specified file is printed. If you enter a wrong password, the entered password
disappears. In this case, re-enter the correct password.
Printing a Job Saved in a Box (Stored Job Print)
In a stored job print, a job is saved on the hard disk in the printer by specifying
[Store] from the computer, and the job is printed by the printer's control panel or
Remote UI. For details on using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
This section describes the procedure for printing using the printer's control panel.
NOTE
• The saved jobs remains in the hard disk even after being printed. When you want to
delete the saved jobs, use the Remote UI. (See Remote UI Guide)
• Using the printer driver, you can change the name of the data to be saved when printing
the data. Enter the name with 24 or less alphanumeric characters.
1
Select [Store] in the printer driver on the computer, specify
the box in which you want to store the job, and then print.
NOTE
Up to the total of 100 jobs in all the boxes can be saved.
2-54
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
Online
2
Move to the printer when printing.
3
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
4
Press [Job].
2
JOB
SECURED PRINT
→
The JOB menu is displayed.
Utility
5
Select STOREJOB PRINT using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
STOREJOB PRINT →
BOX NO.0
OK
Utility
6
Settings
OK
OK
7
→
Select the number for the box in which the job is stored using
[ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
BOX NO.2
→
FileName.txt
→
If <PASSWORD> appears, press [OK].
Job
PASSWORD
Reset
_
Utility
Select a number using [
Settings
] and [
], then move a digit using [
] and [
].
Repeat this operation to enter the password.
1
1
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
2-55
Using the Printer
Job
Utility
Settings
OK
8
Select the name of the target file using [
press [OK].
ListFile.doc
→
The specified file is printed.
Using the Printer
2
2-56
Printing/Saving Jobs (Only When the Hard Disk Is Installed)
] and [
], then
Print Mode
This printer has four emulation modes, "the PCL mode", "the PS mode", "the
IMAGING mode", and "the PDF1.5 mode", and it detects received print data
automatically and switches to the appropriate print mode and print.
Types of the Print Mode
The following shows the emulation modes that can be used with this printer.
■ PCL Mode
PCL is a command system to control page printers developed by Hewlett-Packard
Company.
Print data of PCL-compatible applications in this mode. If the supplied PCL printer driver
is installed, data is printed in the PCL mode.
■ PS Mode
PostScript is a page-description language developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
This printer supports "PostScript 3 Emulation"*, making it possible to print from Windows
as well as Macintosh with PostScript.
To use the PS mode, the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is required.
Use the PS mode also when printing PS or EPS files using "Direct Print"*.
■ IMAGING Mode
Use the IMAGING mode when printing TIFF or JPEG files using "Direct Print"*.
■ PDF1.5 Mode
Use the PDF1.5 mode when printing PDF files using "Direct Print"*.
* "Direct Print" is a mode that transmits a file from the host terminal to the printer without the printer driver and allows
the printer to detect the file and print.
If Auto-Switch Fails
If the printer does not automatically switch the print mode successfully when you
are using the printer with its print mode set to AUTO SELECTION (default), remove
the unnecessary print mode from the target modes for the auto-switch.
Print Mode
2-57
2
Using the Printer
The printer switches the print mode by default normally. However, if the printer does
not automatically switch the print mode successfully, change the setting.
NOTE
If the printer does not automatically switch the print mode successfully even after
changing the setting, print with the print mode fixed at the appropriate one for the print
data (See "MODE SELECTION," on p. 5-66).
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
Using the Printer
2
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
→
Select PRINT MODE using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
PRINT MODE
MODE SELECTION →
OK
The item for PRINT MODE is displayed.
Utility
3
Select AUTO SWITCH using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
AUTO SWITCH
PCL
OK
Utility
4
Settings
Select the unnecessary print mode using [
press [OK].
=ON
5
→
Select OFF using [
] and [
Settings
OFF
=OFF
OK
→
The setting value is changed..
2-58
] and [
IMAGING
OK
Utility
→
Print Mode
], then press [OK].
], then
Canceling a Job
Outputting Data (Forced Output)
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the
data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed properly.
As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot print the next job because
the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to output the
print data using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Data from PCL/PS/UFR II Printer Driver cannot be output.
• If you have output data, the data being printed is deleted. Print the data from the
computer again as needed.
• You cannot output data while the Message indicator is on. If you want to delete the
received data, perform a soft reset. (See p. 2-61)
• When you are using an optional hard disk, set MODE TIMEOUT in the SETUP menu to a
setting other than OFF. It is recommended that you should specify the default setting, 15
seconds, if possible.
NOTE
• The Job indicator is on when any print data remains in the printer memory or when no
print data remains in the printer but a job has not yet been completed.
• If MODE TIMEOUT for a job is specified, data less than one page is also output
automatically when the specified time has elapsed (Data from PCL/PS/UFR II Printer
Driver is not output.). MODE TIMEOUT for a job is set to 15 seconds in the default
settings.
• If the Job indicator does not go off even after outputting the data, perform a soft reset.
(See p. 2-61)
Canceling a Job
2-59
2
Using the Printer
When a part of print data has already been sent to the printer, the print job may not
be finished even if you cancel the job from the computer. In this case, you can
output the data to finish the printing process of the printer or cancel the job being
processed in the printer or all the jobs.
Reset
1
Press [Reset].
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
Using the Printer
2
Utility
2
Select FORM FEED using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
FORM FEED
OK
→
The data remaining in the memory is printed.
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job)
If you want to cancel the job currently being printed, perform [Cancel Job] using the
following procedure. A job cancel allows you to cancel the job currently being
received or processed. This option does not affect the next print data or the jobs
that have not been processed yet.
IMPORTANT
• Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (While the Job indicator is on or
blinking). No job is canceled by pressing [Cancel Job] when the Job indicator is off.
• The data that has already been processed and is being printed (started to be fed) cannot
be canceled. In this case, the next print data may be canceled.
• When there is any print data sent from a printer driver other than that for this printer,
multiple data may be canceled.
NOTE
When canceling a job, you may not be able to cancel the job even if <03 CANCELING
JOB> is displayed. The secure print job before entering the password and the job to be
stored in the box cannot be canceled. Delete the secure print job before entering the
password and the job to be stored in the box with Remote UI. (See Remote UI Guide)
Cancel a job using the following procedure. When canceling a job, be sure that the
Job indicator is on or blinking (the job that you want to cancel is being received or
being processed).
2-60
Canceling a Job
Cancel Job
OK
1
Press [Cancel Job].
2
When canceling the job, press [OK].
CANCEL?
03 CANCELING JOB
2
A4
<03 CANCELING JOB> appears, and the print data being processed is canceled.
The job is canceled when <00 READY> appears.
IMPORTANT
You cannot operate the printer while <03 CANCELING JOB> is displayed.
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft
Reset)
If you want to cancel the process currently being performed, perform [Soft Reset]
using the following procedure. A soft reset deletes the print data received by all the
interfaces, the job being processed, and the print data in the printer memory.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to operate the printer from the computer to cancel printing before canceling the
job from the printer (Soft Reset).
• When a soft reset is performed, the data being printed and the data being received by all
the interfaces is deleted. Therefore, perform printing from the computer again as needed.
• The data that has been already sent to the memory are all deleted even if it is the data of
other interface. If you are using the printer on a network, be careful so that this operation
does not affect the data from other computers when performing this procedure.
NOTE
Hard resets delete all the registered files such as the form data saved in the RAM of the
printer, but soft resets do not delete them.
Reset
1
Press [Reset].
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
Canceling a Job
2-61
Using the Printer
00 READY
Utility
2
Settings
Select SOFT RESET using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Holding down the [OK] key 3 seconds or more is the operation for HARD RESET.
SOFT RESET
OK
→
03 SOFT RESET
When <03 SOFT RESET> disappears, the soft reset is completed.
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)
Using the Printer
2
When you want to delete all the jobs and data sent to memory for some reason,
perform [Hard Reset] using the following procedure. A hard reset deletes the print
data received by all the interfaces, the job being processed, and the print data in
the printer memory.
IMPORTANT
• If the printer is reset while it is receiving data, the data that has not yet been sent to the
memory will be sent after the reset. However, the data may not be printed properly.
• The data that has been already sent to the memory are all deleted even if it is the data of
other interface. If you are using the printer on a network, be careful so that this operation
does not affect the data from other computers when performing this procedure.
Reset
1
Press [Reset].
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
Utility
2
Select SOFT RESET using [
Settings
SOFT RESET
2-62
Canceling a Job
→
] and [
].
3
Hold down [OK] until HARD RESET is displayed, then release
the button.
Hold down the button (approximately 3 seconds) until HARD RESET is displayed.
Holding down the button less than 3 seconds is the operation for SOFT RESET.
SOFT RESET
HARD RESET
2
03 HARD RESET
Using the Printer
OK
When <03 HARD RESET> disappears, the hard reset is completed.
Canceling a Job
2-63
Using the Printer
2
2-64
Canceling a Job
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used with this printer, and how to load
and output paper.
Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Storing Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Paper Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Paper Capacity of Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Selecting a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Paper Capacity of the Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Precautions on Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Loading Paper in Cassette 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Loading Standard Size Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Loading Custom Size Paper or Paper at a Size of 8K or 16K in Cassette 2, 3, or 4 . . . . . . . . .3-37
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
2-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and 1-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
Manual 2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Printing with a Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Specifying a Gutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Paper Loading Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-1
Paper Requirements
Usable Paper
To ensure optimum performance, use only paper that falls within the specifications
in the following lists. Using inappropriate paper may result in deterioration in print
quality or paper jams.
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
When continuously printing the paper of 279.4 mm wide (Letter size) or less, the safety
function that prevents damages caused by heat may slow the print speed down in stages.
(The print speed may drop to approx. 10 pages/min. in printing A5, B5, and B4 size plain
paper.)
Paper Size
The following shows the paper sizes that can be used with this printer. The symbol
" " indicates the paper that can be used for 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided
printing, the symbol " " indicates the paper that can be used for only 1-sided
printing, and the symbol "-" indicates the paper that cannot be used.
Paper Information
Paper Size
Multi-purpose Cassette
Tray
1
Cassette Cassette Cassette
2
3
4
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
A5*1
B5*1
A4*1
B4*2
A3*2
Statement *1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
Letter*
Executive*1
Legal*2
Ledger (11 x 17)*2
12 x 18*2
2
8K *
16K *1
3-2
Paper Requirements
Paper Information
Paper Size
Multi-purpose Cassette
Tray
1
Custom Size
*3
Long Size*2
*5
Cassette Cassette Cassette
2
3
4
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
*4
*4
*4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Envelope COM10
104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
-
-
-
-
Envelope C5
162.0 mm x 229.0 mm
-
-
-
-
Envelope Monarch
98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
-
-
-
-
Envelope B5
176.0 mm x 250.0 mm
-
-
-
-
2
Envelope*
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Envelope DL
110.0 mm x 220.0 mm
*1 Paper can be loaded only in landscape orientation.
*2 Paper can be loaded only in portrait orientation.
*3 The following sizes of custom size paper can be loaded.
-When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 98.0 to 320.0 mm; Length 139.7 to 457.2 mm
-When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used):
Width 139.7 to 297.0 mm; Length 139.7 to 297.0 mm
The following sizes of custom size paper can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.
-When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 312.0 mm; Length 210.0 to 431.8 mm
-When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used):
Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
*4 The following sizes of custom size paper can be loaded (They are also the sizes of paper on which automatic 2-sided
printing can be performed).
-When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 210.0 to 431.8 mm
-When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used):
Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
*5 The following sizes of long size paper can be loaded in portrait orientation.
-Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 457.3 to 1,200.0 mm
Paper Requirements
3-3
Paper Type
The following shows the paper types that can be used with this printer. The symbol
" " indicates the paper that can be used for 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided
printing, the symbol " " indicates the paper that can be used for only 1-sided
printing, and the symbol "-" indicates the paper that cannot be used.
Paper Information
Multipurpose
Tray
Paper Type
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Cassette 3
(Optional)
Cassette 4
(Optional)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Plain paper*
(64 - 105 g/m2)
3
Heavy paper
Paper Loading and Output Tray
106 - 169 g/m2
2
170 - 220 g/m
Coated paper
Labels
Envelopes
2
* 100 % recycled paper (64 - 105 g/m ) can be used as plain paper.
■ Plain Paper
This printer can print plain paper at standard sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12 x 18,
Statement, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K, at custom sizes, and at
long sizes that weighs 64 to 105 g/m2.
Standard size paper (paper at a size other than sizes of Statement, 8K, and 16K) can be
fed from a paper cassette or the multi-purpose tray. Plain paper at the sizes of Statement,
8K, and 16K can be fed from the multi-purpose tray. Automatic 2-sided printing can be
performed on paper at sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Statement, Ledger (11 x 17), Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8K, and 16K.
Custom size paper and long size paper can be fed from the multi-purpose tray. Custom
size paper can be used for automatic 2-sided printing from the multi-purpose tray. By
installing the optional paper feeders, you can perform automatic 2-sided printing because
custom size paper can be fed from Cassette 2, Cassette 3, and Cassette 4.
*
100 % recycled paper (64 - 105 g/m2) can be used as plain paper.
■ Heavy Paper
This printer can print heavy paper at standard sizes of A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12 x 18,
Statement, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K, at custom sizes, and at
long sizes that weighs 106 to 220 g/m2. Heavy paper can be fed only from the
multi-purpose tray, and only 1-sided printing can be performed on it.
■ Coated Paper
This printer can print A3 and A4 size coated paper. Load coated paper in the
multi-purpose tray.
3-4
Paper Requirements
■ Label
This printer can print A4 size labels. Labels can be fed from a paper cassette or the
multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the labels in the following conditions. Using inappropriate labels may result in
paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.
- Peeled labels or partly used labels
- Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet
- Labels with uneven adhesive
■ Envelope
The envelopes that can be used with this printer are as follows.
You can feed envelopes from the multi-purpose tray.
Envelope DL
Envelope Monarch
Envelope B5
(110.0 mm x 220.0 mm)
(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
(176.0 mm x 250.0 mm)
Envelope COM10
Envelope C5
(104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
(162.0 mm x 229.0 mm)
*
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
You cannot use envelopes at sizes of DL, COM 10, Monarch, and C5 that have a flap on the short edge.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use the following types of envelopes. Using inappropriate envelopes may result in
paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.
- Envelopes with fasteners or snaps
- Envelopes with address windows
- Envelopes with adhesive on the surface
- Wrinkled or creased envelopes
- Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven
- Irregularly-shaped envelopes
• Before loading the envelopes, flatten the stack of envelopes to release any remaining air,
and press the fold lines along the edges tight.
• Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.
Paper Requirements
3-5
• When loading envelopes at a size of DL, COM10, C5, or Monarch, load them so that the
flap is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
• When printing envelopes of the Envelope B5 size, close the flaps and load them so that
the envelopes are printed from the top (the edge with the flap).
• Printing speed drops when printing envelops.
NOTE
When printing envelopes, they may be creased.
3-6
Paper Requirements
Printable Area
The following shows the printable area of this printer. However, if you are using the
PS/UFR II printer driver and select the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting
Point] check box, you can extend the printable area to near the edges of the paper.
In order to specify the setting for [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point],
display the following dialog box.
• For
UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Finishing Details] dialog box by clicking
[Finishing Details] in the [Finishing] sheet.
• For PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PS printer driver.
For more details, see the Help of the PS/UFR II printer driver.
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
■ Plain Paper/Heavy Paper/Coated Paper/Label
The printable areas are as follows.
- UFR II Printer Driver
5 mm
- PCL 5c/PCL 6 Printer Driver
5 mm
4.23 mm
4.23 mm
5 mm
4.23 mm
5 mm
4.23 mm
- PS Printer Driver
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
Paper Requirements
3-7
■ Envelope
The printable areas are as follows.
You may have to change the printable area before printing depending on the application
you use.
(Sample: Envelope COM10)
- UFR II/PCL 5c/PCL 6 Printer Driver
10 mm
241.3 mm
(9.50 in.)
- PS Printer Driver
10 mm
4 mm
10 mm
104.7 mm
(4.13 in.)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
241.3 mm
(9.50 in.)
4 mm
4 mm
104.7 mm
(4.13 in.)
10 mm
4 mm
Unusable Paper
To avoid problems such as paper jams and other malfunctions, the following types
of paper should never be used:
IMPORTANT
• Paper that jams easily
- Paper that is too thick or too thin
- Irregularly-shaped paper
- Wet or moist paper
- Torn or damaged paper
- Rough, extremely smooth, or glossy paper
- Paper with binding holes or perforations
- Curled or creased paper
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)
- Labels with backing sheet that is easily peeled off
- Paper that has already been printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The
reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you
can perform 2-sided printing manually on the other side of previously printed paper. You
cannot print on the printed side again.)
- Paper with jagged edges (paper that has been poorly cut)
- Wrinkled paper
- Paper with the corners folded
• Paper that changes its quality at a high temperature
- Paper that contains ink that melts, burns, evaporates or emits harmful gases at or lower
than the heating temperature (approx. 190 °C or 374 °F) of the fixing unit
- Heat-sensitive paper
- Treated color paper
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)
- Paper with adhesive on the surface
3-8
Paper Requirements
• Paper that damages the printer
- Carbon paper
- Paper with staples, clips, ribbons or tapes
- Paper that has already been printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The
reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you
can perform 2-sided printing manually on the other side of previously printed paper. You
cannot print on the printed side again.)
• Paper that is difficult for the toner to fix onto
- Paper with rough surfaces
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for ink jet printers, etc.)
- Paper containing thick fibers
Storing Paper
The quality of paper may deteriorate if it is stored improperly even when the paper
meets the normal specifications. Inferior paper may cause misfeeds, paper jams, or
deterioration in print quality.
Observe the following guidelines when storing and handling paper:
IMPORTANT
• Store paper away from moisture.
• Paper wrappers help avoiding moisture and dryness. Keep paper in the wrapper until it is
ready to be used. Store all unused paper in a wrapper.
• Store paper on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper on the floor where water and moisture can accumulate.
• When you store paper, prevent it from curling or being folded.
• Do not store paper vertically or store too many stacks of paper in one pile.
• Do not store paper in places exposed to direct sunlight or places with low humidity.
• If the paper storage room and work area differ from each other significantly in
temperature or humidity, keep packed paper stack in the work area for at least one day
prior to printing so that it can adapt to the new environment. When paper is moved to a
location where the temperature or humidity differs significantly, the paper may curl or
become creased.
Paper Requirements
3-9
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Storing Printouts
When handling or storing printouts printed by this printer, be careful of the following
points:
IMPORTANT
• Avoid storing printouts with PVC materials such as clear folders. Otherwise toner may
melt and stick to the PVC material.
• Use insoluble adhesive when gluing printouts. Toner may melt when soluble adhesive is
used. Before using the adhesive, test it with paper that is no longer required.
Make sure that the printed paper is completely dry before placing one over another.
Toner may melt if they are placed together half-dried.
• Store paper on a flat surface. Toner may peel when they are folded or creased.
• Avoid storing printouts at high temperatures. Otherwise toner may melt and blot.
• Put printouts in a binder when storing them for a long period of time (two years or longer).
(Printouts may discolor when they are stored for a long period of time.)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
3-10
Paper Requirements
Paper Source
This printer is supplied with two paper sources: the paper cassette (Cassette 1) and
multi-purpose tray. By installing the optional paper feeders (Cassette 2, Cassette 3,
and Cassette 4), you can use up to five paper sources.
Paper Source Type
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
This printer has the following paper sources:
(A): Multi-purpose Tray
(B): Cassette 1
(C): Cassette 2 (Optional)
(D): Cassette 3 (Optional)
(E): Cassette 4 (Optional)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
NOTE
Up to 3 paper feeders can be installed.
Paper Source
3-11
Paper Capacity of Paper Source
Paper Source
Multipurpose
Tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Cassette 3
(Optional)
Cassette 4
(Optional)
Plain paper
(80 g/m2)
Approx. 90
sheets
Approx. 230
sheets
Approx. 550
sheets
Approx. 550
sheets
Approx. 550
sheets
Heavy paper
(128 g/m2)
Approx. 50
sheets
-
-
-
-
Coated paper
Approx. 50
sheets
-
-
-
-
Label
Approx. 40
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Envelope
Approx. 10
sheets
-
-
-
-
Paper Type
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Selecting a Paper Source
A paper source can be selected using the following procedure.
■ When printing from Windows or Macintosh
Select a paper source in the printer driver. Because the default setting for the paper
selection in the printer driver is set to [Auto], if a paper size is specified by an application,
the printer selects the paper source automatically and feeds paper from the paper source.
Even when the paper source runs out of paper during printing, if paper of the same size is
loaded in other paper source, the paper source is switched automatically and the paper is
fed.
If you want to specify a paper source, select the paper source in the printer driver. For
details on using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, select a paper source using the control panel. The default setting for
this printer's paper source is set to AUTO.
Select a paper source with the printer's control panel using the following procedure.
3-12
Paper Source
Feeder Selection
1
Press [Feeder Selection].
PAPER SOURCE
→
PAPER SOURCE is displayed in the display.
Utility
2
Select PAPER SOURCE using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
Utility
3
→
=AUTO
→
Select the paper source using [
3
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
CASSETTE 1
→
=CASSETTE 1
→
NOTE
• CASSETTE 2, CASSETTE 3, and CASSETTE 4 are displayed only when the
paper feeders are installed.
• If paper of the same size is loaded in two or more paper sources when the paper
source setting is specified to be selected automatically, paper is fed from the upper
paper source regardless of the status of the paper source indicators. When the
paper source runs out of paper, the paper source automatically switches to other
one in which paper of the same size is loaded.
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper
Cassette
Be careful of the following points when handling the multi-purpose tray or paper
cassette.
IMPORTANT
• Do not pull out the paper cassette while the printer is printing. This may result in paper
jams or damage to the printer.
• Do not touch the paper in the multi-purpose tray or pull it out during printing. This may
result in a faulty operation.
• Refill the paper cassette after all the loaded paper runs out. If the cassette is refilled
when paper still remains in the cassette, it may result in misfeeds.
Paper Source
3-13
Paper Loading and Output Tray
OK
PAPER SOURCE
• Do not put anything other than the printing paper on the multi-purpose tray. Also, do not
press on top of or apply excessive force to the multi-purpose tray. This may result in
damage to the multi-purpose tray.
• Do not touch the black rubber pad in Cassette 1 and the paper feed rollers in Cassette 2,
3, and 4. This may result in misfeeds.
- Cassette 1
Rubber pads
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
- Cassette 2, 3, and 4
Paper feed roller
3-14
Paper Source
NOTE
Before closing the multi-purpose tray, remove any loaded paper.
Keep the multi-purpose tray closed when it is not used.
a
b
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
c
Paper Source
3-15
Output Trays
Output Tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray on the top of the printer with the printed
side facing down. Printed paper piles in order of page.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the
printer is not printing, sudden rotation of the roller may catch your hands or
clothing, resulting in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• When printing long size paper, take out one piece at a time each time it is output.
• Do not touch the paper until it is output to the output tray completely.
2-sided Printing
3-16
Output Trays
The paper is once output partially after the front side is
printed, and then it is fed again to be printed on the
reverse side. After the reverse side is printed, the paper
is output completely.
Paper Capacity of the Output Tray
Paper Type
Plain paper (Ex. 80 g/m2)
Paper Capacity*1
Approx. 250 sheets
2
Heavy paper (Ex. 128 g/m )
Approx. 200 sheets
Coated paper
Approx. 150 sheets
Label
Approx. 100 sheets
Envelope
Approx. 20 sheets
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
*1 Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment or paper type.
Output Trays
3-17
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
When printing from the paper cassette, perform the following procedure.
■ Loading paper
The following kinds of paper can be loaded in the paper cassette.
Paper Size
Loading Procedure
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11
x 17), Legal, Letter, Executive
Loading in Cassette 1: p. 3-20
Loading in Cassette 2, 3, or 4*: p. 3-28
Paper Type
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Plain paper
Custom paper sizes*, 8K*, 16K* p. 3-37
Labels
*
A4
Loading in Cassette 1: p. 3-20
Loading in Cassette 2, 3, or 4*: p. 3-28
Only when the optional paper feeders are installed
■ Specifying a paper type (See p. 3-46)
■ Specifying the printer driver settings (See Help of the printer driver)
When printing from the printer driver, specify the following settings. For more details on
using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
[Page Setup] Sheet
[Output Size] = the size of the loaded paper
[Paper Source] Sheet
[Paper Source] = [Cassette 1]
[Cassette 2]
[Cassette 3]
[Cassette 4]
[Paper Type] = [Plain Paper]: Plain Paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
[Plain Paper L]: When any of the following problems occur on printing
paper with [Plain Paper] specified, specify [Plain Paper L].
- When the paper curls excessively on printing plain paper (64 g/m2)
- When the printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide
(Letter size) or less continuously
[Label]: Labels
IMPORTANT
• For more details on the usable paper, see "Usable Paper," on p. 3-2.
• For details on handling the paper cassette, see "Precautions for Handling the
Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette," on p. 3-13.
3-18
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Precautions on Loading Paper
Load paper when the printer status is in any of the following. When the Job
indicator is blinking, the printer is printing. Do not pull out the paper cassette.
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to open the covers or paper cassette during printing. The printer may stop,
disabling printing.
■ When the Job indicator is off
Cancel Job
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
3
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Online
Main Power
Reset
Off
■ When a message that informs you of a paper-out condition or requests
paper replacement is displayed
11 NO A4 PAPER
PC LOAD A4
■ When the printer is OFF
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-19
Loading Paper in Cassette 1
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
a
After lifting the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting it with the
other hand c as shown in the figures.
b
c
3-20
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
CAUTION
Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the printer before loading paper.
If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper
cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in
personal injury.
IMPORTANT
The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out
forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.
When changing the size of the paper to be loaded, adjust the
length of the paper cassette and change the positions of the
paper guides.
The paper sizes indicated on the paper guides are abbreviated as follows.
Paper Size
Paper Guides
Ledger
11 x 17
Legal
LGL
Letter
LTR
Executive
EXEC
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
2
3-21
● Adjust the length of the paper cassette according to the size of the
paper to be loaded.
When loading paper in landscape orientation, such as when loading A4, B5, A5,
Letter, or Executive size paper, shorten the paper cassette.
When loading paper in portrait orientation, such as when loading A3, B4, Ledger
(11 x 17), or Legal size paper, extend the paper cassette.
To adjust the length of the paper cassette, push up the lock release levers gently
to release the lock, slide the paper cassette by holding the rear portion of the
paper cassette, and then push down the lock release levers to lock the cassette.
Release
Side View Release
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Lock
Lock
Side View
● While holding the lock release lever of the rear paper guide a, slide
the guide to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
a
If the paper size is
indicated on the left,
align this point to the
size of the paper to
be loaded.
If the paper size is
indicated on the right,
align this point to the size
of the paper to be loaded.
b
3-22
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
● While holding the lock release lever of the side paper guides a,
slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
The side paper guides move together.
Top View
Align this part
with the size of
the paper to be
loaded.
Top View
a
b
3
Before loading labels, fan them in small batches and align the
edges.
Thoroughly fan in small batches
Tap the edges on a flat
surface a few times
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to fan the labels thoroughly before loading them. If they are not fanned
enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-23
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
4
Load the paper stack so that the rear edge is aligned with the
paper guide.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to check if the paper guide is at the position of the size of the loaded paper.
If the paper guide is set at a wrong position, this may result in misfeeds.
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.
NOTE
To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 3-70)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
3-24
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
5
Press down the paper stack so that it is loaded under the
hooks on the side paper guides (A).
Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack. If
there is no sufficient space, slightly reduce the amount of paper.
(A)
(A)
(B)
(B)
IMPORTANT
Up to approximately 230 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or approximately 50
sheets of labels can be loaded in a paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack
does not exceed the load limit marks (B) on the paper guides. If the paper stack
exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.
6
Attach the label for the size of the loaded paper to the paper
size indicator, and then insert the indicator into the paper size
slot at the front of the paper cassette.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-25
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
7
While holding the tab (B) on the paper size setting switch (A)
a, align the triangular mark on the paper size setting switch
with the size of the loaded paper b.
The following shows the abbreviations of paper sizes that are marked on the
paper cassette.
Paper Size
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Paper Size Setting Switch of a Paper Cassette
Ledger
11 x 17
Legal
LGL
Letter
LTR
Executive
EXEC
The default value is "A4".
(B)
a
b
(A)
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches that of the paper size setting
switch before setting the paper cassette in the printer. If the paper size setting
switch is not set to the proper position, this may result in printer malfunction.
3-26
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, insert it until it stops a as
shown in the figure.
3
a
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the printer c.
b
c
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the paper feeder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-27
Paper Loading and Output Tray
8
Next, specify the type of the paper in the paper cassette (See p. 3-46).
Loading Standard Size Paper in Cassette 2, 3, or 4
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
a
3-28
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting
the cassette with your left hand until the handle (A) on the right side of the paper
cassette appears completely c.
b
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
c
(A)
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, pull it out completely d as
shown in the figure.
d
CAUTION
Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the paper feeder before loading
paper. If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the
paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in
personal injury.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-29
IMPORTANT
• The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out
forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.
• Because the paper cassette is heavy, hold it with your both hands securely.
• Place the removed paper cassette on an even and stable surface.
2
When changing the size of the paper to be loaded, change the
positions of the paper guides.
The paper sizes indicated on the paper guides are abbreviated as follows.
Paper Size
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Paper Guides
Ledger
11 x 17
Legal
LGL
Letter
LTR
Executive
EXEC
● While holding the lock release lever of the rear paper guide a, slide
the guide to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
a
b
3-30
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
● While holding the lock release lever of the side paper guides a,
slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
The side paper guides move together.
b
a
Before loading labels, fan them in small batches and align the
edges.
Thoroughly fan in small batches
Tap the edges on a flat
surface a few times
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
NOTE
Be sure to fan the labels thoroughly before loading them. If they are not fanned
enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper jams.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-31
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
3
4
Load the paper stack so that the rear edge is aligned with the
paper guide.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to check if the paper guide is at the position of the size of the loaded paper.
If the paper guide is set at a wrong position, this may result in misfeeds.
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.
NOTE
To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 3-70)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
3-32
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
5
Press down the paper stack so that it is loaded under the
hooks on the side paper guides (A).
Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack. If
there is no sufficient space, slightly reduce the amount of paper.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)
IMPORTANT
Up to approximately 550 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or approximately 50
sheets of labels can be loaded in a paper cassette. Be sure that the paper stack
does not exceed the load limit marks (B) on the paper guides. If the paper stack
exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.
6
Attach the label for the size of the loaded paper to the paper
size indicator, and then insert the indicator into the paper size
slot at the front of the paper cassette.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-33
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
7
While holding the tab (B) on the paper size setting switch (A)
a, align the triangular mark on the paper size setting switch
with the size of the loaded paper b.
The following shows the abbreviations of paper sizes that are marked on the
paper cassette.
Paper Size
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Paper Size Setting Switch of a Paper Cassette
Ledger
11 x 17
Legal
LGL
Letter
LTR
Executive
EXEC
The default value is "A3".
(B)
a
CUSTOM
b
(A)
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches that of the paper size setting
switch before setting the paper cassette in the printer. If the paper size setting
switch is not set to the proper position, this may result in printer malfunction.
3-34
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Set the paper cassette in the paper feeder.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, push it to the position shown
in the figure a. Then, hold the front of the paper cassette with your right hand
and push it until it stops b.
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
8
a
b
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-35
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little c, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the paper feeder d.
c
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
d
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the paper feeder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
Next, specify the type of the paper in the paper cassette (See p. 3-46).
3-36
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Loading Custom Size Paper or Paper at a Size of 8K or 16K
in Cassette 2, 3, or 4
You can load paper of the following custom sizes.
• When
loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length
210.0 to 431.8 mm
• When
loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-37
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• When non-standard size paper is loaded, specify the setting for CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n =
2, 3, 4) in the control panel as follows.
- When the paper is loaded in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): CUSTOM SIZE
- When the paper is loaded in portrait orientation: CUSTOM SIZER
• When paper at a size of 8K or 16K is loaded, set CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the
control panel to 8K or 16K.
• When you change the orientation of the custom size paper loaded in a paper cassette
frequently, it is convenient if you set CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the control panel
to MIXED SIZES. When CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) is set to MIXED SIZES, you do
not need to specify the setting for CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) each time you change
the paper orientation. However, when specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size
of the loaded paper matches the paper size specified in the printer driver before printing.
If they do not match, the printer may stop printing, displaying the message <41 CHK
PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper size specified in
the printer driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using
the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size paper
of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n=2, 3, 4) is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from UFR II
Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
a
3-38
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting
the cassette with your left hand until the handle (A) on the right side of the paper
cassette appears completely c.
b
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
c
(A)
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, pull it out completely d as
shown in the figure.
d
CAUTION
Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the paper feeder before loading
paper. If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the
paper cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in
personal injury.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-39
IMPORTANT
• The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out
forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.
• Because the paper cassette is heavy, hold it with your both hands securely.
• Place the removed paper cassette on an even and stable surface.
2
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper is aligned with
the front side of the paper cassette.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.
NOTE
• If you want to print custom size paper of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when
CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP is
set to MIXED SIZES, specify the settings according to the printer driver you are
using as follows.
- When using UFR II Printer Driver: Load the paper in landscape orientation
- When not using UFR II Printer Driver: Load the paper in portrait orientation
• To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 3-70)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
3-40
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3
Slide the paper guides.
● While holding the lock release lever of the rear paper guide a, slide
the guide to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
3
b
● While holding the lock release lever of the side paper guides a,
slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded b.
The side paper guides move together.
b
a
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-41
Paper Loading and Output Tray
a
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the paper. If the paper guides
are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
4
Press down the paper stack so that it is loaded under the
hooks on the side paper guides (A).
Make sure that there is sufficient space between the hooks and paper stack. If
there is no sufficient space, slightly reduce the amount of paper.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)
IMPORTANT
Up to approximately 550 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) can be loaded in a paper
cassette. Be sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks (B) on
the paper guides. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit marks, this may result in
misfeeds.
3-42
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
While holding the tab (B) on the paper size setting switch (A)
a, align the triangular mark on the paper size setting switch
with "CUSTOM" b.
The default value is "A3".
(B)
CUSTOM
a
3
b
(A)
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the paper size setting switch is set to "CUSTOM" before setting the
paper cassette in the printer. If the paper size setting switch is not set to the proper
position, this may result in printer malfunction.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-43
Paper Loading and Output Tray
5
6
Set the paper cassette in the paper feeder.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, push it to the position shown
in the figure a. Then, hold the front of the paper cassette with your right hand
and push it until it stops b.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
a
b
3-44
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little c, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the paper feeder d.
c
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
d
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the paper feeder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
Settings
7
To specify the size of the loaded paper on the control panel,
press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
8
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
FEEDER MENU
OK
→
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-45
Utility
9
Settings
Select CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) using [
press [OK].
], then
CASSETTE2 SIZE →
OK
=CUSTOM SIZE
Utility
] and [
→
10 Select the paper size using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
→
=CUSTOM SIZER
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the paper size, and the paper size for the paper
cassette is specified.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CUSTOM SIZER
IMPORTANT
Specify the paper size as follows.
- When loading custom size paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II
Printer Driver is used): CUSTOM SIZE
- When loading custom size paper in portrait orientation: CUSTOM SIZER
- When loading 8K size paper: 8K
- When loading 16K size paper: 16K
Next, specify the type of the paper in the paper cassette (See the next item).
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Paper Cassette
When you loaded paper in the paper cassette, specify the setting for CASSETTE(n)
TYPE (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) using the control panel according to the paper type.
Paper Type
Plain paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
SETUP Menu
CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
PLAIN PAPER
PLAIN PAPER L*
Label
LABEL
* When any one of the following problems occur on printing paper with PLAIN PAPER specified, specify PLAIN
PAPER L.
- When the paper curls excessively on printing plain paper (64 g/m2)
- When the printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide (Letter size) or less continuously
3-46
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
IMPORTANT
• Match the paper type specified in the SETUP menu in the printer and that specified in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting value for CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) is changed to that in the
printer driver by pressing [Online], allowing you to continue printing.
• Be sure to match the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette and the following
settings. If they do not match, this may result in crucial damage to the engine.
- The setting for [Paper Type] in the printer driver*
- The setting for CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
* When you are printing from an operating system on which you cannot use the printer driver (such as
MS-DOS and UNIX), match the setting for STD PAPER TYPE and the type of the loaded paper (See p.
5-33).
• If CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) is set to MIXED TYPES, the printer does not check
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
3-47
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
the type of the loaded paper against the paper type specified in the printer driver. Make
sure that the paper type specified in the printer driver matches the type of the paper
loaded in the paper cassette before using the printer.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
When printing from the multi-purpose tray, perform the following procedure.
■ Loading paper
The following kinds of paper can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
Paper Size
Paper Type
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Plain paper
Heavy paper
(106 - 169 g/m2)
Heavy paper
(170 - 220 g/m2)
- Standard sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12 x 18,
Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Letter,
Executive, Statement, 8K, 16K
- Custom paper sizes, Long sizes
Loading Procedure
p. 3-49
Coated paper
A3, A4
Labels
A4
Envelopes
Envelope DL (110.0 mm x 220.0 mm)
Envelope COM10 (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
Envelope C5 (162.0 mm x 229.0 mm)
p. 3-54
Envelope Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
Envelope B5 (176.0 mm x 250.0 mm)
■ Specifying a paper size and paper type (See p. 3-59, p. 3-61)
■ Specifying the Paper Setting in the Printer Driver (See Help of the printer
driver)
When printing from the printer driver, specify the following settings. This manual describes
the setting procedure, taking the printer driver for Windows as an example. For details on
using the printer driver for Macintosh, see Help of the printer driver.
[Page Setup] Page
[Output Size] = the size of the loaded paper
[Paper Source] Page
[Paper Source] = [Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Paper Type] = [Plain Paper]: Plain Paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
[Heavy Paper 1]: Heavy Paper (106 to 169 g/m2)
[Heavy Paper 2]: Heavy Paper (170 to 220 g/m2)
[Label]: Labels
[Coated Paper]: Coated Paper
[Envelope]: Envelopes
3-48
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
IMPORTANT
• For more details on the usable paper, see "Usable Paper," on p. 3-2.
• For details on how to handle the multi-purpose tray, see "Precautions for Handling the
Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette," on p. 3-13.
NOTE
If you are printing from an operating system on which the printer driver cannot be used,
previously specify the paper source to TRAY. (See p. 3-12)
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes)
1
Open the multi-purpose tray.
Holding the opening at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Perform the following procedure to load plain paper, heavy paper, coated paper, or
labels in the multi-purpose tray.
3-49
When loading long-size paper such as A3 and A4, pull out the auxiliary tray a,
and then open the tray extension b.
a
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
b
2
3-50
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper
width.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3
Before loading coated paper or labels, fan them in small
batches and align the edges.
Thoroughly fan in small batches
Tap the edges on a flat
surface a few times
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to fan the coated paper or labels thoroughly before loading them. If they
are not fanned enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper
jams.
• When fanning or aligning coated paper, try to hold the edges to avoid touching the
printing surface.
• Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the coated paper with
fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor print quality.
4
Gently load the stack of paper with the printing side facing
down until it touches the back of the tray.
(A)
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-51
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• When loading long size paper, load one piece at a time in the multi-purpose tray as
shown in the figure.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
• The multi-purpose tray can be loaded with up to the number of sheets listed below.
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks (A).
- Plain Paper : Approx. 90 sheets (Ex. 80 g/m2)
- Heavy paper : Approx. 50 sheets (Ex. 128 g/m2)
- Coated Paper : Approx. 50 sheets
- Label :
Approx. 40 sheets
• Load the paper so that it is straight.
• If the rear edge of the paper stack is not properly aligned, it may result in misfeeds
or paper jams.
• If the paper is curled or folded at corners, flatten it before loading it in the printer.
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.
3-52
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
NOTE
• If you want to print custom size paper of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when
TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP is set to MIXED
SIZES, specify the settings according to the printer driver you are using as follows.
- When using UFR II Printer Driver: Load the paper in landscape orientation
- When not using UFR II Printer Driver: Load the paper in portrait orientation
• To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 3-70)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
5
Align the paper guides with both sides of the stack.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the paper. If the paper guides
are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
Next, specify the paper size for the multi-purpose tray (See p. 3-59).
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-53
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Loading Envelopes
You can load envelopes at sizes of DL, COM10, C5, Monarch, and B5 in the
multi-purpose tray. Use the following procedure when loading envelopes in the
multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• The envelopes that can be used with this printer are Envelope DL, Envelope COM10,
Envelope C5, Envelope Monarch, and Envelope B5 with the following structures only.
Envelope DL
Envelope Monarch
Envelope B5
(110.0 mm x 220.0 mm)
(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
(176.0 mm x 250.0 mm)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Envelope COM10
Envelope C5
(104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
(162.0 mm x 229.0 mm)
* You cannot use envelopes at sizes of DL, COM 10, Monarch, and C5 that have a flap on the short edge.
• Do not use the envelopes with adhesive on the surface. This may result in poor print
quality or damage to the printer.
• When printing envelopes, you cannot print on any area within 10 mm (4 mm for the PS
printer driver) of the edges of paper. (If you have selected the [Print with Upper Left of
Sheet as Starting Point] check box in the [Finishing Details] dialog box in the UFR II
printer driver, you can extend the printable area to near the edges of the paper. For more
details, see Help of the UFR II printer driver.)
• Printing speed drops when printing envelops.
NOTE
When printing envelopes, they may be creased.
3-54
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
1
Open the multi-purpose tray.
Holding the opening at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.
2
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual envelope
width.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-55
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
3
Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface, flatten them to
release any remaining air, and be sure that the edges are
pressed tightly.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
4
5
3-56
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as
shown in the figure.
Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side
facing down and with the flaps closed and on the right side,
until it touches the back of the multi-purpose tray as shown in
the figure.
(A)
3
IMPORTANT
• Up to approximately 10 envelopes can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Make
sure that the stack of envelopes does not exceed the load limit marks (A).
• You cannot print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.
• When loading envelopes at a size of DL, COM10, C5, or Monarch, load them so
that the flap is toward the right of the printer when viewed from the front.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-57
Paper Loading and Output Tray
6
• When printing envelopes of the Envelope B5 size, close the flaps and load them so
that the envelopes are printed from the top (the edge with the flap).
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
7
Align the paper guides with both sides of the stack.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the envelopes. If the paper
guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
Next, specify the paper size for the multi-purpose tray (See p. 3-59).
3-58
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
When you loaded paper in the multi-purpose tray, specify the paper size for the
multi-purpose tray using the control panel. When using paper or envelopes of
standard size, specify its size. When loading non-standard size paper, specify
CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZER. The paper size setting for the multi-purpose
tray is set to "A4" by default.
Specify the paper size setting for the multi-purpose tray using the following
procedure.
NOTE
The names of the following paper sizes are indicated by an abbreviation.
12 x 18: TxE, Ledger (11 x 17): LD, Legal: LG, Letter: LT, Executive: EX, Statement: ST,
Envelope DL: DL, Envelope COM10: CO, Envelope C5: EC5, Envelope Monarch: MO,
Envelope B5: EB5, Custom Size: 80 to 99, Custom SizeR/Long Size Paper: 80R to 99R,
Free/Mixed Sizes: FR
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-59
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• Match the paper size specified in the SETUP menu of the printer and that specified in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE is changed to that in the printer driver by
pressing [Online], allowing you to continue printing.
• When non-standard size paper is loaded, specify the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE in
the control panel as follows.
- When the paper is loaded in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): CUSTOM SIZE
- When the paper is loaded in portrait orientation: CUSTOM SIZER
• When you change the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray frequently, it is convenient if
TRAY PAPER SIZE in the control panel is set to MIXED SIZES. If TRAY PAPER SIZE is
set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE each
time you load the different size paper. However, when specifying MIXED SIZES, make
sure that the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray matches the paper size
specified in the printer driver before printing. If they do not match, the printer may stop
printing, displaying the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may occur. Be
sure to check if the paper size specified in the printer driver matches the size of the paper
loaded in the multi-purpose tray before using the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size paper
of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, load
the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from UFR II Printer Driver,
load the paper in portrait orientation.
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
FEEDER MENU
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
OK
Utility
→
3
Select TRAY PAPER SIZE using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
=A4
OK
Utility
4
→
Select the paper size using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
B5
→
=B5
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the paper size, and the paper size for the
multi-purpose tray is specified.
Next, specify the paper type for the multi-purpose tray (See the next item).
3-60
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Specifying the Type of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
When you loaded paper in the multi-purpose tray, specify the setting for TRAY
PAPER TYPE according the paper type using the control panel. The printer applies
the appropriate print mode to the paper type. The default value is PLAIN PAPER.
Common SETUP Menu
Setting for TRAY PAPER TYPE
Paper Type
Plain paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
PLAIN PAPER*1
Heavy paper (106 - 169 g/m2) HEAVY PAPER 1
2
Coated paper
COATED PAPER*
Labels
LABEL
Envelopes
ENVELOPE
*1 When any of the following problems occur on printing paper with PLAIN PAPER specified, specify PLAIN PAPER L.
-When the paper curls excessively on printing plain paper (64 g/m2)
-When the printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide (Letter size) or less continuously
*2 When using coated paper at a size other than sizes of 106 to 169 g/m2, perform the following settings.
-When using paper of 105 g/m2 or less: Set TRAY PAPER TYPE to PLAIN PAPER
-When using paper of 170 to 220 g/m2: Set TRAY PAPER TYPE to COATED PAPER and COATED PAPER in
SP.PRINT MODE in the USER MAIN. options to ON.
IMPORTANT
• Match the paper type specified in the SETUP menu of the printer and that specified in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting for TRAY PAPER TYPE is changed to that in the printer driver by
pressing [Online], allowing you to continue printing.
• If the type of the paper practically loaded in the multi-purpose tray and the setting for
TRAY PAPER TYPE do not match, this may result in crucial damage to the engine. Be
sure to match the paper type.
• If TRAY PAPER TYPE is set to MIXED SIZES, the printer does not check the type of the
loaded paper against the paper type specified in the printer driver. Be sure to check if the
paper type specified in the printer driver matches the type of the paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray before using the printer.
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
→
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
3-61
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Heavy paper (170 - 220 g/m2) HEAVY PAPER 2
Utility
2
Select FEEDER MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
FEEDER MENU
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
OK
Utility
→
3
Select TRAY PAPER TYPE using [
] and [ ], then press [OK].
Settings
TRAY PAPER TYPE→
=PLAIN PAPER
OK
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Utility
4
→
Select the paper type using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
LABEL
→
=LABEL
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the paper type, and the paper type for the
multi-purpose tray is specified.
When printing from the printer driver on Windows or Macintosh, configure the printer
driver. (See Help of the printer driver)
When printing from DOS or UNIX, specify the settings for STD PAPER SIZE (See p.
5-31) and STD PAPER TYPE (See p. 5-33) using the control panel.
3-62
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided Printing
You can perform 2-sided printing with the standard equipment of this printer.
Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed on plain paper at sizes of A3, B4, A4,
B5, A5, Legal, Ledger (11 x 17), Statement, Letter, Executive, 8K, and 16K. The
following custom paper sizes of plain paper can be used for automatic 2-sided
printing.
Multi-purpose Tray
- When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 312.0 mm; Length
210.0 to 431.8 mm
- When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
• For Cassette 2, 3, and 4
- When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length
210.0 to 431.8 mm
- When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
IMPORTANT
• You cannot perform automatic 2-sided printing on heavy paper, coated paper, labels, and
envelopes.
• You can perform 2-sided printing on Statement size paper only from the multi-purpose
tray.
• You cannot perform 2-sided printing on 8K and 16K size paper from the paper cassette
(Cassette 1).
• When 2-sided printing is specified, and a job with odd number of pages is printed, the
printing surface of the last page are as follows according to the setting for ALT.METHOD
(See p. 5-42) or the paper source.
- When printing from the paper cassette
If ALT.METHOD is set to ON, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
If ALT.METHOD is set to OFF, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
- When printing from the multi-purpose tray
If ALT.METHOD is set to ON, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
If ALT.METHOD is set to OFF, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
• Set ALT.METHOD to OFF when you want to match the setting of the orientation or
printing side for the last page with those for its previous page, such as when you want to
print previously printed paper etc. whose printing orientation or printing side is fixed.
• During automatic 2-sided printing, do not touch the paper until it is output to the output
tray completely. In automatic 2-sided printing, the paper is partially output once after
printed on its surface and is fed again to be printed on its reverse side.
2-sided Printing
3-63
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
• For
NOTE
• Depending on the capacity of the RAM in the printer, the print quality may deteriorate, or
the printer may not be able to print, displaying <SPL MEM.FULL> when performing
automatic 2-sided printing on documents that make heavy use of lines or contain
complicated diagrams, charts, or graphs. In this case, take the following measures.
- Set GRADATION LEVEL to HIGH 1, then print again.
- Install an expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
• On automatic 2-sided printing, the reverse side of the paper is printed first, therefore the
paper should be loaded in the opposite orientation to that for 1-sided printing. If printing
on such paper with letterheads, in which faces and directional orientations are specified,
see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 3-70) and load the paper in the proper orientation.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and
1-sided Printing
Perform automatic 2-sided printing using the following procedure.
■ When printing from Windows
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, set [Print Style] in the [Finishing] sheet in the
printer driver to [2-sided Printing]. For details on using the printer driver, see Help of the
printer driver.
■ When printing from Macintosh
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, specify the settings in the printer driver. For
details on using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, specify the settings using the control panel. Switch between
automatic 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing with the printer's control panel using the
following procedure.
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
Settings
FEEDER MENU
OK
3-64
→
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
2-sided Printing
] and [
], then press [OK].
Utility
3
Select 2-SIDED PRINT. using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
2-SIDED PRINT. →
=OFF
OK
Utility
4
→
Select ON using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
→
=ON
→
3
"=" is displayed on the left of ON, and 2-sided printing is specified.
Manual 2-sided Printing
Since this printer can print on the other side of previously printed paper, you can
perform 2-sided printing on paper to which automatic 2-sided printing cannot be
applied. When printing the other side of previously printed paper, you need to
specify the settings using the printer driver or control panel.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set MANUAL 2-SIDED (See p. 5-37) to 2ND SIDE before printing the other
side of previously printed paper with this printer.
■ When printing from Windows
When printing the other side of previously printed paper, select the [Print on the Other
Side] check box in the [Paper Source] dialog box in the printer driver. For details on using
the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
■ When printing from Macintosh
When printing the other side of previously printed paper, specify the settings using the
printer driver. For details on using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, set MANUAL 2-SIDED to 2ND SIDE from the control panel.
Specify the settings for printing the other side of previously printed paper from the printer's
control panel using the following procedure.
2-sided Printing
3-65
Paper Loading and Output Tray
OK
ON
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
FEEDER MENU
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
OK
Utility
→
3
Select MANUAL 2-SIDED using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
MANUAL 2-SIDED →
=1ST SIDE
OK
Utility
4
→
Select 2ND SIDE using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
2ND SIDE
→
=2ND SIDE
→
"=" is displayed on the left of 2ND SIDE, and the settings for printing the other side
of previously printed paper are specified.
3-66
2-sided Printing
Printing with a Gutter
You can print with a margin for a gutter applied to an edge of paper. When applying
a gutter, specify the location (long edge or short edge) and the width (maximum: 50
mm).
ABC
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
FGHIJK
ABCDE
Paper Loading and Output Tray
DEF
FGHIJK
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
FGHIJK
ABC
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
3
Back
(2-sided printing)
FGHIJK
ABC
DEF
Front
ABCDE
ABC
Back
(2-sided printing)
ABCDE
Front
Binding location for when using
paper in landscape orientation
ABCDE
Binding location for when using
paper in portrait orientation
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after creating the gutter, the
part will be missing.
NOTE
• In the printer driver, selecting the edge to be bound specifies the (+) or (-) direction.
• For automatic 2-sided printing, the edges to be bound on both sides of paper are
automatically determined.
• The settings for OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are enabled regardless of the settings for a
gutter. Because of this, gutters on both sides of paper may be skewed if the settings for
OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are specified for 2-sided printing.
Printing with a Gutter
3-67
Specifying a Gutter
■ When printing from Windows
Specify the following settings in the printer driver. For details on using the printer driver,
see Help of the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] sheet in the printer driver.
2. Specify [Binding Location].
3. Click [Gutter] to specify the gutter width in the [Gutter Settings] dialog box.
■ When printing from Macintosh
Specify the settings in the printer driver. For details on using the printer driver, see Help of
the printer driver.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, perform the following procedure using the printer's control panel.
Settings
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
→
Select LAYOUT MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
LAYOUT MENU
COPIES
OK
Utility
3
→
Select BIND.LOCATION using [
] and [
Settings
OK
BIND.LOCATION
→
=LONG EDGE
→
The setting value for BIND.LOCATION is displayed.
3-68
Printing with a Gutter
], then press [OK].
Utility
4
Settings
OK
Select the target binding location using [
press [OK].
SHORT EDGE
→
=SHORT EDGE
→
] and [
], then
The selected binding location is specified.
Utility
5
Select GUTTER using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
→
=0.0
→
3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
OK
GUTTER
The setting value for GUTTER is displayed.
Utility
Settings
OK
6
Select the target value using [
Each time you press [
] or [
25.5
→
=25.5
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
], the value changes in 0.5 mm increments.
"=" is displayed on both sides of the value, and the gutter is specified.
Printing with a Gutter
3-69
Paper Loading Orientation
To print paper with letterheads or logos, load the paper in the proper orientation as
follows.
in the table indicates the feeding directions.
Loading A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Executive size
paper in landscape orientation
Portrait Layout
Portrait Layout
Landscape Layout
Multi-purpose Tray
Multi-purpose Tray
(Manual 2-sided Printing) (Automatic 2-sided Printing)
Multi-purpose Tray
(1-sided Printing)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Paper Cassette 1 to 4
Paper Cassette 1 to 4
(1-sided Printing)
(Automatic 2-sided Printing)
3
Landscape Layout
Loading A3, B4, Ledger (11 x 17), or Legal size
paper in portrait orientation
NOTE
• For details on the loading orientation of envelopes, see "Loading Paper (Other than
Envelopes)," on p. 3-49.
3-70
Paper Loading Orientation
• If you want to print custom size paper of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when
CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) or TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in
the SETUP menu is set to MIXED SIZES, specify the settings according to the printer
driver you are using as follows.
- When using the UFR II printer driver: Load the paper in landscape orientation
- When not using the UFR II printer driver: Load the paper in portrait orientation
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
Paper Loading Orientation
3-71
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
3-72
Paper Loading Orientation
The Printing Environment
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the functions and categories of the menu displayed in the printer's
control panel, how to use the operation keys, and how to view the display.
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Setting Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
How to Use the Operation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to View the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
How to View the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Menu Functions and Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
UTILITY Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
RESET Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
CANCEL JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Initializing the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-1
Menu Functions
This section describes the menu functions and their categories.
Menu Functions
Before printing, specify the total print pages, paper size, etc. Generally, these
settings are specified in an application or printer driver.
This printer, however, is equipped with many functions as well as the settings for
the total print pages and paper size, enabling printing for a wide array of uses.
Some settings for this printer cannot be specified by application or printer driver.
You can specify these settings using the "menu functions".
The Printing Environment
4
You can specify the settings using the menu functions easily because in the menu
functions a variety of settings are classified by purpose.
There are the following two kinds of procedures for specifying the menu functions.
■ Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel
Specify the settings by pressing the keys while checking the display on the printer.
■ Settings Using the Remote UI
Some settings specified by the control panel can be specified by a web browser from your
computer.
NOTE
• For this section, this manual describes only the procedures for specifying the menu
functions using the control panel. For details on specifying the settings using the Remote
UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
• The settings for the menu functions are registered to the memory (NVRAM) in which data
is not deleted normally even if the printer is turned OFF. Therefore, even after cycling the
power of the printer, it starts with its settings unchanged from when the printer was
turned OFF last time.
4-2
Menu Functions
Setting Priority
When the setting values for the same option are different between an application or
the printer driver and the menu functions, the setting specified in the application or
printer driver is effective. When specifying a setting only in the menu functions
using the control panel or the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is
effective.
Priority
High
Low
Control panel
Remote UI
The most resent
setting is effective
4
The printer driver and Remote UI are supplied with this printer. For details on using
the printer driver or Remote UI, see Help of the printer driver, and "Remote UI
Guide".
Depending on the settings, they become effective after cycling the power of the
printer or performing a hard reset.
● Setting Priority of Direct Print
When specifying a setting only in the menu functions using the control panel or the
[Device Settings] menu in the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is effective.
The direct print function gives priority to the contents specified using the [Direct Print]
menu in the Remote UI or tags in IFD (Image file directory) that the header of TIFF data of
image file has over those specified using the control panel or the [Device Settings] menu
in the Remote UI.
Priority
High
Low
[Direct Print] Menu in the
Remote UI
[Device Settings] Menu
in the Remote UI
Tags in TIFF data
Control Panel
Some of the tag function that the header of TIFF data has may be disabled.
Menu Functions
4-3
The Printing Environment
Application soft
Printer driver
Menu Categories
There are the following six categories of the menu.
For the functions and operation procedures, see "Menu Functions and Menu
Operation," on p. 4-9.
For details on each menu, see "Chapter 5 Printing Environment Settings".
CANCEL JOB Menu
Cancels the job currently being
received or processed.
4
Online
UTILITY Menu
JOB Menu
Operates secured print or jobs
stored in a box as well as prints
various log lists.
Prints information about the
current printer settings.
Cancel Job
Job
The Printing Environment
Utility
Settings
Power
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
Main Power
Reset
SELECT FEEDER Menu
RESET Menu
SETUP Menu
Specifies whether to feed paper
from the paper cassette or multipurpose tray and the paper size.
Resets the printer, outputs print
data, or performs a shutdown.
Specifies the printing environment
such as layout adjustment and
print quality setting.
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation
You can enter each menu when the printer is in the following status.
: The status that you can enter the menu
-: The status that you cannot enter the menu
When the printer is ready to print *1
When the printer
is online
SETUP Menu
When the printer
is offline
When an error is
occurring *2
*3
SELECT FEEDER Menu
*4
RESET Menu
JOB Menu
-
-
UTILITY Menu
-
-
*1 The printer is ready to print when the Ready indicator is on.
*2 An error is occurring in the printer when the Message indicator is on.
*3 You cannot specify the settings in the USER MAIN. options when the printer is in the online status.
*4 You cannot specify the settings for FORM FEED.
4-4
Menu Functions
How to Use the Operation Keys
Use the following keys for the menu operation.
Among the keys, [Setting], [Utility], [Job], [Reset], [Cancel Job], and [Feeder
Selection] have the function to display a menu.
CANCEL JOB Menu
JOB Menu
Display
SETUP Menu
Cancel Job
4
Job
Utility
Settings
Power
OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message
HDD
Job
The Printing Environment
Online
Main Power
Reset
RESET Menu
SELECT FEEDER Menu
UTILITY Menu
■ The functions of each key are as follows.
Key
Online
(Online)
Cancel Job
(Cancel Job)
Feeder Selection
(Feeder
Selection)
Functions
Switches between online and offline. The printer is online when the
indicator under the key is on and is offline when the indicator is off.
Indicated as [Online] in the manuals.
When the printer
is online
Immediately after
placing the printer
online
While the menu is
displayed*
If pressed when the Job indicator is on or
blinking (When data is being processed
or received), cancels the job currently
Does not function.
being processed. Indicated as [Cancel
Job] in the manuals.
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
Indicated as [Feeder Selection] in the
manuals.
Does not function.
How to Use the Operation Keys
4-5
Key
Utility
Functions
When the printer
is online
Immediately after
placing the printer
online
(Utility)
Job
4
The Printing Environment
(Job)
Reset
(Reset)
Displays the
UTILITY menu.
Does not function.
Indicated as [Utility]
in the manuals.
Displays the next left item in
the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric,
reduces the value. If you
keep holding down the key,
the speed of the value
decreasing is increased
depending on the setting
value. Indicated as [ ] in the
manuals.
Displays the JOB
menu. Indicated as
[Job] in the
manuals.
Does not function.
Displays the item of the next
upper hierarchy. Indicated as
[ ] in the manuals.
Displays the RESET menu. Indicated as
[Reset] in the manuals.
Executes the selected item.
Otherwise, goes down the
hierarchy. Indicated as [ ] in
the manuals. Has the same
function as [OK].
Displays the SETUP menu. Indicated as
[Settings] in the manuals.
However, the USER MAIN. options
cannot be specified when the printer is
online.
Displays the next right item in
the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric,
increases the value. If you
keep holding down the key,
the speed of the value
increasing is increased
depending on the setting
value. Indicated as [ ] in the
manuals.
Does not function.
Executes the selected item.
Otherwise, goes down the
hierarchy. Indicated as [OK]
in the manuals. Has the
same function as [ ].
Settings
(Settings)
While the menu is
displayed*
OK
(OK)
Power
If POWER SAVE MODE is set to a setting other than OFF, the printer
enters Power Save Mode (See p. 5-18).
(Control Panel
Hold down the switch for 4 seconds or more to execute SHUT DOWN
Power Switch
(See p. 5-115).
(Sub Power
Supply))
* Depending on the settings, the printer may operate differently from the description. For more details, see the
instructions for each setting.
4-6
How to Use the Operation Keys
How to View the Display
This section describes the contents of the letters that appear in the display when
specifying the menu functions.
Menu Structure
The menu structure looks like a chain (loop structure), and one of the menus on this
chain is displayed in the display. Therefore, continuously pressing [ ] or [ ]
displays the first menu again.
4
The Printing Environment
The menus consist of individual loop structures in each hierarchy.
Moves the menu from side to side
........
......
PDF
1.5 P
S INITIALIZE MENU
........
...... . .
........
CONTROL MENU
........
FEEDER MENU LAYOUT MENU......
How to View the Display
Up to 16 characters appear in a line in the display.
After you display a menu by pressing a key, the item of the first hierarchy in the
menu appears automatically.
If there is any selectable item in the same hierarchy, "➞" appears on the right in the
display.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
→
How to View the Display
4-7
If no action is taken after the lowest hierarchy in the menu is displayed, the item of
the next upper hierarchy and that of the currently selected hierarchy are displayed
alternately.
POWER SAVE MODE
PANEL OFF
→
"=" is displayed on the left in the display for the currently selected setting.
The Printing Environment
4
4-8
How to View the Display
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
This section describes the overview of the menus and operating procedures for
them.
SETUP Menu
This section describes the function of the SETUP menu and the operating
procedure for it.
SETUP Menu Functions
The SETUP menu allows you to configure a variety of printing environment such as
printing position, type of character set, and the selection of the interface for
connecting the printer to the computer.
Normally, you can configure a printing environment using an application or the
printer driver in a computer connected to the printer. However, some settings such
as interface configuration can be specified only in the SETUP menu of the printer.
Also, you can print using an application in which you cannot specify the print
settings or MS-DOS command directly. When you are printing using them, specify
the printing environment using the SETUP menu in the printer.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "SETUP Menu Settings," on p. 5-18.
Operating Procedure for the SETUP Menu
The SETUP menu consists of three hierarchies: "Option", "Setting", and "Setting
Value". Select the target options in each hierarchy.
As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for
setting TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options to B5. Start the key
operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Place the printer online.
Key Operation
Press [Online].
When the printer is online, the SETUP menu can
be displayed, however, the USER MAIN. options
cannot be specified.
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
4-9
The Printing Environment
4
2
Display the SETUP menu.
The SETUP menu is displayed.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
3
→
Select the option.
Press [
When the FEEDER MENU options are selected
The target option is displayed.
FEEDER MENU
4
Press [Settings].
] or [
].
→
Display the item.
Press [OK].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
The selected items are displayed.
4
The Printing Environment
5
Select the setting.
Press [
When TRAY PAPER SIZE is selected
The target item is displayed.
] or [
].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
6
Determine the selected setting.
=A4
7
Press [OK].
The selected settings are displayed.
→
Select the setting.
Press [
When B5 is selected
The target setting is displayed.
B5
] or [
].
→
8
Determine the selected setting.
Press [OK].
9
Switch back to online state.
Press [Online].
NOTE
• The printer can switch back to online when it is ready to print. The printer is ready to print
when the Ready indicator is on.
• If you press [ ] during the setting, the display goes back up the hierarchy.
• If you press [Online] during the setting, the setting is canceled.
• In some options, the settings are divided into two different hierarchies.
4-10
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
UTILITY Menu
This section describes the function of the UTILITY menu and the operating
procedure for it.
UTILITY Menu Functions
The UTILITY menu allows you to print the settings for the SETUP menu or perform
cleaning.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "UTILITY Menu Settings," on p. 5-104.
Operating Procedure for the UTILITY Menu
Exclusive Utilities are displayed only when either one of PCL UTILITY and PS
UTILITY is selected in the hierarchy of Common Utilities.
This section describes the procedure for printing FONTS LIST in PCL UTILITY as
an example. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
Key Operation
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
2
Display the UTILITY menu.
Press [Utility].
The UTILITY menu is displayed.
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
3
Select the Common Utility.
Press [
When PCL UTILITY is selected
The target option is displayed.
PCL UTILITY
4
→
].
→
Select Exclusive Utilities
FONTS LIST
] or [
→
Press [OK].
The Exclusive Utilities are displayed.
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
4-11
4
The Printing Environment
The UTILITY menu consists of two hierarchies: "Common Utilities" and "Exclusive
Utilities". Select the target options in each hierarchy.
5
Select the Exclusive Utility.
Press [
When FONTS LIST is selected
The target Exclusive Utility is displayed.
FONTS LIST
6
] or [
].
→
Determine the selected setting.
Press [OK].
A fonts list is printed.
NOTE
• If you did not select the Exclusive Utility (PCL UTILITY, PS UTILITY), Step 4 to 5 are
omitted.
• If you press [ ] during the setting, the display goes back up the hierarchy.
• If you press [Online] during the setting, the setting is canceled.
JOB Menu
The Printing Environment
4
This section describes the function of the JOB menu and the operating procedure
for it.
JOB Menu Functions
The JOB menu allows you to print secured print jobs, the jobs stored in a box, and
various kinds of log lists.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "JOB Menu Settings," on p. 5-109.
Operating Procedure for the JOB Menu
This section describes the procedure for printing JOB LOG LIST. Start the key
operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
2
Display the JOB menu.
Press [Job].
The JOB menu is displayed.
JOB
JOB LOG LIST
4-12
Key Operation
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
3
Select the item that you want to print.
Press [
When JOB LOG LIST is selected
The target item is displayed.
JOB LOG LIST
4
] or [
].
→
Print JOB LOG LIST.
Press [OK].
JOB LOG LIST is printed.
NOTE
If you press [Online] during the setting, the setting is canceled.
RESET Menu
This section describes the function of the RESET menu and the operating
procedure for it.
RESET Menu Functions
The RESET menu allows you to reset the printer (soft reset and hard reset), output
any print data remaining in the printer memory, perform SHUT DOWN to turn the
printer OFF when using the hard disk, and reset the counter of the toner cartridges.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "RESET Menu Settings," on p. 5-114.
Operating Procedure for the RESET Menu
This section describes the procedure for executing SOFT RESET as an example.
Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Display the RESET menu.
2
Press [Reset].
The RESET menu is displayed.
RESET
SOFT RESET
Key Operation
→
Select the item that you want to execute.
Press [
When SOFT RESET is selected
The target item is displayed.
SOFT RESET
] or [
].
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
4-13
The Printing Environment
4
3
Determine the selected item.
Press [OK].
A soft reset is performed.
NOTE
HARD RESET is displayed after you keep holding down [OK] 3 seconds or more when
SOFT RESET is displayed in the display.
CANCEL JOB Menu
This section describes the function of the CANCEL JOB menu and the operating
procedure for it.
CANCEL JOB Menu Functions
The CANCEL JOB menu allows you to cancel only the job currently being received
or processed.
The Printing Environment
4
Pressing [Cancel Job] and [OK] on the control panel while the job you want to
cancel is being processed starts the cancel job process.
IMPORTANT
• Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (While the Job indicator is on or
blinking). No job is canceled by pressing [Cancel Job] when the Job indicator is off.
• The data that has already been processed and is being printed (started to be fed) cannot
be canceled. In this case, the next print data may be canceled.
• When there is any print data sent from a printer driver other than that for this printer,
multiple data may be canceled.
NOTE
When canceling a job, you may not be able to cancel the job even if <03 CANCELING
JOB> is displayed. The secure print job before entering the password and the job to be
stored in the box cannot be canceled. Delete the secure print job before entering the
password and the job to be stored in the box with the Remote UI. (See Remote UI Guide)
Operating Procedure for the CANCEL JOB Menu
Pressing [Cancel Job] and [OK] on the control panel while the job you want to
cancel is being processed displays <03 CANCELING JOB> starts the cancel job
process. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Cancel the job while the job is being
processed.
CANCEL?
4-14
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Key Operation
Press [Cancel Job].
2
Execute the job cancel process.
03 CANCELING JOB
Press [OK].
Pressing [OK] starts the job cancel process.
When not executing the cancel job process, press
any key other than [OK]. After completing the job
cancel, the printer is ready to print.
SELECT FEEDER Menu
This section describes the function of the SELECT FEEDER menu and the
operating procedure for it.
SELECT FEEDER Menu Functions
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings," on p. 5-117.
Operating Procedure for the SELECT FEEDER Menu
The SELECT FEEDER menu consists of two hierarchies: "Setting" and "Setting
Value". Select the target items in each hierarchy.
As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for
setting TRAY PAPER SIZE to B5. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Display the SELECT FEEDER menu.
PAPER SOURCE
2
Key Operation
Press [Feeder Selection].
The SELECT FEEDER menu is displayed.
→
Select the item.
Press [
When TRAY PAPER SIZE is selected
The target item is displayed.
] or [
].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
3
Display the setting value.
=A4
Press [OK].
The selected settings are displayed.
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
4-15
4
The Printing Environment
The SELECT FEEDER menu allows you to select the paper source, paper size,
etc. After a paper source is selected, the corresponding Paper Source indicator
comes on.
4
Select the setting.
Press [
When B5 is selected
The target setting is displayed.
B5
5
→
Determine the selected setting.
The Printing Environment
4
4-16
] or [
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Press [OK].
].
Checking the Counter
You can check the number of the printed pages using the control panel.
Check the counter by selecting COUNTER CHECK in the hierarchy of "Options" in
the SETUP menu.
This section describes the procedure for checking the number of pages in color
printing (large size) as an example. Start the key operation from Step 1.
NOTE
Depending on the printer you are using, this item is not displayed.
1
Display the SETUP menu.
2
3
4
] or [
].
Press [OK].
→
Select the item that you want to display.
Press [
If displaying the number of pages in color printing
(large size)
* The number on the left indicates the number of
pages of the following.
- 101: The total number of printed pages
- 108: The number of pages in black and
white printing
- 114: The number of pages in 2-sided
printing
* The number on the right indicates the number
of pages.
108 1234
5
Press [
→
Display the counter.
101 6789
Press [Settings].
→
Select COUNTER CHECK
COUNTER CHECK
Key Operation
The SETUP menu is displayed.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
The Printing Environment
Operation Procedure
4
→
Finish checking the counter.
] or [
].
Press [Online].
Checking the Counter
4-17
Initializing the SETUP Menu
Initialization of the SETUP menu resets the settings specified in the SETUP menu
to the default settings.
Initialize the menu by selecting INITIALIZE MENU in the hierarchy of "Options" in
the SETUP menu. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
4
The Printing Environment
1
Display the SETUP menu.
Press [Settings].
The SETUP menu is displayed.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
Key Operation
→
Select INITIALIZE MENU.
Press [
] or [
].
INITIALIZE MENU→
3
Initialize the SETUP menu.
OK?
4
Confirm the message, then initialize the
SETUP menu.
Press [OK].
A confirmation message is displayed.
Press [Enter].
<INITIALIZING> is displayed during the
initialization. <DONE> is displayed after the
initialization is completed.
IMPORTANT
• If the message <INITIALIZE FAIL> appears when the initialization of the SETUP menu is
executed, the SETUP menu is not initialized.
• Do not turn the printer OFF during the initialization. The printer memory may be
damaged.
• Some settings do not become effective unless you cycle the power of the printer or
perform a hard reset.
4-18
Initializing the SETUP Menu
NOTE
• If you press [Online] during the setting, the setting is canceled. However, you cannot
cancel the setting when <INITIALIZING> is displayed even if you press [Online].
• The following items in the common SETUP menu are not initialized.
- ADJ.START POS., SP.S-SIZE MODE1, and SP.S-SIZE MODE2 in the USER MAIN.
options
- NETWORK MENU in the INTERFACE MENU options
The Printing Environment
4
Initializing the SETUP Menu
4-19
The Printing Environment
4
4-20
Initializing the SETUP Menu
Printing Environment Settings
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the options that you can specify on the printer's control panel.
Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
UTILITY Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
RESET Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
SETUP Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
CONTROL MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
FEEDER MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
LAYOUT MENU Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
QUALITY MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
INTERFACE MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
PRINT MODE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
USER MAIN. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
PCL SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-75
UFR II SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
IMAGING SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81
PDF1.5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
PS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-95
UTILITY Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
JOB Menu Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
RESET Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
5-1
Setting Items
SETUP Menu
■ CONTROL MENU Options
Item
Printing Environment Settings
5
Settings
Applicable
Page
POWER SAVE MODE
ON*, DEEP SLEEP, OFF, PANEL OFF
p. 5-18
PWR SAVE IN ERR
ON*, OFF
p. 5-19
POWER SAVE TIME
10 minutes*, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60
minutes, 180 minutes, 5 minutes
p. 5-19
WARNING STEP
CHECK TONER: CONT.PRINTING*, STOP
PRINTING
p. 5-20
AUTO ERROR SKIP
OFF*, ON
p. 5-20
PANEL LANGUAGE
ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN,
SPANISH
p. 5-20
SHOW WARNINGS
CHECK TONER: ON*, OFF
CHECK FIX.UNIT: ON*, OFF
CHK WST TNR CTN: ON*, OFF
CHECK DRUM: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE EMPTY: ON*, OFF
E-MAIL TRAN.ERR*1: ON*, OFF
p. 5-21
DATE SETTING
01/01/2001 to 31/12/2089
p. 5-22
TIME SETTING
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
p. 5-22
DAYLIGHT SAVING
DST SETTINGS: ON*, OFF
START DATE: <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>,
<TIME SETTING>
END DATE: <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>,
<TIME SETTING>
p. 5-22
TIME ZONE
GMT-12 to GMT+12
p. 5-23
DATE AND TIME
5-2
Setting Items
TIMER SETTINGS
OFF*, ON
p. 5-23
WAKE UP TIME
00:00 to 23:59
p. 5-24
POW. SAVE TIMER
OFF*, ON
p. 5-24
POWER SAVE TIME
00:00 to 23:59
p. 5-25
CALIBRATE TIMER
OFF*, ON
p. 5-25
CALIBRATE TIME
00:00 to 23:59
p. 5-25
ON*, OFF
p. 5-25
ON*, OFF
p. 5-26
HARD DISK*1
INTERRUPT
PRINT*1
SECURING TIME*1
1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24
p. 5-26
hours
SECURED TYPE*1
IMAGE*, PDL*1
p. 5-27
RIP ONCE*1
ON*, OFF
p. 5-27
ASSURE JOB LOG*1
OFF*, ON
p. 5-28
QUIET MODE
0 to 10; 10* (sec.)
p. 5-28
PDL SELECT(PnP)
UFR II*, PCL5C, PCL6, PS3
p. 5-29
5
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ FEEDER MENU Options
Item
Applicable
Page
Settings
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457
mm, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM
SIZE R, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
p. 5-29
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K,
16K, A5, B5
CASSETTE2 SIZE*1/
CASSETTE3 SIZE*1/
CASSETTE4 SIZE*1
CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K,
MIXED SIZES
STD PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457
mm, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
p. 5-31
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K,
16K, A5, B5
TRAY PRIORITY
OFF*, ON
p. 5-30
p. 5-31
Setting Items
5-3
Printing Environment Settings
WAKE UP TIMER
Printing Environment Settings
5
INVLDPAPER TRAY
OFF*, ON
p. 5-32
AUTO SELECTION
TRAY: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 1: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 2*1: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 3*1: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 4*1: ON*, OFF
p. 5-33
STD PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY
PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE,
COATED PAPER, LABEL
p. 5-33
TRAY PAPER TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2,
p. 5-34
ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL
CASSETTE1 TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
p. 5-35
L, LABEL
CASSETTE2 TYPE*1/
CASSETTE3 TYPE*1/
CASSETTE4 TYPE*1
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
p. 5-36
L, LABEL
MANUAL 2-SIDED
1ST SIDE*, 2ND SIDE
p. 5-37
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
p. 5-38
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ LAYOUT MENU Options
Item
Settings
COPIES
1 to 9999; 1*
p. 5-39
OFFSET Y
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 5-39
OFFSET X
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 5-39
BIND.LOCATION
LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
p. 5-40
GUTTER
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 5-41
ALT.METHOD
ON*, OFF
p. 5-42
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
5-4
Applicable
Page
Setting Items
■ QUALITY MENU Options
Item
Applicable
Page
Settings
RESOLUTION
FINE*, SUPER FINE
p. 5-43
GRADATION LEVEL
HIGH 1* *1, HIGH 2*1, STANDARD*1
p. 5-44
TONER SAVE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-44
DENSITY: CYAN
1 to 16; 9*
p. 5-45
DENSITY: MAGENTA
1 to 16; 9*
p. 5-46
DENSITY: YELLOW
1 to 16; 9*
p. 5-46
DENSITY: BLACK
1 to 16; 9*
p. 5-46
COLOR MODE
AUTO*, COLOR, BLACK & WHITE
p. 5-47
HALFTONES
COLOR
HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
p. 5-48
TEXT: ON*, OFF
GRAPHICS: ON*, OFF
IMAGE: ON*, OFF
p. 5-48
CMS SELECTION
PRINTER*, HOST
p. 5-49
CMS/GAMMA
TEXT: CMS*, GAMMA
GRAPHICS: CMS*, GAMMA
IMAGE: CMS*, GAMMA
p. 5-49
GRAY COMPENSATE
5
Printing Environment Settings
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
p. 5-47
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
CMS
Setting Items
5-5
Printing Environment Settings
5
RGB SRCE PROF.
TEXT:
sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4,
Download Profile*1
GRAPHICS:
sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4,
Download Profile*1
IMAGE:
sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4,
Download Profile*1
p. 5-50
OUTPUT PROFILE
TEXT: Normal*, Photo
GRAPHICS: Normal*, Photo
IMAGE: Photo*, Normal
p. 5-51
MATCHING
METHOD
TEXT:
SATURATION*, COLORIMETRIC,
PERCEPTUAL
GRAPHICS:
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION,
COLORIMETRIC
IMAGE:
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION,
COLORIMETRIC
p. 5-51
GAMMA
TEXT: 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
GRAPHICS: 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
IMAGE: 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
p. 5-52
GRADATION SET.
GRADATION:
OFF*, SMOOTH 1, SMOOTH 2
GRAPHICS*1:
ON*, OFF
IMAGE*1:
ON*, OFF
p. 5-53
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST):
SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1:
OFF*, ON
TEXT*1:
ON*, OFF
p. 5-53
TONER VOLUME
NORMAL*, GRADATION, TEXT
p. 5-54
LINE CONTROL
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION
p. 5-54
QUALITY CHANGE
CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
p. 5-55
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
5-6
Setting Items
■ INTERFACE MENU Options
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
I/F CONNECTION
USB: ON*, OFF
NETWORK: ON*, OFF
p. 5-55
MODE TIMEOUT
OFF, 5 to 300 seconds; 15 seconds*
p. 5-56
Printing Environment Settings
5
Setting Items
5-7
NETWORK MENU*1
IP V. 4 SETTING:
IP MODE................................................. MANUAL*, AUTO
PROTOCOL*1:
DHCP ............................................................. OFF*, ON
BOOTP ........................................................... OFF*, ON
RARP ............................................................. OFF*, ON
IP SETTINGS:
IP ADDRESS......................................................0.0.0.0*
SUBNET MASK..................................................0.0.0.0*
GATEWAY ADDRESS ........................................0.0.0.0*
IP ADD.RANGE:
REJECT RX/PRT ........................................... OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*1................................. REJ IP 1 to 8
PERMIT RX/PRT............................................ OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 ................................ PER IP 1 to 8
REJ SET/BROWSE........................................ OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*1................................. REJ IP 1 to 8
PMT SET/BROWSE ....................................... OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 ................................ PER IP 1 to 8
DNS:
PRIMARY ADD. .................................................. 0.0.0.0*
SECONDARY ADD............................................. 0.0.0.0*
IP V. 6 SETTING:
IP V. 6 .................................................................. OFF*, ON
5
WINS:
Printing Environment Settings
OFF*, ON
ARP/PING:
ON*, OFF
FTP:
TCP/IP SETTINGS
FTP PRINT ......................................................... OFF*, ON
FTP SETTINGS .................................................. ON*, OFF
LPD PRINT:
ON*, OFF
RAW PRINT:
ON*, OFF
IPP PRINT:
ON*, OFF
WSD:
WSD PRINT........................................................ ON*, OFF
WSD BROWSING*1 ............................................ ON*, OFF
MULTICAST DISC. ............................................. ON*, OFF
HTTP:
ON*, OFF
PROXY SETTINGS*1:
PROXY................................................................ OFF*, ON
SERVER ADDRESS*1
PORT NUMBER*1 ......................................0 to 99999; 80*
SAME DOMAIN*1 .................... NO PROXY*, USE PROXY
PROXY AUTH.*1 ................................................. OFF*, ON
USER NAME*1
PASSWORD*1
SNTP:
OFF*, ON
RESPONSE:
ON*, OFF
MAC ADDRESS SET:
PERMIT RECEIVE ............................................. OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 ............................... PER.MAC ADD.1 to 50
5-8
Setting Items
p. 5-57
NETWARE:
OFF*, ON
FRAME TYPE:
AUTO DETECT*, ETHERNET 2, ETHERNET
p. 5-62
NETWARE SETTING
802.2, ETHERNET 802.3, ETHERNET SNAP
PRINT SERVICE:
NDS PSERVER*, NPRINTER,
BINDERYPSERVER, RPRINTER
OFF*, ON
p. 5-62
SMB
SMB SERVER:
OFF*, ON
SMB*1:
OFF*, ON
p. 5-62
SNMP V. 1
ON*, OFF
p. 5-63
SNMP V. 3 SET.
SNMP V. 3:
OFF*, ON
USER SETTING 1 to 5*1:
AUTH .PASSWORD
ENCRYPT.PASSWRD
p. 5-63
SPOOLER*1
OFF*, ON
p. 5-64
START WAIT TIME
0 to 300 seconds; 0 seconds*
p. 5-64
REMOTE UI SET.
REMOTE UI:
ON*, OFF
SSL*1:
OFF*, ON
p. 5-64
AUTO DETECT:
ON*, OFF
COMM.MODE*1:
HALF DUPLEX*, FULL DUPLEX
ETHERNET DRIVER
ETHERNET TYPE*1:
10 BASE-T*, 100 BASE-TX
MAC ADDRESS:
(Display only)
E-MAIL PRT SET*1
INIT.N/W SET.
POP3 INTERVAL:
0 to 90 MINUTES; 0 MINUTES*
POP3 RECEIVE:
OFF*, ON
SMTP RECEIVE:
OFF*, ON
-
5
Printing Environment Settings
APPLETALK
p. 5-65
p. 5-65
p. 5-65
Setting Items
5-9
EXTENSION CARD*1
-
p. 5-66
CONNECT.RECOG.
ON*, OFF
p. 5-66
EXT.RX BUFFER*1
OFF*, ON
p. 5-66
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ PRINT MODE Options
Item
Applicable
Page
MODE SELECTION
AUTO SELECTION*, PCL, PS*1, IMAGING,
PDF1.5*1
p. 5-66
AUTO SWITCH
PCL: ON*, OFF
PS*1: ON*, OFF
IMAGING: ON*, OFF
PDF1.5*1: ON*, OFF
p. 5-68
MODE PRIORITY
NONE*, PCL, PS*1, PDF1.5*1
p. 5-68
5
Printing Environment Settings
Settings
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ USER MAIN. Options
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
ADJ.START POS.
OFFSET Y: -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (TRAY): -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS1): -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS2)*1: -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS3)*1: -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0*(mm)
OFFSET X (CASS4)*1: -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (DUP.): -10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 5-69
RECVRY PRINTING
ON*, OFF
p. 5-70
INIT.COUNTER
FIXING UNIT
5-10
-
p. 5-70
CHK PAPER SIZE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-70
SUBSTITUTE SIZE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-71
SP.IMAGE MODE
OFF*, LEVEL1, LEVEL2
p. 5-71
SP.S-SIZE MODE1
-2 to 2; 0*
p. 5-72
Setting Items
SP.S-SIZE MODE2
-2 to 2; 0*
p. 5-72
CLEANING
-
p. 5-72
HDD MAINTENANCE*1
HDD ALL ERASE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-73
QUICK FORMAT*1
-
p. 5-73
STD FORMAT
-
p. 5-74
SP.PRINT MODE
PLAIN PAPER
OFF*, MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3
p. 5-74
COATED PAPER
OFF*, ON
p. 5-74
UPDATE FIRMWARE
-
p. 5-75
NETWORK
-
p. 5-75
5
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ PCL SETUP Options
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
PAPER SAVE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-75
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
p. 5-75
FONT NUMBER
0 to 89; 0*
p. 5-76
POINT SIZE*1
4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*
p. 5-76
PITCH*1
0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
p. 5-76
FORM LINES
5 to 128 lines; 64 lines*
p. 5-76
SYMBOL SET
PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2,
ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, PC775, PC8DN, PC850,
PC852, PC858, PC8TK, PC1004, WINL1,
p. 5-77
WINL2, WINL5, WINBALT, DESKTOP, PSTEXT,
LEGAL, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT
CUSTOM SIZE
DO NOT SET*, SET
p. 5-77
UNIT OF MEASURE*1
Millimeters*, Inches
p. 5-77
Setting Items
5-11
Printing Environment Settings
USB
X DIMENSION*1
98.0 to 320.0 mm; 320.0 mm*
(3.86 to 12.60 inches; 12.60 inches*)
p. 5-77
Y DIMENSION*1
139.7 to 1200.0 mm; 457.2 mm*
(5.50 to 47.24 inches; 18.00 inches*)
p. 5-78
APPEND CR TO LF
NO*, YES
p. 5-78
ENLRG A4 WIDTH
OFF*, ON
p. 5-79
BARDIMM*1
DISABLE*, ENABLE
p. 5-80
FREESCAPE*1
~*, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF
p. 5-80
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ UFR II SETUP Options
Item
Settings
5
Printing Environment Settings
PAPER SAVE
ON*, OFF
Applicable
Page
p. 5-80
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ IMAGING SETUP Options
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
ORIENTATION
AUTO*, VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
p. 5-81
ZOOM
OFF*, AUTO
p. 5-81
PRINT POSITION
AUTO*, CENTER, TOP LEFT
p. 5-82
PRINT GUARANTEE*1
OFF*, ON
p. 5-82
SHOW WARNINGS
PRINT*, PANEL, OFF
p. 5-82
PRINT EMAIL TXT*1
ON*, OFF
p. 5-83
PRT*1
OFF*, ON
p. 5-83
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
p. 5-83
EXIF ADJUSTMENT
ON*, OFF
p. 5-84
LIMIT EMAIL
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
5-12
Setting Items
■ PDF1.5 Options
IMPORTANT
The PDF1.5 menu is displayed when all the following optional accessories are installed.
- Hard Disk
- PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM
- RAM (ER-256A, ER-512A)
Applicable
Page
Settings
RENDER CL SPACE
AUTO*, CMYK
p. 5-84
RGB SRCE PROF.
sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA
2.4, NONE
p. 5-84
CMYK PROFILE
NONE*, JAPANCOLOR, US WEB COATED,
EURO STANDARD
p. 5-85
OUTPUT PROFILE
NORMAL*, PHOTO
p. 5-86
GRAY PROFILE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-86
MATCHING METHOD
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION,
COLORIMETRIC
p. 5-86
PURE BLACK TEXT
ON*, OFF
p. 5-87
BLACK OVERPRINT*1
ON*, OFF
p. 5-88
CMYK OVERPRINT
OFF*, ON
p. 5-89
BRIGHTNESS
85 to 115 %; 100 %*
p. 5-89
GRAY COMPENSATE
ON*, OFF
p. 5-90
FIT TO PAGE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-90
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
p. 5-90
N-UP PRINT
OFF*, 2 ON 1, 4 ON 1, 6 ON 1, 8 ON 1, 9 ON 1,
p. 5-91
16 ON 1
FINISHING
OFF*, COLLATE
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
p. 5-92
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
5
Printing Environment Settings
Item
p. 5-91
Setting Items
5-13
COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
p. 5-93
COMMENT PRINT
AUTO*, ON, OFF
p. 5-94
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST):
SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1:
OFF*, ON
TEXT*1:
ON*, OFF
p. 5-94
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
5
Printing Environment Settings
*1 May not be displayed depending on other settings.
■ PS Options
IMPORTANT
The PS menu is displayed when PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
Item
5-14
Settings
Applicable
Page
JOB TIMEOUT
0 to 3600 seconds; 0 seconds*
p. 5-95
WAIT TIMEOUT
0 to 3600 seconds; 300 seconds*
p. 5-95
PRINT PS ERRORS
OFF*, ON
p. 5-95
RGB SRCE PROF.
sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA
2.4, NONE
p. 5-95
GRAY PROFILE
OFF*, ON
p. 5-96
OUTPUT PROFILE
TR Normal*, TR Photo, NORMAL, PHOTO
p. 5-97
MATCHING METHOD
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION,
COLORIMETRIC
p. 5-97
RGB PURE BLACK
ON*, OFF
p. 5-98
PURE BLACK TEXT
ON*, OFF
p. 5-98
BLACK OVERPRINT*1
ON*, OFF
p. 5-99
BRIGHTNESS*1
85 to 115 %; 100 %*
p. 5-100
Setting Items
COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
p. 5-101
CMYK OVERPRINT
OFF*, ON
p. 5-102
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST):
SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1:
OFF*, ON
TEXT*1:
ON*, OFF
p. 5-103
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on other settings.
UTILITY Menu
Item
Settings
CONFIG.PAGE
PCL UTILITY
PS
UTILITY*1
NW STATUS PRINT
EXT. CARD
LIST*1
E-MAIL UTILITY*1
-
Applicable
Page
p. 5-104
FONTS LIST
p. 5-104
CONFIG.PAGE, FONTS LIST
p. 5-105
-
p. 5-105
-
p. 5-105
RECEIVE E-MAILS, RX LOG LIST
p. 5-106
CALIBRATION
-
p. 5-106
PRNTPOSNPRINT
-
p. 5-107
Setting Items
5-15
5
Printing Environment Settings
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
p. 5-100
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE:
GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH
RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
PAGE COUNT LIST*2
-
p. 5-107
TEST CHART 1
-
p. 5-107
TEST CHART 2
-
p. 5-108
1
May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
2
Not displayed depending on the printer you are using.
*
*
JOB Menu
Item
Printing Environment Settings
5
Settings
Applicable
Page
ENCRYPTED PRINT*1
-
p. 5-109
SECURED PRINT*1
-
p. 5-110
STOREJOB
LIST*1
-
p. 5-111
STOREJOB
PRINT*1
-
p. 5-111
-
p. 5-112
-
p. 5-112
-
p. 5-112
-
p. 5-113
JOB LOG
LIST*1
STORE LOG LST*1
REPORTLOG
E-MAIL PRT
LST*1
LOG*1
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
RESET Menu
Item
Applicable
Page
SOFT RESET/HARD
RESET
-
p. 5-114
FORM FEED
-
p. 5-114
SHUT DOWN
-
p. 5-115
CHANGE TONER
5-16
Settings
Setting Items
K TONER, C TONER, M TONER, Y TONER
p. 5-116
SELECT FEEDER Menu
Applicable
Page
Settings
PAPER SOURCE
AUTO*, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2*1,
CASSETTE 3*1, CASSETTE 4*1,TRAY
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457
mm, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM
SIZE R, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
p. 5-117
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K,
16K, A5, B5
CASSETTE2 SIZE*1/
CASSETTE3 SIZE*1/
CASSETTE4 SIZE*1
CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K,
MIXED SIZES
TRAY PAPER TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2,
p. 5-118
ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL
CASSETTE1 TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
p. 5-118
L, LABEL
CASSETTE2 TYPE*1/
CASSETTE3 TYPE*1/
CASSETTE4 TYPE*1
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER
p. 5-118
L, LABEL
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
p. 5-117
p. 5-118
p. 5-118
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
Setting Items
5-17
5
Printing Environment Settings
Item
SETUP Menu Settings
CONTROL MENU Options
POWER SAVE MODE
ON*, DEEP SLEEP, OFF, PANEL OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use Power Save Mode.
There are three types of Power Save Mode, and the type of the mode the printer
enters depends on the setting for this item.
5
Printing Environment Settings
Setting
Power Save Mode the Printer Can Enter
DEEP SLEEP
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode)
Power Save Mode 2 (the Printer Power Save mode)
Power Save Mode 3 (the Deep Sleep mode)
ON
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode)
Power Save Mode 2 (the Printer Power Save mode)
PANEL OFF
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode)
OFF
The printer does not enter Power Save Mode.
Power Save Mode consumes less power during the sleep state. While the printer
is in Power Save Mode, the display on the control panel is off, and the following
indicators are on.
Printer Status
5-18
Indicator that Comes On
Power Save Mode 3
(the Deep Sleep mode)
The Main Power indicator
Power Save Mode 2
(the Printer Power Save
mode)
Online: The Ready indicator and Main Power
indicator
Offline: The Message indicator and Main Power
indicator
Power Save Mode 1
(the Panel Off mode)
Online: The Ready indicator and Main Power
indicator
Offline: The Message indicator and Main Power
indicator
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
• For details on Power Save Mode, see "Power Saving (Power Save Mode)," on p.
2-6.
• You can specify whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode when an error
is occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or the number in the
message blinks). (See "PWR SAVE IN ERR": the next item)
PWR SAVE IN ERR
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode when an error is
occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or the number in the
message blinks).
If this item is set to ON, the printer enters Power Save Mode even when an error is
occurring in the printer.
POWER SAVE TIME
10 minutes*, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 180 minutes, 5 minutes
Specifies the time interval until the printer enters Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel
Off mode).
NOTE
• If the printer is in any of the following status, the printer does not enter Power Save
Mode (the Panel Off mode) even when the specified time has elapsed.
- An error is occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or the
number in the message blinks), and PWR SAVE IN ERR is set to OFF.
- During the printer's startup
- During a shutdown (Only when the hard disk is installed)
- While the hard disk is being initialized (Only when the hard disk is installed)
SETUP Menu Settings
5-19
5
Printing Environment Settings
If this item is set to OFF, the printer does not enter Power Save Mode when an
error is occurring in the printer.
WARNING STEP
CHECK TONER ................... CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
Specifies whether the printer should continue or stop printing when the following
message appears.
Warning Message
Printer Status
<16 PREP."color" TNR>
The toner cartridge is nearing the end of its life and
("color" indicates K, Y, M,
needs to be replaced.
or C)
If CONT.PRINTING is specified, the printer continues printing, displaying the
above message. If STOP PRINTING is specified, the printer stops printing. Then,
the printer resumes printing after you release the printer from the Warning status
according to the displayed message.
NOTE
• If <16 CHG."color" TNR> appears, and the printer stops printing, replace the toner
cartridge, and then print again.
• If STOP PRINTING is specified for this item, the message <16 PREP."color" TNR>
changes to <16 CHG."color" TNR>, and the printer stops printing.
Printing Environment Settings
5
AUTO ERROR SKIP
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should automatically use the function that, when an
error has occurred, releases the printer from the error temporarily (Error Skip) and
continues the job.
If OFF is specified, you need to skip the error by pressing [Online].
If is ON is specified, the printer skips the error automatically without you pressing
[Online].
NOTE
• The Error Skip function is only for skipping an error temporarily. Therefore, the data
may not be printed properly.
• For the types of error from which the printer can be released temporarily, see
"Message List," on p. 7-23.
• If ON is specified for this item, the printer automatically skips all the errors it can
skip automatically even when multiple errors are occurring.
PANEL LANGUAGE
ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, SPANISH
Confirm the language that is displayed in the display.
5-20
SETUP Menu Settings
SHOW WARNINGS
CHECK TONER ....................ON*, OFF
CHECK FIX.UNIT .................ON*, OFF
CHK WST TNR CTN.............ON*, OFF
CHECK DRUM......................ON*, OFF
CASSETTE EMPTY .............ON*, OFF
E-MAIL TRAN.ERR*1............ON*, OFF
*1 E-MAIL TRAN.ERR is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
A Warning status is a status in which the printer requires some remedy although
the job is not affected. When the printer is in this status, a message appears in the
display, or an indicator blinks.
This item allows you to specify whether a message should appear or any indicator
should blink when the printer is in any of the following Warning status.
Status
Message/Indicator Blink
CHECK TONER
When a toner cartridge
needs to be replaced soon
<16 PREP."color" TNR>
("color" indicates K, Y, M, or C)
CHECK FIX.UNIT
When the fixing unit needs
to be replaced soon.
<E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT>
CHK WST TNR
CTN
When the waste toner
container needs to be
replaced soon
<E1 PRE.WST.T.CTN>
CHECK DRUM
When a drum cartridge
needs to be replaced soon
<E0 PREP."color" DRM>
("color" indicates K, Y, M, or C)
CASSETTE
EMPTY
When the paper cassette
has run out of paper
The Paper Source indicator for
the paper source that has run
out of paper blinks.
E-MAIL
TRAN.ERR
When a reception error has <EM SERVER ERROR>
occurred on printing e-mails <EM E-MAIL ERROR>
NOTE
The printer prints when either ON or OFF is specified.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-21
5
Printing Environment Settings
Setting
DATE AND TIME
■ DATE SETTING
01/01/2001 to 31/12/2089
This printer has a clock function. This clock is used for the printer maintenance
and job history management. Specify date in this item when the clock is not
keeping correct date.
NOTE
• Date is set before shipment.
• Enter date using the following keys on the control panel.
- Increases/decreases number ...... [ ] [ ]
- Moves digits ................................. [ ] [ ]
- Determines the entered date ....... [OK]
• If you do not change the date, press [Online].
■ TIME SETTING
5
Printing Environment Settings
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
This printer has a clock function. This clock is used for the printer maintenance
and job history management. Specify time in this item when the clock is not
keeping correct time.
NOTE
• Time is set before shipment.
• The clock in the printer should be accurate within ± 60 seconds per month. Adjust
the clock periodically in this item.
• Enter time using the following keys on the control panel.
- Increases/decreases number ...... [ ] [ ]
- Moves digits ................................. [ ] [ ]
- Determines the entered time ........ [OK]
• If you do not change the time, press [Online].
■ DAYLIGHT SAVING
DST SETTINGS ................... ON*, OFF
START DATE ........................ <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>, <TIME SETTING>
END DATE............................ <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>, <TIME SETTING>
Specifies whether to set the daylight saving time in DST SETTINGS and its time
duration in START DATE and END DATE.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
5-22
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
In some countries and regions, time is advanced throughout the summer season.
The period in which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time".
■ TIME ZONE
GMT-12 to GMT+12
Specifies the time zone according to the region where the printer is being used.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
*
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is called GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).
TIMER SETTINGS
■ WAKE UP TIMER
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should use the Wake Up function that releases
Power Save Mode (the Panel Off mode, the Printer Power Save mode, and the
Deep Sleep mode).
If ON is specified, Power Save Mode (the Panel Off mode, the Printer Power Save
mode, and the Deep Sleep mode) is released when the time specified in WAKE
UP TIME (See the next item) has elapsed.
If OFF is specified, the printer does not use the Wake Up function.
NOTE
The Wake Up function is for releasing the printer from Power Save Mode (the Panel
Off mode, the Printer Power Save mode, and the Deep Sleep mode). When the
printer is OFF, the Wake Up function does not function.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-23
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the
difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which this time difference is the same. An area which shares the
same-time zone difference is called a time zone.
■ WAKE UP TIME
00:00 to 23:59
If WAKE UP TIMER (See the previous item) is set to ON, Power Save Mode (the
Panel Off mode, the Printer Power Save mode, and the Deep Sleep mode) is
released when the time specified in this item has elapsed.
This item is convenient if you want to release the printer from Power Save Mode
(the Panel Off mode, the Printer Power Save mode, and the Deep Sleep mode) on
the same time every day.
■ POW. SAVE TIMER
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off
mode) when the time specified in POWER SAVE TIME (See the next item) has
elapsed.
5
Printing Environment Settings
If ON is specified, the printer enters Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode)
when the time specified in POWER SAVE TIME has elapsed.
If OFF is specified, the printer does not enter Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off
mode) even when the time specified in POWER SAVE TIME has elapsed.
While the printer is in Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode), the display on the
control panel is off, and the following indicators are on.
Printer Status
Indicator that Comes On
When the printer is
online
Ready Indicator
When the printer is
offline
Message Indicator
NOTE
• The Job indicator is on while a job is being stored into a box even if the printer is in
Power Save Mode (The printer can store jobs into the boxes only when a hard disk
is installed in the printer).
• As well as Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode), this printer has Power Save
Mode 2 (the Printer Power Save mode) and Power Save Mode 3 (the Deep Sleep
mode). For details on Power Save Mode, see "Power Saving (Power Save Mode),"
on p. 2-6.
• The printer does not enter Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode) during printing
even when the time specified in POWER SAVE TIME has elapsed.
• You can specify whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode when an error
is occurring in the printer (when the Message indicator is on, or the number in the
message blinks). (See "PWR SAVE IN ERR," on p. 5-19)
5-24
SETUP Menu Settings
■ POWER SAVE TIME
00:00 to 23:59
If POW. SAVE TIMER (See the previous item) is set to ON, the printer enters
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode) when the time specified in this item has
elapsed.
This item is convenient if you want to set the printer to Power Save Mode 1 (the
Panel Off mode) on the same time everyday.
■ CALIBRATE TIMER
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the calibration of the printer should be started when the time
specified in CALIBRATE TIME (See the next item) has elapsed.
If ON is specified, calibration of the printer is started when the time specified in
CALIBRATE TIME has elapsed.
Calibration adjusts color hues for the printer.
NOTE
Calibration is not performed if the printer is receiving print data at the time specified
in CALIBRATE TIME.
■ CALIBRATE TIME
00:00 to 23:59
If CALIBRATE TIMER (See the previous item) is set to ON, calibration of the
printer is started when the time specified in this item has elapsed.
This item is convenient if you want to calibrate the printer on the same time
everyday.
HARD DISK
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to use the following functions that require a hard disk.
• Interrupt print
• Changing the order of print data
• Changing the attributions of print data (print copies, etc.)
• Pausing/Resuming print data processing
• Saving print data on the hard disk (boxes) (data can be printed again) (See p.
5-111)
SETUP Menu Settings
5-25
Printing Environment Settings
5
If OFF is specified, calibration of the printer is not started even when the time
specified in CALIBRATE TIME has elapsed.
• Secured print (See p. 5-110)
• Encrypted secured print (See p. 5-109)
• RIP Once (See p. 5-27)
• Spooler (See p. 5-64)
• SMB printing (See p. 5-62)
• Using SSL for communication by the Remote UI (See p. 5-64)
• E-mail print (See p. 5-65)
• Printing the PDF file using the direct print function (See p. 2-12)
Usually, leave the setting to ON. Specify OFF only when an error has occurred in
a function that uses the hard disk.
IMPORTANT
• Initialize the SETUP menu after installing the optional hard disk, and then cycle the
power of the printer or perform a hard reset. After initializing the SETUP menu, the
functions of the hard disk become effective by cycling the power of the printer or
performing a hard reset.
• After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
INTERRUPT PRINT
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to use the interrupt print function.
When HARD DISK is set to OFF, the setting for this item is ignored, and the
interrupt print is disabled.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON.
SECURING TIME
1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours
On the computer, previously specify the time to delete data of "secured print" in
which the file name, user name, and password are specified.
Secured print data is saved on the hard disk, and normally, the data cannot be
deleted unless it is printed. However, the data is automatically deleted even if it
has not been printed when the time specified in this item has elapsed.
5-26
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
• As well as secured print data, encrypted secured print data is also deleted when
the time specified in this item has elapsed.
• Print secured print data using SECURED PRINT (See p. 5-110) in the UTILITY
menu or the Remote UI.
• Secured print data is deleted by turning the printer OFF or performing a hard reset
or soft reset even if the time specified in this item has not elapsed yet.
• Specify the file name, user name, and password in the printer driver.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON. When HARD DISK is set to OFF, the setting for this item is ignored,
and the secured print jobs cannot be deleted.
SECURED TYPE
IMAGE*, PDL*1
*1 PDL is not displayed when the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
Specifies the format to be used for when secured print data is saved in this printer.
If PDL is specified, the data sent from the computer is saved on the hard disk as it
is.
NOTE
• If IMAGE is specified, the process time after the password is entered for printing
becomes shorter than when PDL is specified. However, you cannot interrupt the
job that has already started to be printed or stop the operation.
• Encrypted secured print data is saved in PDL regardless of the setting for this item.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON.
RIP ONCE
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to use the function of "RIP Once" when an optional hard disk is
installed. RIP Once is a function that saves the data of the first copy on the hard
disk and prints the second and subsequent copies at a high speed when you print
multiple copies.
This function is effective for printing a large amount of copies or multiple copies of
complicated data, such as the one that contains many diagrams or images.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-27
5
Printing Environment Settings
If IMAGE is specified, the data sent from the computer is saved on the hard disk
with the image opened.
NOTE
• This function may have little effect on printing relatively simple data such as the one
that contains only text or small amount of copies.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON. When HARD DISK is set to OFF, the setting for this item is ignored,
and the function of "RIP Once" cannot be used.
ASSURE JOB LOG
OFF*, ON
If you turn the printer OFF during printing, the print log of the job being printed
may not be saved, or the total number of printed pages (page counter) may not be
counted.
If ON is specified for this item, the print log of the job being printed is saved, and
the total number of printed pages (page counter) is counted even when you turn
the printer OFF.
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• If ON is specified, the printing speed drops.
• After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON. When HARD DISK is set to OFF, the setting for this item is ignored,
and the function of Assure Job Log cannot be used.
QUIET MODE
0 to 10; 10* (sec.)
If the specified time has elapsed from when the printer receives a job to when it
starts to print the job, it stops preparing printing operation and enters the Quiet
mode.
NOTE
If the printer has entered the Quiet mode, it may require time before it starts
printing because it starts to prepare printing operation.
5-28
SETUP Menu Settings
PDL SELECT(PnP)
UFR II*, PCL5C, PCL6, PS3*1
*1 PS3 is displayed only when the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
●If you want to connect the printer and computer with a USB cable
The printer driver for this printer may be installed automatically when the USB
cable is connected.
You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "PCL5c", "PCL6", or "PS3")
to be installed in this item at the time.
●If you want to connect the printer and computer with a LAN cable
If you are using Windows Vista, you can detect the printer automatically using the
WSD (Web Service on Devices) protocol.
You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "PCL5c", "PCL6", or "PS3")
to be installed on the automatically detected printer in this item.
FEEDER MENU Options
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457 mm, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM
SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL,
ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• When you change the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray frequently, it is
convenient if TRAY PAPER SIZE in the control panel is set to MIXED SIZES. If
TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the setting
for TRAY PAPER SIZE each time you load the different size paper. However, when
specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray matches the paper size specified in the printer driver before
printing. If they do not match, the printer may stop printing, displaying the message
<41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper
size specified in the printer driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray before using the printer.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-29
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• When installing the printer driver manually, be sure to match the setting of this item
and the type of the printer driver to be installed. You cannot use printer drivers of a
different type.
• After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from
UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
NOTE
• Select CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R when you want to specify custom size
paper using application and print it. If a message that prompts you to change the
size of the paper appears during printing, press [Online] to clear the error before
printing again.
• You cannot print on any area within 10 mm (4 mm for the PS printer driver) of the
edges of an envelope. (If you have selected the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as
Starting Point] check box in [Finishing Details] in the UFR II printer driver, you can
extend the printable area to near the edges of the paper. For more details, see
Help of the UFR II printer driver.)
• You can specify the same setting in TRAY PAPER SIZE in the SELECT FEEDER
menu.
5
Printing Environment Settings
CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4)
CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassettes (Cassette 2 to
Cassette 4) of the paper feeders.
IMPORTANT
• When paper at a size of 8K or 16K is loaded in Cassette 2, 3, or 4, be sure to set
the setting for this item to 8K or 16K.
• When you change the orientation of the custom size paper loaded in a paper
cassette frequently, it is convenient if you set CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in
the control panel to MIXED SIZES. When CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) is set to
MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the setting for CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n =
2, 3, 4) each time you change the paper orientation. However, when specifying
MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches the paper size
specified in the printer driver before printing. If they do not match, the printer may
stop printing, displaying the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may
occur. Be sure to check if the paper size specified in the printer driver matches the
size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 297.0 mm or less when CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n=2, 3, 4) is
set to MIXED SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not
printing from UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
5-30
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
• Select CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R when you want to specify custom size
paper using application and print it. If a message that prompts you to change the
size of the paper appears during printing, press [Online] to clear the error before
printing again.
• You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the
SELECT FEEDER menu.
• This item is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
STD PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457 mm, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10,
ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies a standard paper size for when the printer cannot determine the size of
the paper to process, such as when using paper that you cannot specify its size in
an application.
TRAY PRIORITY
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with
the multi-purpose tray when AUTO is specified in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
If OFF is specified, the printer detects if the size of the paper in a paper source
matches the paper size of the received data in the following order.
Cassette 1 ➞ Cassette 2 *1 ➞ Cassette 3 *1 ➞ Cassette 4 *1 ➞ Multi-purpose Tray
If ON is specified, the printer detects if the size of the paper in a paper source
matches the paper size of the received data in the following order starting with the
multi-purpose tray.
Multi-purpose Tray ➞ Cassette 1 ➞ Cassette 2 *1 ➞ Cassette 3 *1 ➞ Cassette 4 *1
*1: Only when the optional paper feeders are installed
NOTE
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the next item) is set to ON, the setting for this item is
ignored, and the printer detects the paper source starting with the paper cassette.
When paper that is the same size as the paper size of the received data is not
loaded in the selected paper source, the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose
tray.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-31
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify the paper size in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify the paper size, specify the size
in this item.
• Specify the setting for automatic paper selection in PAPER SOURCE (See p.
5-117) in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
• This item is effective only when PAPER SOURCE in the SELECT FEEDER menu
is set to AUTO.
• Even if ON is specified for this item, the printer does not feed paper from the
multi-purpose tray when the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray is different
from the paper size of the received data. However, if INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the
next item) is set to ON, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the
multi-purpose tray appears when the paper that is the same size as the paper size
of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
• Even if ON is specified for this item, depending on the received data, paper may be
fed not from the multi-purpose tray but from the paper cassette when the Paper
Source indicator for the paper cassette for the paper size of the received data is on.
INVLDPAPER TRAY
OFF*, ON
Specifies what the printer does when paper that is the same size as the paper
size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
Printing Environment Settings
5
If OFF is specified, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the paper
cassette appears, and the printer stops printing.
If ON is specified, the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray. If the size of
the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray is different from the paper size of the
received data, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the
multi-purpose tray appears, and the printer stops printing. When no paper is
loaded in the multi-purpose tray, or the multi-purpose tray runs out of paper, a
message that informs you of the tray's paper-out condition appears, and the
printer stops printing.
NOTE
If ON is specified for this item, the settings for TRAY in AUTO SELECTION (See the
next item) and TRAY PRIORITY (See the previous item) are ignored, and the
printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper that is the same size as
the paper size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
5-32
SETUP Menu Settings
AUTO SELECTION
TRAY.....................................ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 1........................ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 2*1 .....................ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 3*1 .....................ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 4*1 .....................ON*, OFF
*1 CASSETTE 2, CASSETTE 3, and CASSETTE 4 are displayed only when the optional paper feeders
are installed.
Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected when the automatic paper
selection is specified in the SELECT FEEDER menu. Specify the setting for the
multi-purpose tray and paper cassettes individually.
If ON is specified, the printer selects the respective paper source as the paper
source to be automatically selected. If OFF is specified, the printer does not select
the respective paper source as the paper source to be automatically selected.
STD PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2,
ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL
Specifies the default paper type. This printer internally applies the optimum print
mode for the paper type specified in this item.
Each print mode supports the following paper types.
• PLAIN PAPER:
Plain Paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
• PLAIN PAPER L: Specify when the paper curls excessively on printing plain
paper (64 g/m2) with PLAIN PAPER specified or when the
printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide
(Letter size) or less continuously.
• HEAVY PAPER 1:Heavy Paper (106 - 169 g/m2)
• HEAVY PAPER 2:Heavy Paper (170 - 220 g/m2)
• ENVELOPE:
Envelopes
• COATED PAPER: Coated Paper (106 - 169 g/m2)
• LABEL:
Labels
SETUP Menu Settings
5-33
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the previous item) is set to ON, the setting for TRAY in
this item is ignored, and the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when
paper that is the same size as the paper size of the received data is not loaded in
the selected paper source.
• Specify the setting for automatic paper selection in PAPER SOURCE (See p.
5-117) in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
IMPORTANT
• If an item other than PLAIN PAPER and PLAIN PAPER L is specified, you cannot
perform 2-sided printing.
• When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify the paper type in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify the paper type, specify the paper
type in this item.
• When using coated paper at a size other than sizes of 106 to 169 g/m2, perform the
following settings.
- When using paper of 105 g/m2 or less: Set STD PAPER TYPE to PLAIN PAPER
- When using paper of 170 to 220 g/m2: Set STD PAPER TYPE to COATED
PAPER and COATED PAPER in
SP.PRINT MODE in the USER MAIN.
options to ON.
TRAY PAPER TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY
PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL
Printing Environment Settings
5
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. This printer
internally applies the optimum print mode for the paper type specified in this item.
Each print mode supports the following paper types.
• PLAIN PAPER:
Plain Paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
• PLAIN PAPER L: Specify when the paper curls excessively on printing plain
paper (64 g/m2) with PLAIN PAPER specified or when the
printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide
(Letter size) or less continuously.
• HEAVY PAPER 1:Heavy Paper (106 - 169 g/m2)
• HEAVY PAPER 2:Heavy Paper (170 - 220 g/m2)
• ENVELOPE:
Envelopes
• COATED PAPER: Coated Paper (106 - 169 g/m2)
• LABEL:
5-34
SETUP Menu Settings
Labels
NOTE
You can specify the same setting in TRAY PAPER TYPE in the SELECT FEEDER
menu.
CASSETTE1 TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in Cassette 1. This printer internally
applies the optimum print mode for the paper type specified in this item.
Each print mode supports the following paper types.
• PLAIN PAPER:
Plain Paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
• PLAIN PAPER L: Specify when the paper curls excessively on printing plain
paper (64 g/m2) with PLAIN PAPER specified or when the
printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide
(Letter size) or less continuously.
• LABEL:
Labels
SETUP Menu Settings
5-35
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• This printer applies the optimum print mode for the interior of the printer according
to the type of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. If the type of the paper
loaded in the multi-purpose tray and the setting for the print mode do not match,
this may result in crucial damage to the engine.
When printing from Windows or Macintosh using the multi-purpose tray, be sure to
match the type of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the setting for TRAY
PAPER TYPE, and the setting for [Paper Type] in the printer driver. If they do not
match, the printer stops printing, displaying an error message.
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer
driver cannot be used, be sure to match the type of the paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray, the setting for TRAY PAPER TYPE, and the setting for STD
PAPER TYPE.
• The default value is MIXED TYPES. If MIXED TYPES is specified, the printer does
not check the type of the loaded paper against the paper type specified in the
printer driver. Be sure to check if the paper type specified in the printer driver
matches the type of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray before using the
printer.
• If an item other than PLAIN PAPER and PLAIN PAPER L is specified, you cannot
perform 2-sided printing.
• When using coated paper at a size other than sizes of 106 to 169 g/m2, perform the
following settings.
- When using paper of 105 g/m2 or less: Set STD PAPER TYPE to PLAIN PAPER
- When using paper of 170 to 220 g/m2: Set STD PAPER TYPE to COATED
PAPER and COATED PAPER in
SP.PRINT MODE in the USER MAIN.
options to ON.
IMPORTANT
• This printer applies the optimum print mode for the interior of the printer according
to the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette. If the type of the paper
loaded in the paper cassette and the setting for the print mode do not match, this
may result in crucial damage to the engine.
When printing from Windows or Macintosh using a paper cassette, be sure to
match the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette, the setting for
CASSETTE1 TYPE, and the setting for [Paper Type] in the printer driver. If they do
not match, the printer stops printing, displaying an error message.
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer
driver cannot be used, be sure to match the type of the paper loaded in the paper
cassette, the setting for CASSETTE1 TYPE, and the setting for STD PAPER TYPE.
• The default value is MIXED TYPES. If MIXED TYPES is specified, the printer does
not check the type of the loaded paper against the paper type specified in the
printer driver. Be sure to check if the paper type specified in the printer driver
matches the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using the printer.
NOTE
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE1 TYPE in the SELECT FEEDER
menu.
Printing Environment Settings
5
CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4)
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in Cassette N (N = 2, 3, 4). This
printer internally applies the optimum print mode for the paper type specified in
this item.
Each print mode supports the following paper types.
• PLAIN PAPER:
Plain Paper (64 - 105 g/m2)
• PLAIN PAPER L: Specify when the paper curls excessively on printing plain
paper (64 g/m2) with PLAIN PAPER specified or when the
printing speed drops on printing paper of 279.4 mm wide
(Letter size) or less continuously.
• LABEL:
5-36
SETUP Menu Settings
Labels
IMPORTANT
• This printer applies the optimum print mode for the interior of the printer according
to the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette. If the type of the paper
loaded in the paper cassette and the setting for the print mode do not match, this
may result in crucial damage to the engine.
When printing from Windows or Macintosh using a paper cassette, be sure to
match the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette, the setting for
CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4), and the setting for [Paper Type] in the printer
driver. If they do not match, the printer stops printing, displaying an error message.
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer
driver cannot be used, be sure to match the type of the paper loaded in the paper
cassette, the setting for CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4), and the setting for STD
PAPER TYPE.
• The default value is MIXED TYPES. If MIXED TYPES is specified, the printer does
not check the type of the loaded paper against the paper type specified in the
printer driver. Be sure to check if the paper type specified in the printer driver
matches the type of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using the printer.
NOTE
• This item is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
• You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the
SELECT FEEDER menu.
MANUAL 2-SIDED
1ST SIDE*, 2ND SIDE
Specifies the printing side of the plain paper or heavy paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray when performing 2-sided printing.
When printing the front side (the side you print first) of the paper, specify 1ST
SIDE.
When printing the reverse side of previously printed paper, specify 2ND SIDE.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to specify 2ND SIDE before printing the other side of previously printed
paper with this printer.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-37
Printing Environment Settings
5
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper.
If ON is specified, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
IMPORTANT
When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify 2-sided printing in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify 2-sided printing, specify the
setting in this item.
NOTE
• Automatic 2-sided printing can be performed only on plain paper at sizes of A3, B4,
A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Statement, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K, and of
the following custom sizes. For more details, see "Usable Paper," on p. 3-2.
For Multi-purpose Tray
- When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 312.0 mm; Length
210.0 to 431.8 mm
- When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
Printing Environment Settings
5
For Cassette 2, 3, and 4
- When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length
210.0 to 431.8 mm
- When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
• When performing automatic 2-sided printing on paper with a logo, load the paper
as the following.
- When printing from the paper cassette, load the paper with the printing side of the
first page facing down.
- When printing from the multi-purpose tray, load the paper with the printing side of
the first page facing up.
• You can specify the same setting in 2-SIDED PRINT. in the SELECT FEEDER
menu.
5-38
SETUP Menu Settings
LAYOUT MENU Options
COPIES
1 to 9999; 1*
Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
The printer prints the specified number of copies.
OFFSET Y/OFFSET X
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction
(X) by the specified value.
OFFSET Y:
As the value increases, the gutter width in the Y direction
increases.
As the value decreases, the gutter width in the Y direction
decreases.
OFFSET X:
As the value increases, the gutter width in the X direction
increases.
As the value decreases, the gutter width in the X direction
decreases.
Range adjusted by "OFFSET X"
X
Front
X
+ direction
Front
Range adjusted
by "OFFSET Y"
Adjust using
OFFSET X
and OFFSET Y
Back
Y
ABC
DEF
Original margin
Y
DEF
+ direction
ABC
Back
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the
printing position, the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
Each time you press [ ], the value increases in 0.5 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in 0.5 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
SETUP Menu Settings
5
Printing Environment Settings
The printing position changes as follows according to the increase and decrease
of the specified value.
5-39
BIND.LOCATION
LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
Specifies which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, is to be bound.
When you want to bind paper on which 2-sided printing is performed, the printer
adjusts the binding location automatically according to the paper surface.
Specify the binding location (top/bottom/left/right) and its width in GUTTER (See
the next item).
If LONG EDGE is specified, the binding location is created on the long edge of the
paper.
2-sided printing in
portrait orientation
Front
2-sided printing in
landscape orientation
Back
Front
Back
Gutter
Printing Environment Settings
DEF
Gutter
Gutter
5
ABC
DEF
ABC
Gutter
If SHORT EDGE is specified, the binding location is created on the short edge of
the paper.
2-sided printing in
portrait orientation
Front
Back
2-sided printing in
landscape orientation
Front
ABC
ABC
Gutter
DEF
Back
Gutter
Gutter
DEF
Gutter
NOTE
You cannot create a gutter only by specifying this item. A gutter can be created only
after specifying this item in combination with the setting for GUTTER.
5-40
SETUP Menu Settings
GUTTER
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
Specifies the gutter width for printing with the binding location created. A gutter is
created with the image shifted by the specified value. You can shift the image in
the "+" direction with a positive value and in the "–" direction with a negative value.
[0 mm]
+ direction
- direction
Center
Center
Center
Gutter
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after creating a gutter,
the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
• Each time you press [ ], the value increases in 0.5 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in 0.5 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
• If the settings for OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are specified at the same time as the
setting for this item is specified, the settings for OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are
processed first, and then the setting for this item is processed.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-41
5
Printing Environment Settings
Gutter
Specify on which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, the gutter is to
be created in BIND.LOCATION (See the previous item). On which edge (top/
bottom/left/right) of the paper the gutter is created depends on the setting for
BIND.LOCATION and which value "+" or "-" is specified for this item.
● Settings for BIND.LOCATION and GUTTER
Specify BIND.LOCATION and GUTTER referring to the following finishing
image.
Printing Environment Settings
ABC
ABC
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
ABCDE
FGHIJK
FGHIJK
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
FGHIJK
5
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
Back
(2-sided printing)
FGHIJK
ABC
DEF
Front
ABCDE
ABC
Back
(2-sided printing)
ABCDE
Front
Binding location for when using
paper in landscape orientation
ABCDE
Binding location for when using
paper in portrait orientation
Specify whether you print in portrait orientation or landscape orientation in an
application.
ALT.METHOD
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing side of the last page on a job with odd number of pages
when 2-SIDED PRINT. (See p. 5-38) is set to ON.
The printing side of the last page varies depending on the setting for this item or
paper source as the following.
• When printing from the paper cassette
If ON is specified, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
If OFF is specified, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
• When printing from the multi-purpose tray
If ON is specified, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
If OFF is specified, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
5-42
SETUP Menu Settings
Specify OFF for this item when you want to match the setting of the orientation or
printing side for the last page with those for its previous page, such as when you
want to print previously printed paper etc. whose printing orientation or printing
side is fixed.
NOTE
The setting is effective only when 2-SIDED PRINT. is set to ON.
QUALITY MENU Options
RESOLUTION
FINE*, SUPER FINE
Specifies the resolution for when processing print data.
If FINE is specified, the printer prints in the Fine mode at 600dpi. This mode is
appropriate for printing general text or charts at a high speed.
If SUPER FINE is specified, the printer prints in the Super Fine mode at 1200dpi.
This mode reproduces text and outlines of diagrams clearly with a fine resolution.
This mode is appropriate especially for printing data that contain many small
letters.
IMPORTANT
If TEXT, GRAPHICS, or IMAGE in the following items is set to ERR DIFFUSION,
and this item is set to SUPER FINE, ERR DIFFUSION changes to HIGH RESOL..
- B & W HALFTONES and COLOR HALFTONES in HALFTONES in the QUALITY
MENU options in the SETUP menu
- B & W HALFTONES and COLOR HALFTONES in the PDF1.5 menu
- B & W HALFTONES and COLOR HALFTONES in the PS menu
● About memory amount required for using the Super Fine mode
Printing in the Super Fine mode requires a large amount of memory for data
process. Therefore, depending on the amount or type of data, the message
<39 SPL MEM.FULL> may appear, disabling printing. In this case, print with
RESOLUTION set to FINE and GRADATION LEVEL to HIGH 1, or install an
optional expansion RAM module as needed. For details on the optional
expansion RAM modules, see Getting Started Guide.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-43
5
Printing Environment Settings
Resolution is indicated in "dpi" that indicates the number of dots per inch, and the
larger the value is, the higher precision you can print at.
GRADATION LEVEL
HIGH 1* *1, HIGH 2*1, STANDARD*2
*1 HIGH 1 and HIGH 2 are displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
*2 STANDARD is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to SUPER FINE.
Specifies the gradation level for data.
This item is fixed at STANDARD when RESOLUTION (See the previous item) is
set to SUPER FINE. When RESOLUTION is set to FINE, you can select HIGH 1
or HIGH 2.
Specify HIGH 1 when printing pictures or other data in general quality and specify
HIGH 2 when printing in higher quality.
● About memory amount required for using the HIGH 2 mode
Printing in the HIGH 2 mode requires a large amount of memory for data
process. Therefore, when the HIGH 2 mode is specified, the message <39 SPL
MEM.FULL> may appear depending on the amount or type of data, disabling
printing. In this case, print with GRADATION LEVEL set to HIGH 1, or install an
optional expansion RAM module as needed. For details on the optional
expansion RAM modules, see Getting Started Guide.
Printing Environment Settings
5
TONER SAVE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether to use the toner save mode that is suitable for when printing a
proof sheet.
5-44
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
If ON is specified for this item, you can save toner, but print result may be faint and
unclear. Parts to which gradation is applied in very light gray may appear denser in
color.
- When printing without using the
toner save mode
- When printing using the toner save
mode
DENSITY: CYAN
1 to 16; 9*
Adjusts the print density of cyan for the print data. As the value increases, the
print density becomes denser.
NOTE
• Normally, you do not need to adjust the print density with this item.
• When this printer is connected to a network on which two or more printers are
being used at the same time, make a fine adjustment on the gap of the print density
among the printers.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-45
Printing Environment Settings
5
DENSITY: MAGENTA
1 to 16; 9*
Adjusts the print density of magenta for the print data. As the value increases, the
print density becomes denser.
NOTE
• Normally, you do not need to adjust the print density with this item.
• When this printer is connected to a network on which two or more printers are
being used at the same time, make a fine adjustment on the gap of the print density
among the printers.
DENSITY: YELLOW
1 to 16; 9*
Adjusts the print density of yellow for the print data. As the value increases, the
print density becomes denser.
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
• Normally, you do not need to adjust the print density with this item.
• When this printer is connected to a network on which two or more printers are
being used at the same time, make a fine adjustment on the gap of the print density
among the printers.
DENSITY: BLACK
1 to 16; 9*
Adjusts the print density of black for the print data. As the value increases, the
print density becomes denser.
NOTE
• Normally, you do not need to adjust the print density with this item.
• When this printer is connected to a network on which two or more printers are
being used at the same time, make a fine adjustment on the gap of the print density
among the printers.
5-46
SETUP Menu Settings
COLOR MODE
AUTO*, COLOR, BLACK & WHITE
Specifies whether to print in color or in black and white.
If AUTO is specified, the printer automatically switches between color printing and
black-and-white printing according to the document type.
If COLOR is specified, the printer prints using the four colors of KYMC (Black,
Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan).
If BLACK & WHITE is specified, the printer prints in black and white even when
printing a color document.
HALFTONES
■ B & W HALFTONES
GRAPHICS .... GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE ........... GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for
black-and-white data for each text part, graphics part such as diagrams and
graphs, and image part such as picture images.
RESOLUTION prints precisely so that the lines of text data appear clearly. This
setting is appropriate for printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline quality combined.
This setting is appropriate for printing diagrams or graphs in which gradation is
used.
COLOR TONE prints with a stable texture and distinct gradation, by enhancing
the contrast of tone. This setting is appropriate for printing image data such as
photographic images.
Although HIGH RESOL. prints in higher resolution than RESOLUTION does, the
stability of the texture is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate for printing a
document so that the outlines of text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
ERR DIFFUSION uses an error diffusion method that gives priority to printing fine
lines or text. This setting is appropriate for printing images with small text or very
fine lines.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-47
5
Printing Environment Settings
TEXT.............. RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
■ COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT ..............RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS ....COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE............COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for color data
for each text part, graphics part such as diagrams and graphs, and image part
such as picture images.
RESOLUTION prints precisely so that the lines of text data appear clearly. This
setting is appropriate for printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION prints with a stable texture and color hue, and a smooth gradation
combined. This setting is appropriate for printing image data such as
photographic images, because it reduces a phenomenon of "Out-of-Register
Colors".
Printing Environment Settings
5
Although COLOR TONE prints precisely with the phenomenon of "Out-of-Register
Colors" reduced than GRADATION does, the stability of the texture is lower in
quality. This setting is appropriate for printing diagrams, graphs, etc.
Although HIGH RESOL. prints in higher resolution than RESOLUTION does, the
stability of the texture is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate for printing a
document so that the outlines of text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
ERR DIFFUSION uses an error diffusion method that gives priority to printing fine
lines or text. This setting is appropriate for printing images with small text or very
fine lines.
GRAY COMPENSATE
TEXT .................................... ON*, OFF
GRAPHICS .......................... ON*, OFF
IMAGE.................................. ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to print gray color data with the black toner (Bk) only.
If ON is specified, the printer prints gray color data with the black toner (Bk) only.
You can prevent a phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors".
If OFF is specified, the printer prints the gray color of gray color data using the
four colors of CMYK. The ability to reproduce the tone of the dark parts is more
improved than when ON is specified.
5-48
SETUP Menu Settings
CMS
■ CMS SELECTION
PRINTER*, HOST
Specifies which device the printer or host (the printer driver) is to be used for color
processing.
If PRINTER is specified, the color processing is performed on the printer.
If HOST is specified, the color processing is not performed on the printer.
IMPORTANT
• If the setting for CMS (Matching) on the host (the printer driver) is set to [Driver
Matching Mode], the setting for this item is ignored even if PRINTER is specified,
the host performs the color correction process.
• If HOST is specified for this item, the host that is not connected via the printer
driver does not perform the color correction process.
TEXT.....................................CMS*, GAMMA
GRAPHICS ...........................CMS*, GAMMA
IMAGE ..................................CMS*, GAMMA
Specifies whether to perform color matching or correct color specifying the
gamma value.
You can specify the settings by data type of TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE.
If you change the setting for this item, availabilities of the following settings switch.
CMS
GAMMA
RGB SRCE PROF. (See the next
item)
X
MATCHING METHOD (See p. 5-51)
X
OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-51)
X
GAMMA (See p. 5-52)
X
: Enabled X: Disabled
SETUP Menu Settings
5-49
Printing Environment Settings
5
■ CMS/GAMMA
■ RGB SRCE PROF.
TEXT .................................... sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download
Profile*1
GRAPHICS .......................... sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download
Profile*1
IMAGE.................................. sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5,
HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download
Profile*1
*1 "Download Profile" appears only when a profile is downloaded.
Selects the profile appropriate for RGB data according to the monitor you are
using.
You can specify the settings by data type of TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE.
sRGB_v1.31
5
Printing Environment Settings
Industry-standard image quality of the general Windows (PC) monitor is applied. If
you are using a monitor that supports sRGB, the printer performs matching for the
colors displayed on the monitor and those printed by the printer to print in colors
close to those displayed on the monitor. The default value is "sRGB_v1.31".
HDTV_gamma_X.X: HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, and
HDTV_gamma_2.4
Adjusts the brightness of the printout results without spoiling the lightest parts and
darkest parts of the data. Specify the setting for this item when you want to adjust
the brightness such as when the colors in the printout result are lighter than those
displayed on the monitor. The greater the gamma value is, the darker in color the
data is printed.
Download Profile
Specify the setting value when using a profile downloaded onto this printer.
NOTE
• Download profiles using NetSpot Resource Downloader. For details on the
download procedure, see "NetSpot Resource Downloader User's Guide". Obtain
NetSpot Resource Downloader and "NetSpot Resource Downloader User's Guide"
from the Canon website.
• The settings in the control panel and those in the printer driver correspond to each
other as follows.
Printer Driver Setting
sRGB v1.31(Canon)
5-50
SETUP Menu Settings
Control Panel Setting
sRGB_v1.31
Printer Driver Setting
Control Panel Setting
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5 Monitor
HDTV_gamma_1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8 Monitor
HDTV_gamma_1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4 Monitor
HDTV_gamma_2.4
• Set CMS/GAMMA (See p. 5-49) to CMS to enable this item.
■ OUTPUT PROFILE
TEXT.....................................Normal*, Photo
GRAPHICS ...........................Normal*, Photo
IMAGE ..................................Photo*, Normal
Specify the output profile. The output profile is applied to all the print data.
You can specify the settings by data type of TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE.
■ MATCHING METHOD
TEXT.....................................SATURATION*, COLORIMETRIC, PERCEPTUAL
GRAPHICS ...........................PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
IMAGE ..................................PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
Performs color adjustment because the colors displayed on the monitor of the
computer are different from those reproduced by the printer. Select the
adjustment method from among the followings according to your use or
preference.
You can specify the settings by data type of TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE.
If PERCEPTUAL is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
hue.
If SATURATION is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
intensity.
If COLORIMETRIC is specified, the printer performs matching so that the
difference in color of a logo, etc. between the original print data on screen and the
printed paper is minimized.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-51
5
Printing Environment Settings
Normally, leave the settings for text data and graphics data to Normal, and image
data to Photo.
NOTE
• The settings in the control panel and those in the printer driver correspond to each
other as follows.
Printer Driver Setting
Control Panel Setting
Perceptual [Monitor Color
Matched]
Specify PERCEPTUAL for this item,
and set OUTPUT PROFILE to Normal.
Perceptual [Photographic]
Specify PERCEPTUAL for this item,
and set OUTPUT PROFILE to Photo.
Saturation
Specify SATURATION for this item.
Colorimetric
Specify COLORIMETRIC for this item.
Colorimetric [No
White-Point Correction]*1
Cannot be specified from the control panel.
*1 [Colorimetric [No White-Point Correction]] can be specified only on Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/
Vista.
5
Printing Environment Settings
• Set CMS/GAMMA (See p. 5-49) to CMS to enable this item.
■ GAMMA
TEXT .................................... 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
GRAPHICS .......................... 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
IMAGE.................................. 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
Adjusts the brightness of the printout results without spoiling the lightest parts and
darkest parts of the data. Apply this option when printed colors in the printed
paper are lighter than those in the original image (such as photographs that have
not yet been scanned or graphics created on the monitor) or when you want to
change the brightness of colors. The greater the setting value is, the darker in
color the data is printed. 1.4 is the value without correction.
You can specify the settings by data type of TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE.
NOTE
Set CMS/GAMMA (See p. 5-49) to CMS to enable this item.
5-52
SETUP Menu Settings
GRADATION SET.
GRADATION .........................OFF*, SMOOTH 1, SMOOTH 2
GRAPHICS*1 ........................ON*, OFF
IMAGE*1 ...............................ON*, OFF
*1 Displayed only when GRADATION is set to SMOOTH 1 or SMOOTH 2.
Specify this item if gradation of image data such as graphics (illustrations created
by an application) or images (bitmap data) cannot be printed smoothly (if the color
changes stand out).
SMOOTH 2 performs a smoother gradation than SMOOTH 1. If gradation is not
printed smoothly by specifying SMOOTH 1, specify SMOOTH 2.
You can also select a target for the smoothing process by switching ON/OFF for
GRAPHICS and IMAGE.
NOTE
The smoothing process can be specified only for graphics data in the printer driver.
For image data, the smoothing process can be specified only from the printer's
control panel.
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST) .............SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1 ........................OFF*, ON
IMAGE*1 ...............................ON*, OFF
*1 Displayed only when SMOOTHING (AST) is set to SMOOTH 1 or SMOOTH 2.
Specifies whether to use the smoothing process which can print the outlines of
graphics (illustrations created by an application) and text smoothly.
SMOOTH 2 performs a smoother process than SMOOTH 1. If data is not printed
smoothly by specifying SMOOTH 1, specify SMOOTH 2.
You can also select a target for the smoothing process by switching ON/OFF for
GRAPHICS and IMAGE.
NOTE
The effect of the advanced smoothing process varies depending on the pattern of
text or graphics.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-53
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
If COLOR HALFTONES or B & W HALFTONES is set to ERR DIFFUSION, the
setting for this item is disabled.
TONER VOLUME
NORMAL*, GRADATION, TEXT
The toner volume may exceed this printer's restricted value when the parts dense
in color are printed. In this case, this printer processes so that the toner volume
falls within the restricted values. You can specify the setting for the process in this
item.
If NORMAL is specified, text and line data is printed so that the resolution for text
and lines is maintained. Other types of data are printed so that the color is
maintained.
If GRADATION is specified, color maintenance is applied to all the data.
If TEXT is specified, resolution maintenance is applied to all the data.
NOTE
• This item can be applied only to jobs for printing PDF files using the direct print
function.
• If GRADATION is specified, text and lines may blot.
• If TEXT is specified, the colors may not match.
Printing Environment Settings
5
LINE CONTROL
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION
This setting enables you to specify the image processing for lines. Usually, leave
the setting to RESOLUTION.
If RESOLUTION is specified, image processing that maintains the same
resolution as text for lines is performed.
If GRADATION is specified, image processing that maintains the same color and
gradation as graphics for lines is performed.
NOTE
This item can be applied only to jobs of the UFR II printer driver and jobs for
printing PDF files using the direct print function.
5-54
SETUP Menu Settings
QUALITY CHANGE
CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
Specifies whether the printer should continue printing with the resolution of the
data being lowered or stop printing displaying the following error message when it
cannot print with the specified value of resolution.
Error Message
<38 LOW IMGE QLTY>
Setting
When the printer receives a large amount of data or
complicated data, the memory required for the
process may run out, and the printer may print with its
resolution level being lowered automatically. Specify
whether the printer should display an error message
when the printer is in this status.
If CONT.PRINTING is specified, the printer prints with the resolution of the data
being lowered automatically without displaying a message.
NOTE
When the message <38 LOW IMGE QLTY> appears frequently by specifying
STOP PRINTING for this item, perform the following procedure.
1. If GRADATION LEVEL is set to HIGH 2, set it to HIGH 1. If you do so,
however, the printer prints with the gradation level of the data being lowered.
2. When the message still appears after applying the Remedy 1, or when you
want to print with the gradation level of the data as it is, install an optional
expansion memory module (RAM).
INTERFACE MENU Options
I/F CONNECTION
USB ......................................ON*, OFF
NETWORK ...........................ON*, OFF
Specifies the settings for the interfaces used for communication with the
computer, etc.
You can specify ON or OFF for each interface.
Even if multiple interfaces are set to ON, the printer automatically switches to the
one that received the data first. Therefore, you do not need to change the setting
in the printer each time you connect the printer to different types of interfaces at
the same time.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-55
5
Printing Environment Settings
If STOP PRINTING is specified, the printer stops printing, displaying a message.
In this case, the printer resumes printing with the resolution of the data being
lowered by pressing [Online].
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
MODE TIMEOUT
OFF, 5 to 300 seconds; 15 seconds*
Specifies the function to finish a job automatically.
If you specify the time the printer times out in this item, the printer can finish a job
automatically when the specified time has elapsed since no data is entered.
If this item is specified, the printer can output paper automatically when data is
remaining in the printer because of an application not sending the command to
output paper.
When OFF is specified, the printer does not use the function to finish a job
automatically.
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• If the function to finish a job automatically is specified, the job may be finished in
the middle of the process when the computer takes a long time to process the data.
In this case, adjust the time the printer times out.
• When you are using an optional hard disk, specify the setting other than OFF for
this item. It is recommended that you should leave this item at the default setting,
15 seconds, if possible.
NOTE
• The Job indicator on the control panel is on or blinking during a job.
• When the printer is offline, the printer does not use the function to finish a job
automatically.
5-56
SETUP Menu Settings
NETWORK MENU
■ TCP/IP SETTINGS
IP V. 4 SETTING
IP MODE.............................MANUAL*, AUTO
PROTOCOL*1
DHCP................................OFF*, ON
BOOTP .............................OFF*, ON
RARP................................OFF*, ON
IP SETTINGS
IP ADDRESS ....................0.0.0.0*
SUBNET MASK ................0.0.0.0*
GATEWAY ADDRESS ......0.0.0.0*
IP ADD.RANGE
REJECT RX/PRT..............OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*2 ........REJ IP 1 to 8
PERMIT RX/PRT ..............OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 ........PER IP 1 to 8
REJ SET/BROWSE ..........OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*2 ........REJ IP 1 to 8
PMT SET/BROWSE .........OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 ........PER IP 1 to 8
DNS
PRIMARY ADD. ................0.0.0.0*
SECONDARY ADD. ..........0.0.0.0*
IP V. 6 SETTING
IP V. 6..................................OFF*, ON
WINS
OFF*, ON
ARP/PING
ON*, OFF
FTP
FTP PRINT .........................OFF*, ON
FTP SETTINGS ..................ON*, OFF
LPD PRINT
ON*, OFF
RAW PRINT
ON*, OFF
IPP PRINT
ON*, OFF
WSD
WSD PRINT........................ON*, OFF
WSD BROWSING*3 ............ON*, OFF
MULTICAST DISC. .............ON*, OFF
HTTP
Printing Environment Settings
5
SETUP Menu Settings
5-57
ON*, OFF
PROXY SETTINGS*4
PROXY............................... OFF*, ON
SERVER ADDRESS*5
PORT NUMBER*5 .............. 0 to 99999; 80*
SAME DOMAIN*5............... NO PROXY*, USE PROXY
PROXY AUTH.*5 ................ OFF*, ON
USER NAME*5
PASSWORD*5
SNTP
OFF*, ON
RESPONSE
ON*, OFF
MAC ADDRESS SET
PERMIT RECEIVE............. OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 .......... PER.MAC ADD.1 to 50
*1 PROTOCOL is displayed only when IP MODE is set to AUTO.
*2 REJECT ADD.SET. and PERMIT ADD.SET. are displayed only when REJECT RX/PRT, PERMIT RX/
PRT, REJ SET/BROWSE, PMT SET/BROWSE, or PERMIT RECEIVE is set to ON.
5
Printing Environment Settings
*3 WSD BROWSING is displayed only when WSD PRINT is set to OFF.
*4 PROXY SETTINGS is not displayed depending on the printer you are using or availability of the
optional accessories.
*5 SERVER ADDRESS, PORT NUMBER, SAME DOMAIN, and PROXY AUTH. are displayed only when
PROXY is set to ON.
Specifies the TCP/IP setting for the print server equipped with this printer.
Item
Setting
IP MODE
Select the method for setting the IP address.
- When specifying the IP address using any one of DHCP,
BOOTP, or RARP, select AUTO.
- When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select
MANUAL.
PROTOCOL
If you have set IP MODE to AUTO, select which protocol you
want to use.
Set each of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP to ON (use) or OFF (do
not use).
Specify the settings for IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and
GATEWAY ADDRESS.
IP SETTINGS
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
5-58
SETUP Menu Settings
Setting
IP
ADD.RANGE
Restrict the users who can print or perform the printer settings
using IP addresses.
- To reject specific users from printing, set REJECT RX/PRT to
ON, and then specify the addresses to be rejected in REJECT
ADD.SET..
- To permit specific users to print, set PERMIT RX/PRT to ON,
and then specify the addresses to be permitted in PERMIT
ADD.SET..
- To reject specific users from changing the settings, set
REJECT ADD.SET. to ON, and then specify the addresses to
be rejected in REJECT ADD.SET..
- To permit specific users to change the settings, set PERMIT
ADD.SET. to ON, and then specify the addresses to be
permitted in PERMIT ADD.SET..
Enter addresses in REJECT ADD.SET. and PERMIT ADD.SET.
using the following procedure.
(This section describes the setting procedure taking REJECT
ADD.SET as an example. You can also apply this procedure to
the setting for PERMIT ADD.SET..)
a Select REJECT ADD.SET., then press [OK].
b Select REJ IP 1 START, then press [OK].
c Enter the IP address to be rejected, then press [OK].
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
d If you enter an IP address in REJ IP 1 END, the IP addresses
between REJ IP 1 START and REJ IP 1 END are rejected.
For example, if you specify addresses as follows, 12
addresses between "192.168.0.200" and "192.168.0.211" are
rejected.
- Entering "192.168.0.200" for REJ IP 1 START
- Entering "192.168.0.211" for REJ IP 1 END
e If you want to enter other IP addresses to be rejected, enter
them starting from REJ IP 2 START.
You can enter up to eight addresses.
DNS
Specify the settings for PRIMARY ADD. and SECONDARY
ADD. for DNS.
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
* Specify the settings for [DNS Host Name], [DNS Domain
Name], and [DNS Dynamic Update] from the Remote UI. (See
Network Guide)
IP V. 6
SETTING
If you want to use IP v. 6, specify ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-59
5
Printing Environment Settings
Item
Item
WINS
If you want to use WINS Resolution, specify ON.
* Specify the settings for [WINS Server Address] and [Scope ID]
from the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
ARP/PING
If you want to use the ARP/PING function, specify ON.
FTP
If you want to use FTP Print, set FTP PRINT to ON.
* Specify the settings for [FTP Print User Name] and [FTP Print
Password] from the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
If you want to perform the settings using FTP Client, set FTP
SETTINGS to ON.
LPD PRINT
If you want to use LPD Print, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Print LPD Banner Page] from the
Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
RAW PRINT
If you want to use RAW Print, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Bidirectional Communication] from the
Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
IPP PRINT
If you want to use IPP Print, specify ON.
* Specify the settings for [IPP Authentication], [IPP User Name],
and [IPP Password] from the Remote UI. (See Network
Guide)
WSD
If you want to use WSD Print, set WSD PRINT to ON, and then
specify the following settings.
- If you want to obtain printer information using WSD, set WSD
BROWSING to ON.
If you set WSD PRINT to ON, WSD BROWSING is not
displayed. (WSD BROWSING is fixed at ON.)
- If you want to set the printer to respond to requests from
multicast discovery, set MULTICAST DISC. to ON.
HTTP
If you want to use the HTTP function, specify ON.
Specifying OFF disables the Remote UI and IPP Print.
Printing Environment Settings
5
5-60
Setting
SETUP Menu Settings
Setting
PROXY
SETTINGS
If you want to use the proxy function, set PROXY to ON, and
then specify the following settings.
- Enter the proxy server address to be used for the proxy
function in SERVER ADDRESS.
- Enter the port number of the proxy server to be used for the
proxy function in PORT NUMBER.
- If you want to use the proxy function also for the same
domain, set SAME DOMAIN to USE PROXY.
- If you want to use the proxy authentication function, set
PROXY AUTH. to ON, and then specify the following items.
- USER NAME: Enter the user name to be used for the proxy
authentication.
- PASSWORD: Enter the password to be used for the proxy
authentication.
SNTP
When obtaining time using the SNTP Client function, specify
ON.
* Specify the settings for [NTP Server Name] and [Polling
Interval] from the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
RESPONSE
If you want to set the printer so that it responds to searches that
used the multicast discovery function, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Scope Name] from the Remote UI.
(See Network Guide)
MAC
ADDRESS
SET
Permits access only from users with a specific MAC address.
Set PERMIT RECEIVE to ON, and then specify the addresses
to be permitted in PERMIT ADD.SET..
Enter addresses in PERMIT ADD.SET. using the following
procedure.
a Select PERMIT ADD.SET., then press [OK].
b Select PER.MAC ADD.1 then press [OK].
c Enter the MAC address to be permitted, then press [OK].
d If you want to enter other MAC addresses to be permitted,
enter them starting from PER.MAC ADD.2.
You can enter up to 50 addresses.
"Method for entering addresses"
1. Move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter three-digit
numbers) in which you want to enter the address, by pressing [ ] or [ ] (The
number in the field blinks, allowing you to enter a value.).
2. Enter the numbers ([ ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.).
3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the settings.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-61
5
Printing Environment Settings
Item
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when all the following conditions are fulfilled.
- NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is set to ON.
- [Primary Network Setting] is set to [Standard Network].
Specify the setting for [Primary Network Setting] in the [Extension Card] page in
the Remote UI or in EXTENSION CARD (See p. 5-66) in the control panel.
■ NETWARE SETTING
NETWARE ........................... OFF*, ON
FRAME TYPE ...................... AUTO DETECT*, ETHERNET 2, ETHERNET 802.2,
ETHERNET 802.3, ETHERNET SNAP
PRINT SERVICE.................. NDS PSERVER*, NPRINTER,
BINDERYPSERVER, RPRINTER
5
Printing Environment Settings
Configures the NetWare network settings.
NOTE
For more details on NetWare, see "Chapter 4 Using the Printer on a NetWare
Network (Windows)" in Network Guide.
■ APPLETALK
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should use AppleTalk.
NOTE
• For more details on AppleTalk, see "Chapter 6 Using the Printer on an AppleTalk
Network (Macintosh)" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ SMB
SMB SERVER...................... OFF*, ON
SMB*1 .................................. OFF*, ON
*1 SMB is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, HARD DISK is set to ON, and SMB
SERVER is set to ON.
Specifies whether the printer should use the SMB protocol.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
5-62
SETUP Menu Settings
■ SNMP V. 1
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use the SNMP v. 1 protocol.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
NOTE
• For more details on SNMP v. 1, see "Chapter 2 Common Network Settings" in
Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ SNMP V. 3 SET.
SNMP V. 3.............................OFF*, ON
USER SETTING 1 to 5*1
AUTH .PASSWORD
ENCRYPT.PASSWRD
*1 USER SETTING 1 to 5 is displayed only when SNMP V. 3 is set to ON.
Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 3 protocol.
If you want to specify or change user information (authentication password and
encryption password) to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol, perform the following
procedure.
1. Select USER SETTING N (N = 1 to 5) using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
2. Confirm the user name*, then press [OK].
* "initial" (the default value) or the user name specified in the Remote UI is displayed.
3. Select AUTH .PASSWORD or ENCRYPT.PASSWRD using [
] and [
], then press
[OK].
4. Enter the password, then press [OK].
Input Method:
- Enter the password of 6 to 16 characters by pressing [ ] and [ ].
- Move the cursor to each field in which you want to enter a value by pressing [
] and
[
] (The cursor blinks, allowing you to enter a value.).
- If you press [Feeder Selection], a space for entering a character is created at the
cursor position.
- If you press [Cancel Job], the character at the cursor position is deleted.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-63
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
• For more details on SNMP v. 3, see "Chapter 3 Using the Printer on a TCP/IP
Network (Windows/UNIX)" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ SPOOLER
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should use the Spooler function.
NOTE
• For more details on the Spooler function, see "Chapter 2 Common Network
Settings" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when all the following conditions are fulfilled.
- NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is set to ON.
- An optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK is set to ON.
- [Primary Network Setting] is set to [Standard Network].
Specify the setting for [Primary Network Setting] in the [Extension Card] page in
the Remote UI or in EXTENSION CARD (See p. 5-66) in the control panel.
Printing Environment Settings
5
■ START WAIT TIME
0 to 300 seconds; 0 seconds*
Specifies the time interval from when the printer is turned ON to when the protocol
starts.
NOTE
• For more details on startup waiting time, see "Chapter 2 Common Network
Settings" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ REMOTE UI SET.
REMOTE UI ......................... ON*, OFF
SSL*1 ................................... OFF*, ON
*1 SSL is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK is set to ON.
Specifies whether the printer should use the Remote UI.
NOTE
• For more details on SSL, see "Chapter 2 Common Network Settings" in Network
Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
5-64
SETUP Menu Settings
■ ETHERNET DRIVER
AUTO DETECT.....................ON*, OFF
COMM.MODE*1....................HALF DUPLEX*, FULL DUPLEX
ETHERNET TYPE*1 .............10 BASE-T*, 100 BASE-TX
MAC ADDRESS....................(Display only)
*1 COMM.MODE and ETHERNET TYPE are displayed only when AUTO DETECT is set to OFF.
Configures the Ethernet driver.
NOTE
• For more details on configuring the Ethernet driver, see "Chapter 2 Common
Network Settings" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ E-MAIL PRT SET
POP3 INTERVAL ..................0 to 90 MINUTES; 0 MINUTES*
POP3 RECEIVE ...................OFF*, ON
SMTP RECEIVE ...................OFF*, ON
Printing Environment Settings
5
Specifies the settings for e-mail print.
NOTE
• For more details on e-mail print, see "Chapter 3 Using the Printer on a TCP/IP
Network (Windows/UNIX)" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when all the following conditions are fulfilled.
- NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is set to ON.
- An optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK is set to ON.
■ INIT.N/W SET.
By the initialization in this item, you can reset the network settings to the default
settings.
The network settings can be initialized using the following procedure.
1. Press [Settings].
2. Select INTERFACE MENU using [
3. Select NETWORK MENU using [
4. Select INIT.N/W SET. using [
] and [
] and [
] and [
], then press [OK].
], then press [OK].
], then press [OK].
5. <OK?> is displayed. The initialization starts by pressing [OK].
* If you press [Online] without pressing [OK], the printer does not initialize the settings but becomes
ready to print.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-65
EXTENSION CARD
This is the setting for the interface board installed in the expansion slot of the
printer. This item is displayed only when the interface board is installed. For more
details, see the instruction manual supplied with the interface board.
CONNECT.RECOG.
ON*, OFF
When you print using a network, you may not obtain proper printout results
(Unreadable characters are printed, etc.). In this case, specify OFF for this item.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
5
Printing Environment Settings
EXT.RX BUFFER
OFF*, ON
If this item is set to ON, the memory capacity of the printer's receive buffer that
receives the data is increased. You can speed up the time the computer exits
when you send a large amount of data or complicated data from the computer.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer to make the
settings effective.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional RAM module is installed.
PRINT MODE Options
MODE SELECTION
AUTO SELECTION*, PCL, PS*1, IMAGING, PDF1.5*2
*1 PS is displayed only when the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
*2 PDF1.5 is displayed when all the following optional accessories are installed.
- Hard Disk
- PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM
- RAM (ER-256A, ER-512A)
5-66
SETUP Menu Settings
Specifies the mode in which this printer operates when you print without using the
printer driver for this printer.
You can specify whether the printer automatically switches the print mode
according to the data sent from the computer or you use the printer with the print
mode fixed at the PCL mode, the PS mode, the IMAGING mode, or the PDF1.5
mode.
AUTO SELECTION: (Auto-Switch Mode)
Automatically detects which command is used for the data sent from the computer
and switches the print mode. If you want to print from an application, normally use
this mode.
The default value is AUTO SELECTION.
NOTE
Any of the modes can be automatically switched to by default, however, you can
restrict the mode to be automatically switched to. For more details, see "AUTO
SWITCH," on p. 5-68.
Fixes the print mode at the PS mode.
Select this mode if the printer is in the auto-switch mode and does not switch to
the PS mode successfully (if such a printing problem as unreadable characters
being printed occurs) on printing from the PS printer driver or printing PS/EPS
files using the direct print function.
PCL: (PCL Mode)
Fixes the print mode at the PCL mode.
Select this mode if the printer is in the auto-switch mode and does not switch to
the PCL mode successfully (if such a printing problem as unreadable characters
being printed occurs) on printing from the PCL printer driver.
IMAGING: (IMAGING Mode)
Fixes the print mode at the IMAGING mode.
Select this mode if the printer is in the auto-switch mode and does not switch to
the IMAGING mode successfully (if such a printing problem as unreadable
characters being printed occurs) on printing image data (TIFF/JPEG) using the
direct print function or printing image data attached to an e-mail.
PDF1.5: (PDF Mode)
Fixes the print mode at the PDF mode.
Select this mode if the printer is in the auto-switch mode and does not switch to
the PDF mode successfully (if such a printing problem as unreadable characters
being printed occurs) on printing PDF data using the direct print function.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-67
Printing Environment Settings
5
PS: (PS Mode)
AUTO SWITCH
PCL ................ON*, OFF
PS*1 ...............ON*, OFF
IMAGING........ON*, OFF
PDF1.5*2 ........ON*, OFF
*1 PS is displayed only when the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
*2 PDF1.5 is displayed when all the following optional accessories are installed.
- Hard Disk
- PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM
- RAM (ER-256A, ER-512A)
Specifies the print mode to be automatically switched to if the auto-switch mode is
specified.
If ON is specified, the mode is to be automatically switched to.
NOTE
• Specify the auto-switch print mode in MODE SELECTION (See p. 5-66).
• If no mode is specified as the mode to be automatically switched to in this item, and
if the auto-switch mode is specified, the printer operates in the mode specified in
MODE PRIORITY (See p. 5-68).
Printing Environment Settings
5
MODE PRIORITY
NONE*, PCL, PS*1, PDF1.5*2
*1 PS is displayed only when the optional PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
*2 PDF1.5 is displayed when all the following optional accessories are installed.
- Hard Disk
- PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM
- RAM (ER-256A, ER-512A)
Specifies "Mode Priority" to be switched to by priority for when the auto-switch
mode is specified and this printer cannot identify the control command of the data.
If NONE is specified, the printer does not specify "Mode Priority". If the printer
cannot identify the control command of the data, it determines the print mode
automatically.
5-68
SETUP Menu Settings
USER MAIN. Options
ADJ.START POS.
OFFSET Y.............................-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (TRAY)................-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS1) .............-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS2)*1 ..........-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS3)*1 ..........-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (CASS4)*1 ..........-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X (DUP.).................-10.0 to 10.0; 0.0* (mm)
*1 OFFSET X (CASS2), OFFSET X (CASS3), and OFFSET X (CASS4) are displayed only when the
optional paper feeders are installed.
Specifies the printing position of the paper in the specified paper source. Adjusts
the position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X) by the
specified value.
Adjust the printing position in the vertical direction using OFFSET Y.
Adjust the printing position in the horizontal direction using OFFSET X for each
paper source.
You can also adjust the printing position for 2-sided printing using OFFSET Y as
well as OFFSET X for each paper source.
Additionally, if you want to make the printing position adjustment only for the
surface of paper which is output to the output tray facing down, use OFFSET X
(DUP.).
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the
printing position, the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
• You can check the adjusted printing position in PRNTPOSNPRINT (See p. 5-107)
in the UTILITY menu.
• For adjusting the printing position, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 6-62.
• Be aware that, when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, the
orientation of the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing
orientation or setting for BIND.LOCATION (See p. 5-40).
SETUP Menu Settings
5-69
Printing Environment Settings
5
The setting values are indicated in millimeters (mm), and you can adjust the
position in 0.1 mm increments using [ ] and [ ].
RECVRY PRINTING
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops printing
due to a paper jam or an error occurring.
If ON is specified for this item, the printer prints from the page in which a paper
jam or error occurred.
If OFF is specified for this item, the printer does not print from the partially printed
page but prints from the next page when a paper jam or error has occurred.
When the printer is performing 2-sided printing, it does not print the reverse page
of the partially printed page. The printing starts from the front side of the next
sheet.
INIT.COUNTER
■ FIXING UNIT
5
Printing Environment Settings
Resets the counter in this item after replacing the fixing unit.
By initializing the counter of the fixing unit, you can clear the fixing unit
replacement message <E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT> displayed on the control panel.
If FIXING UNIT is selected, a confirmation message <OK?> is displayed.
Pressing [OK] at this point starts the initialization. The printer does not initialize
the counter if you press [Online] without pressing [OK].
IMPORTANT
Perform this operation only after replacing the fixing unit. If you reset the counter
without replacing the fixing unit, the counter does not operate properly, resulting in
damage to the printer.
CHK PAPER SIZE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message <41
CHK PAPER SZE> or continue printing when TRAY PAPER SIZE, CASSETTE2
SIZE, CASSETTE3 SIZE, or CASSETTE4 SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES.
If ON is specified, the printer may stop printing, displaying <41 CHK PAPER
SZE>, when the paper size specified in the application is different from the size of
the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette. The paper on which
the error occurred is output automatically. You can also continue printing by
pressing [Online]. However, the data may not be printed properly, or a paper jam
may occur.
5-70
SETUP Menu Settings
If OFF is specified, the printer prints without performing a print check even when
the paper size specified in the application is different from the size of the paper
loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette. However, the printing speed
may drop. Also, because the paper is printed at the paper size specified in the
application, blank areas may appear on the printed paper or part of the images
may be missing when the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or
paper cassette is different from the paper size specified in the application.
IMPORTANT
For automatic 2-sided printing, <41 CHK PAPER SZE> always appears and the
printer stops printing regardless of the setting for this item.
SUBSTITUTE SIZE
OFF*, ON
When the paper cassette for the paper size to be used is not set in the printer, the
printer switches the paper source to the following paper cassettes and prints.
➞
Letter
Letter
➞
A4
A3
➞
Ledger (11 x 17)
Ledger (11 x 17)
➞
A3
If ON is specified, the printer switches the paper size.
If OFF is specified, the printer does not switch the paper size but stops printing,
displaying an error message.
NOTE
Even if ON is specified, the printer does not switch the paper size when the paper
source for the paper size is empty.
SP.IMAGE MODE
OFF*, LEVEL1, LEVEL2
Toner on the parts dense in color may not fix onto the paper and not printed
properly. In this case, specify LEVEL1 for this item. If the problem is not solved by
specifying LEVEL1, specify LEVEL2.
IMPORTANT
• If this solves the problem, reset the setting to the default value, OFF.
• If LEVEL1 or LEVEL2 is specified, the print density may be lighter than when OFF
is specified because the printer prints with the toner consumption adjusted.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-71
Printing Environment Settings
A4
5
Size of the Paper to
Be Printed
Printer Driver Setting
SP.S-SIZE MODE1
-2 to 2; 0*
When printing after the paper is changed from narrower one (A5 size etc.) to
wider one (A4 size etc.), the printer may stop printing temporarily and cool down
the fixing unit so that the print quality is maintained. You can specify the waiting
time before the print operation begins for this case.
The smaller the setting value is, the more the printer gives priority to the image
quality when printing. However, the waiting time before the print operation begins
may be lengthened.
The greater the setting value is, the shorter the printer makes the waiting time
when printing. However, residual images of the previously printed text or images
may appear on both sides of the paper.
5
-2 to 2; 0*
Printing Environment Settings
SP.S-SIZE MODE2
When printing narrow paper (A5 size etc.) continuously, the printer may stop
printing temporarily and cool down the fixing unit so that the print quality is
maintained. You can specify the waiting time before the print operation begins for
this case.
The smaller the setting value is, the more the printer gives priority to the image
quality when printing. However, the waiting time before the print operation begins
may be lengthened.
The greater the setting value is, the shorter the printer makes the waiting time
when printing. However, residual images of the previously printed text or images
may appear on both sides of the paper when wider paper is printed after the
continuous printing.
CLEANING
If you touch the transfer belt of the ITB unit, this may result in deterioration in print
quality. In this case, clean the transfer belt of the ITB unit.
NOTE
• Cleaning takes approximately 180 seconds.
• The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
5-72
SETUP Menu Settings
HDD MAINTENANCE
■ HDD ALL ERASE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether to completely erase the printed or deleted data from the hard
disk. By erasing data completely, readout of the data by special software is
prevented.
If ON is specified, the printer performs the process for completely erasing the data
when deleting the data in the hard disk.
If OFF is specified, the printer does not perform the process for completely
erasing the data.
NOTE
• If ON is specified, the printer may take time to process the data in order to perform
the process for completely erasing the data.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
■ QUICK FORMAT
Erases the contents of the hard disk.
QUICK FORMAT performs a quick format of the hard disk. Perform this operation
when a problem has occurred to the hard disk.
If the problem is not solved by executing QUICK FORMAT, perform STD FORMAT.
IMPORTANT
• If the message <CANNOT EXECUTE> appears when QUICK FORMAT is
executed, the hard disk is not formatted.
• When performing QUICK FORMAT, remove all the interface cables (the LAN cable,
USB cable, and printer cable) connected to this printer.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HDD ALL
ERASE is set to OFF.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-73
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
The HDD All Erase function is effective only for the jobs received after you specify
ON for this setting. The jobs received before you specify ON for this setting are not
completely erased. In this case, cycle the power of the printer or perform a hard
reset.
■ STD FORMAT
Erases the contents of the hard disk.
STD FORMAT performs a standard format of the hard disk. Perform this operation
when the problem is not solved by executing QUICK FORMAT.
IMPORTANT
• If the message <CANNOT EXECUTE> appears when STD FORMAT is executed,
the hard disk is not formatted.
• When performing STD FORMAT, remove all the interface cables (the LAN cable
and USB cable) connected to this printer.
• While STD FORMAT is being executed, <FORMATTING> is displayed in the
display. Wait for a moment until the format is completed.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
5
Printing Environment Settings
SP.PRINT MODE
■ PLAIN PAPER
OFF*, MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3
When printing plain paper, the paper may curl or the toner does not fix well. In this
case, specify the setting for this item.
• OFF:
Does not apply Special Print Mode.
• MODE 1:
Specify when the printing speed drops on printing plain paper
of 279.4 mm wide (Letter size) or less continuously.
• MODE 2:
Specify when the toner does not fix well by specifying OFF.
• MODE 3:
Specify when the toner still does not fix well by specifying
MODE 2.
■ COATED PAPER
OFF*, ON
Specify the setting for this item according to the type of the coated paper to be
used.
• OFF: Specify when printing coated paper of 106 to 169 g/m2.
• ON: Specify when printing coated paper of 170 to 220 g/m2.
5-74
SETUP Menu Settings
UPDATE FIRMWARE
■ USB
This item is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to be
updated.
■ NETWORK
This item is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to be
updated.
PCL SETUP Options
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to
no data existing between two Form Feed codes sent from an application.
If ON is specified, the printer does not output the blank page. If OFF is specified,
the printer outputs the blank page.
If you use this function, you can save paper because the blank pages are not
output.
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
Enables you to set the paper orientation.
If PORTRAIT is selected, the print image is printed in portrait orientation
regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper cassette.
When loading paper in
landscape orientation
When loading paper in
portrait orientation
ABCDE
Feeding direction
ABCDE
SETUP Menu Settings
5-75
Printing Environment Settings
5
PAPER SAVE
If LANDSCAPE is selected, the print image is printed in landscape orientation
regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper cassette.
When loading paper in
landscape orientation
When loading paper in
portrait orientation
ABCDE
Feeding direction
ABCDE
FONT NUMBER
0 to 89; 0*
Enables you to set the default font typeface for this printer function using the
corresponding font numbers. Valid font numbers are from 0 to 89.
POINT SIZE
Printing Environment Settings
5
4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*
If the number selected in FONT NUMBER is that of a proportionally spaced
scalable font, this option appears in the PCL SETUP options. It enables you to
specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in
increments of 0.25 pts.
PITCH
0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
If the number selected in FONT NUMBER is that of a fixed pitch scalable font,
Pitch appears in the PCL SETUP options. It enables you to specify the pitch for
the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters
per inch).
FORM LINES
5 to 128 lines; 64 lines*
Enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can
specify from 5 to 128 lines.
5-76
SETUP Menu Settings
SYMBOL SET
PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, PC775,
PC8DN, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8TK, PC1004, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,
WINBALT, DESKTOP, PSTEXT, LEGAL, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT
Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host
computer.
CUSTOM SIZE
DO NOT SET*, SET
Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If SET is selected, you can enter a
custom size.
UNIT OF MEASURE
Millimeters*, Inches
Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify
your custom paper size.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
X DIMENSION
98.0 to 320.0 mm; 320.0 mm* (3.86 to 12.60 inches; 12.60 inches*)
Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension
can be adjusted between 98.0 mm (3.86") and 320.0 mm (12.60") in increments
of 0.1 mm (0.01").
This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off.
Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly
printed. Make sure you do not increase the X dimension beyond the actual size of
the paper you are using for printing.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-77
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
You can only select the custom paper size entered with settings from the printer
driver.
Y DIMENSION
139.7 to 1200.0 mm; 457.2 mm* (5.50 to 47.24 inches; 18.00 inches*)
Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can
be adjusted between 139.7 mm (5.50") and 1200.0 mm (47.24") in increments of
0.1 mm (0.01").
This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off.
Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly
printed. Make sure you do not increase the Y dimension beyond the actual size of
the paper you are using for printing.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
APPEND CR TO LF
NO*, YES
5
Printing Environment Settings
Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed
code (LF) is received.
If YES is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line
feed code is received.
If NO is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code
is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next
line).
ABCDE ↓ FGHIJ
LF code ( ↓ ) only
ABCDE
FGHIJ
Append CR to LF 'YES'
5-78
SETUP Menu Settings
ABCDE
FGHIJ
Append CR to LF 'NO'
ENLRG A4 WIDTH
OFF*, ON
Determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter
size in width.
If ON is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6") from the top and bottom
edges and 3.39 mm (1/8") from the left and right edges is available for printing on
A4 paper. Only the width increases.
If OFF is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6") from the top, bottom, left,
and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.
C
C
D
D
5
A
B
B
D
D
'On'
C
'Off'
C
Printable area
Settings
A: Length
ON
OFF
288.54 mm (11 1/3")
B: Width
203.22 mm (8")
201.54 mm (7 7/8")
C: Left and right edges
3.39 mm (1/8")
4.23 mm (1/6")
D: Top and bottom edges
4.23 mm (1/6")
NOTE
• This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
• This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-79
Printing Environment Settings
A
BARDIMM
DISABLE*, ENABLE
You can enable or disable the Bar Code Printing function of the printer.
If ENABLE is selected, the printer will generate bar codes when it receives bar
code commands from the host computer.
If DISABLE is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code
commands are sent from the host computer.
IMPORTANT
If you are not printing the bar codes, make sure that DISABLE is specified for this
item.
Otherwise, the processing speed of regular print jobs may be reduced.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
Printing Environment Settings
5
FREESCAPE
~*, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF
You can specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code
commands when the host computer does not support the standard Escape Code.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
UFR II SETUP Options
PAPER SAVE
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to
no data existing in the page data sent from an application.
If ON is specified, the printer does not output the blank page. If OFF is specified,
the printer outputs the blank page.
If you use this function, you can save paper because the blank pages are not output.
5-80
SETUP Menu Settings
IMAGING SETUP Options
ORIENTATION
AUTO*, VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
Specifies whether the printer should print an image in portrait (vertical) orientation
or in landscape (horizontal) orientation.
If AUTO is specified, the printer compares the width and height of the image in
TIFF format or JPEG format. If the width is larger, the image is printed in
landscape orientation. If the height is larger, the image is printed in portrait
orientation.
If VERTICAL is specified, the image is printed in portrait orientation regardless of
the ratio of width to height of the image.
If HORIZONTAL is specified, the image is printed in landscape orientation
regardless of the ratio of width to height of the image.
ZOOM
OFF*, AUTO
Specifies whether the printer should print with scaling outputs according to the
printable area.
If AUTO is specified, the printer prints the image with its size reduced to fit within
the printable area when the image size is larger than the printable area. Also,
when the image size is smaller than the printable area, the printer prints the
image with its size expanded to the margins of the printable area.
IMPORTANT
• Even if OFF is specified, the printer automatically reduces the image size to make
it fit within the printable area of the paper size when the image size is larger than
the output size.
• If AUTO is specified, printing positions specified by tags in TIFF data are ignored.
NOTE
This item scales an image size with the ratio of height to width fixed.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-81
Printing Environment Settings
5
PRINT POSITION
AUTO*, CENTER, TOP LEFT
Specifies the printing position for an image.
If AUTO is specified, and if the data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the
printing position is specified, the image is printed on the specified position. If a
printing position is not specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper.
If CENTER is specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper even if the
data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing position is specified.
If TOP LEFT is specified, the image is printed on the upper-left of the paper even
if the data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing position is specified.
IMPORTANT
You cannot specify a printing position for data in JPEG format. If AUTO is specified,
the image is printed in the center of the paper.
5
Printing Environment Settings
PRINT GUARANTEE
OFF*, ON
Specifies a process method for the received TIFF data.
If OFF is specified, processing time is shortened by processing the received TIFF
data in order. However, <D9 IMG.REFER.ERR> may occur. In this case, specify
ON for this item.
If ON is specified, <D9 IMG.REFER.ERR> can be prevented from occurring
because the printer processes the TIFF data after receiving all of it.
NOTE
• Depending on the setting for SHOW WARNINGS (See the next item), the display
setting for the error message varies.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
SHOW WARNINGS
PRINT*, PANEL, OFF
Specifies the display setting for the error message in case of an error occurring.
If PRINT is specified, the printer prints the content of the error and exits the job.
If PANEL is specified, the error message appears in the display, and the printer
stops printing.
If OFF is specified, the printer exits the job without displaying anything even if an
error occurs.
5-82
SETUP Menu Settings
NOTE
The error messages of which the display settings can be changed with this item are
<D9 IMG.DATA ERR> and <D9 IMG.REFER.ERR>.
PRINT EMAIL TXT
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should print the text on printing e-mails.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed.
LIMIT EMAIL PRT
OFF*, ON
If ON is specified, the print pages of e-mail text are restricted to 5 pages. The sixth
and subsequent pages are not printed.
If OFF is specified, the print pages of e-mail text are not restricted.
IMPORTANT
If text data of an e-mail exceeds 25 MB, the text is not printed regardless of the
setting for this item.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and if PRINT
EMAIL TXT is set to ON.
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print a document with its printable area
expanded.
If ON is specified, the margins of 0 mm are applied to all sides of the paper,
making the printable area expanded to the edges of the paper.
If OFF is specified, data cannot be printed within 5 mm margins on all sides of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
If ON is specified, the edge of paper may be missing partly during printing or may
blot during color printing.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-83
5
Printing Environment Settings
Specifies whether to limit the number of the print pages of e-mail text when PRINT
EMAIL TXT (See the previous item) is set to ON.
EXIF ADJUSTMENT
ON*, OFF
Image data shot by a digital camera which supports Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format) includes shooting information such as conditions and scenes. This
item allows you to print the data with an appropriate process for the shot, based
on the shooting information.
If ON is specified, the printer adjusts the values for the exposure mode and the
brightness in the shooting information included in the Exif data, which affect the
printout results, and performs printing.
If OFF is specified, the printer performs printing without adjusting the Exif data.
NOTE
This item is applied only to image data which supports ExifPrint (Exif Ver2.2 or
later).
PDF1.5 Options
Printing Environment Settings
5
RENDER CL SPACE
AUTO*, CMYK
Specifies the method for rendering a PDF file.
If AUTO is specified, color space is switched to RGB or CMYK for each page.
If CMYK is specified, CMYK is fixed for all the color spaces. This setting is used
for when color difference occurs among the pages on printing a job of multiple
pages.
NOTE
To enable this item, set COLOR MODE in the common SETUP menu to AUTO or
COLOR.
RGB SRCE PROF.
sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4, NONE
Selects the profile appropriate for RGB data according to the monitor you are
using.
This item is specified when data which includes images or diagrams painted in
RGB is printed.
5-84
SETUP Menu Settings
sRGB
Industry-standard image quality of the general Windows (PC) monitor is applied. If
you are using a monitor that supports sRGB, the printer performs matching for the
colors displayed on the monitor and those printed by the printer to print in colors
close to those displayed on the monitor. The default value is "sRGB".
GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4
Adjusts the brightness of the printout results without spoiling the lightest parts and
darkest parts of the data. Specify the setting for this item when you want to adjust
the brightness such as when the colors in the printout result are lighter than those
displayed on the monitor. The greater the gamma value is, the darker in color the
data is printed.
NONE
RGB data is converted into CMYK without applying the RGB source profile.
NOTE
Device independent colors are not dependent on any particular device, such as a
monitor, and are meant to be true representations of colors as perceived by the
human eye. These color representations, called device independent color spaces,
result from work carried out by Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) and for
that reason are also called CIE based color spaces.
CMYK PROFILE
NONE*, JAPANCOLOR, US WEB COATED, EURO STANDARD
Specifies the setting for simulating the ink properties on printing CMYK data.
NONE
Prints data using the device dependent CMYK colors without applying CMYK
Simulation Profile.
JAPANCOLOR
This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in Japan.
US WEB COATED
This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in the United
States.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-85
5
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
If the printer receives data with a device independent (CIE based) color space
definition, its color is processed with the specified settings. Therefore, RGB SRCE
PROF. is not applied by the printer.
EURO STANDARD
This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in Europe.
IMPORTANT
If the printer receives data with a device independent (CIE based) color space
definition, its color is processed with the specified settings. Therefore, CMYK
PROFILE is not applied by the printer.
NOTE
When NONE is selected for this item, dark colors may not gradate depending on
the data.
OUTPUT PROFILE
NORMAL*, PHOTO
Specify the output profile. The output profile is applied to all the print data.
Normally, NORMAL is specified for when text or graphics data is printed, while
PHOTO is specified for when image data is printed.
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
If RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-50) or CMYK PROFILE (See p. 5-85) is set to
NONE, or if GRAY PROFILE (See p. 5-86) is set to OFF, the setting for this item is
ignored.
GRAY PROFILE
OFF*, ON
Specifies how gray color data should be processed.
If OFF is specified, the printer reproduces gray color data with the black (Bk) toner
only.
If ON is specified, gray color data is converted into CMYK data by a profile of this
printer. However, gray color data may be reproduced with the black (Bk) toner only
depending on the settings for OUTPUT PROFILE and PURE BLACK TEXT.
MATCHING METHOD
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
Specifies the color adjusting method for when RGB SRCE PROF. is applied.
Select the adjustment method from among the followings according to your use or
preference.
If PERCEPTUAL is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
hue.
5-86
SETUP Menu Settings
If SATURATION is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
intensity.
If COLORIMETRIC is specified, the printer performs matching so that the
difference in color of a logo, etc. between the original print data on screen and the
printed paper is minimized.
NOTE
If RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-50) is set to NONE, and if the printer receives a
device dependent color space definition that was color-processed by the host
computer, the setting for this item is not applied.
PURE BLACK TEXT
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing method for text in black (R=G=B=0%, C=M=Y=100%/
Bk=N%, or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%). Usually, it is recommended to leave this item
set to ON.
Test
PURE BLACK TEXT: ON
If OFF is specified, the black text is printed based on the selected setting for
OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-86). Depending on the jobs to be printed, it may be
preferable to specify OFF for this item.
Test
PURE BLACK TEXT: OFF
NOTE
If RENDER CL SPACE (See p. 5-84) is set to AUTO, this item may be applied also
to gray text.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-87
5
Printing Environment Settings
If ON is specified, you can print black color created by an application, using only
the black (Bk) toner. Since only the black (Bk) toner is used to print black text, the
color (CMY) toner will not be misaligned around the text.
BLACK OVERPRINT
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing method for when the printer prints black text over a color
background or graphics.
If ON is specified, the printer prints black text over a color background. If this
option is used with PURE BLACK TEXT, the printer prints all the background first,
and then prints the text over the color background using only the black (Bk) toner.
This alleviates the phenomenon in which the outlines of the printed black text are
rimmed with white.
Test
BLACK OVERPRINT: ON
If OFF is specified, black text is printed without being overlaid on a color
background. The printer first prints the color background with the text areas
"knocked out" (no color is printed in the text areas). The text is then printed in the
knocked out area, filling in the areas not printed in color. However, this may result
in the black text appearing lighter compared to when ON is specified or the
phenomenon in which the outlines of the printed black text are rimmed with white.
Printing Environment Settings
5
Test
BLACK OVERPRINT: OFF
NOTE
• The setting for this item is applied only when PURE BLACK TEXT (See p. 5-87) is
set to ON and is effective only for black text (100 %).
• If RENDER CL SPACE (See p. 5-84) is set to AUTO, this item may not be applied.
5-88
SETUP Menu Settings
CMYK OVERPRINT
OFF*, ON
You can overprint CMYK data in the composite output.
All colors used for data are overlaid and printed on one plate so you can check the
finishing result without separating the colors.
ON
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
NOTE
• This item is only available for data having the overprint attribute set.
• This item does not apply overprinting to spot colors.
• If a setting value other than NONE is selected for CMYK PROFILE (See p. 5-85),
overprinting is not applied even when ON is specified.
• If ON is specified for this item, overall color hues may be changed, compared to
when OFF is specified. In this case, set RENDER CL SPACE (See p. 5-84) to
CMYK to match the color hues.
BRIGHTNESS
85 to 115 %; 100 %*
Adjusts the brightness of the whole image (in 5 % increments). The smaller the
specified value is, the brighter the color is, and the larger, the darker it is.
NOTE
If TONER SAVE (See p. 5-44) in the common SETUP menu is set to ON, this item
cannot be used.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-89
Printing Environment Settings
5
OFF
GRAY COMPENSATE
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to print gray color data with the black (Bk) toner only.
If ON is specified, the printer prints gray color data with the black (Bk) toner only.
You can prevent the phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors".
If OFF is specified, the printer prints the gray color of gray color data using the
four colors of CMYK. The ability to reproduce the tone of the dark parts is more
improved than when ON is specified.
FIT TO PAGE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print with scaling outputs according to the
printable area.
5
Printing Environment Settings
If ON is specified, the printer prints with the page size of a PDF file reduced to fit
within the printable area when the page size is larger than the printable area. Also,
when the page size of a PDF file is smaller than the printable area, the printer
prints with the page size expanded to the margins of the printable area.
NOTE
This item scales a page size with the ratio of height to width fixed.
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print a document with its printable area
expanded.
If ON is specified, the margins of 0 mm are applied to all sides of the paper,
making the printable area expanded to the edges of the paper.
If OFF is specified, data cannot be printed within 4 mm margins on all sides of the
paper (some data cannot be printed within 5 mm margins on all sides of the
paper).
IMPORTANT
If ON is specified, the edge of paper may be missing partly during printing or may
blot during color printing.
5-90
SETUP Menu Settings
N-UP PRINT
OFF*, 2 ON 1, 4 ON 1, 6 ON 1, 8 ON 1, 9 ON 1, 16 ON 1
Prints multiple pages with them arranged on one sheet of paper starting from the
upper left.
Example: If "Vertical" is specified for the Page Setup setting in the PDF file.
2 ON 1
1
2
4 ON 1
1 2
3 4
8 ON 1
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 ON 1
16 ON 1
123
456
789
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5
Printing Environment Settings
6 ON 1
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
FINISHING
OFF*, COLLATE
If OFF is specified, printouts of a complete job are grouped.
If COLLATE is specified, printouts of a complete job are collated.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-91
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT ..............RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS ....GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE............GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) of
black-and-white data for each of the following parts in one document.
• Text parts
• Graphics parts such as graphics and graphs
• Image parts such as picture images
Setting Value
Printing Environment Settings
5
5-92
Contents
RESOLUTION
Prints precisely so that the outlines of text data
appear clearly. This setting is appropriate for
printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION
Prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline
quality combined. This setting is appropriate
for printing diagrams or graphs in which
gradation is used.
COLOR TONE
Prints with a stable texture and distinct
gradation, by enhancing the contrast of tone.
This setting is appropriate for printing image
data such as photographic images.
HIGH RESOL
Although prints in higher resolution than
RESOLUTION does, the stability of the texture
is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate
for printing a document so that the outlines of
text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
ERR DIFFUSION
Uses an error diffusion method that gives
priority to printing fine lines or text. This setting
is appropriate for printing images with small
text or very fine lines.
SETUP Menu Settings
COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT.............. RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS .... COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE ........... COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for color data
for each of the following parts in one document.
• Text parts
• Graphics parts such as graphics and graphs
• Image parts such as picture images
Contents
RESOLUTION
Prints precisely so that the outlines of text data
appear clearly. This setting is appropriate for
printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION
Prints with a stable texture and color hue, and
a smooth gradation combined. This setting is
appropriate for printing image data such as
photographic images, because it reduces a
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors".
COLOR TONE
Although prints precisely with the
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors"
reduced than GRADATION does, the stability
of the texture is lower in quality. This setting is
appropriate for printing diagrams, graphs, etc.
HIGH RESOL
Although prints in higher resolution than
RESOLUTION does, the stability of the texture
is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate
for printing a document so that the outlines of
text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
ERR DIFFUSION
Uses an error diffusion method that gives
priority to printing fine lines or text. This setting
is appropriate for printing images with small
text or very fine lines.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-93
5
Printing Environment Settings
Setting Value
COMMENT PRINT
AUTO*, ON, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should print comments.
If ON is specified, all comments are printed.
If OFF is specified, no comment is printed.
If AUTO is specified, only the comments specified to be printed in the PDF file are
printed.
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST)............. SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1 ....................... OFF*, ON
TEXT*1 ................................. ON*, OFF
*1 Displayed only when SMOOTHING (AST) is set to SMOOTH 1 or SMOOTH 2.
5
Printing Environment Settings
Specifies whether to use the smoothing process which can print the outlines of
graphics (illustrations created by an application) and text smoothly.
SMOOTH 2 performs a smoother process than SMOOTH 1. Even if data is not
printed smoothly by specifying SMOOTH 1, specify SMOOTH 2.
You can also select a target for the smoothing process by switching ON/OFF in
GRAPHICS and TEXT.
NOTE
The effect of the advanced smoothing process varies depending on the pattern of
text or graphics.
5-94
SETUP Menu Settings
PS Options
JOB TIMEOUT
0 to 3600 seconds; 0 seconds*
If the time specified in this item has elapsed since a job process was started, the
printer automatically finishes the job and receives the next job.
If you do not want to specify the timeout, specify "0 seconds".
WAIT TIMEOUT
0 to 3600 seconds; 300 seconds*
If the time specified in this item has elapsed since data from a computer was not
entered, the printer automatically finishes the job and receives the next job.
PRINT PS ERRORS
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether an error page should be printed when a PostScript error has
occurred.
If ON is specified, parts processed before a PostScript error occurs and
information about the PostScript error are printed.
If OFF is specified, printing is canceled when a PostScript error occurs.
RGB SRCE PROF.
sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4, NONE
Selects the profile appropriate for RGB data according to the monitor you are
using.
This item is specified when data which includes images or diagrams painted in
RGB is printed.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-95
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
If problems occur in a network, the job may finish in the time shorter than that
specified in this item.
sRGB
Industry-standard image quality of the general Windows (PC) monitor is applied. If
you are using a monitor that supports sRGB, the printer performs matching for the
colors displayed on the monitor and those printed by the printer to print in colors
close to those displayed on the monitor. The default value is "sRGB".
GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4
Adjusts the brightness of the printout results without spoiling the lightest parts and
darkest parts of the data. Specify the setting for this item when you want to adjust
the brightness such as when the colors in the printout result are lighter than those
displayed on the monitor. The greater the gamma value is, the darker in color the
data is printed.
NONE
RGB data is converted into CMYK without applying the RGB source profile.
IMPORTANT
• If the printer receives data with a device independent (CIE based) color space
definition, its color is processed with the specified settings. Therefore, RGB SRCE
PROF. is not applied by the printer.
• If a setting value other than NONE is specified for this item, and if the printer
receives a device dependent color space definition that was color-processed by the
host computer, RGB SRCE PROF. is also applied by the printer.
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
Device independent colors are not dependent on any particular device, such as a
monitor, and are meant to be true representations of colors as perceived by the
human eye. These color representations, called device independent color spaces,
result from work carried out by Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) and for
that reason are also called CIE based color spaces.
GRAY PROFILE
OFF*, ON
Specifies how gray color data should be processed.
If OFF is specified, the printer reproduces gray color data with the black (Bk) toner
only.
If ON is specified, gray color data is converted into CMYK data by a profile of this
printer. However, gray color data may be reproduced with the black (Bk) toner only
depending on the settings for OUTPUT PROFILE and PURE BLACK TEXT.
5-96
SETUP Menu Settings
OUTPUT PROFILE
TR Normal*, TR Photo, NORMAL, PHOTO
Specify the output profile. The output profile is applied to all the print data.
If TR Normal is specified, the printer prints the colors closely matching the ones
displayed on your monitor, and also reduces toner blotting of text and fine lines.
If TR Photo is specified, the printer prints colors close to photographic prints, and
also reduces toner blotting of text and fine lines.
If NORMAL is specified, the printer prints the colors closely matching the ones
displayed on your monitor.
If PHOTO is specified, the printer prints colors close to photographic prints.
MATCHING METHOD
PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
Specifies the color adjusting method for when RGB SRCE PROF. is applied.
Select the adjustment method from among the followings according to your use or
preference.
If PERCEPTUAL is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
hue.
If SATURATION is specified, the printer performs matching giving priority to color
intensity.
If COLORIMETRIC is specified, the printer performs matching so that the
difference in color of a logo, etc. between the original print data on screen and the
printed paper is minimized.
NOTE
If RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-95) is set to NONE, and if the printer receives a
device dependent color space definition that was color-processed by the host
computer, the setting for this item is not applied.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-97
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
If RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-95) or CMYK PROFILE (See p. 5-85) is set to
NONE, or if GRAY PROFILE (See p. 5-96) is set to OFF, the setting for this item is
ignored.
RGB PURE BLACK
ON*, OFF
Enables you to specify how black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G
to B should be processed when device dependent RGB data is converted into
device dependent CMYK data using "RGB Source Profile" of the printer.
If ON is specified, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is
printed using the black (Bk) toner only, regardless of the selected setting for
OUTPUT PROFILE.
If OFF is specified, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is
printed according to the selected setting for OUTPUT PROFILE.
IMPORTANT
If black or gray data is printed, and if unsmoothed gradation or graininess appears
on the printout results, specify OFF for this item and set OUTPUT PROFILE (See
p. 5-97) to NORMAL.
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
• In combination with certain settings, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of
R to G to B may be printed using the black (Bk) toner only, even if OFF is specified
for this item.
The following are examples.
- When PURE BLACK TEXT (See p. 5-98) is set to ON
- When RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-95) is set to NONE
- When OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97) is set to TR Normal or TR Photo
• If OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97) is set to NONE, the setting for this item is
ignored.
PURE BLACK TEXT
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing method for text in black (R=G=B=0%, C=M=Y=100%/
Bk=N%, or C=M=Y=0%/Bk=100%). Usually, it is recommended to leave this item
set to ON.
If ON is specified, you can print black color created by an application, using only
the black (Bk) toner. Since only the black (Bk) toner is used to print black text, the
color (CMY) toner will not be misaligned around the text.
Test
PURE BLACK TEXT: ON
5-98
SETUP Menu Settings
If OFF is specified, the black text is printed based on the selected setting for
OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97). Depending on the jobs to be printed, it may be
preferable to specify OFF for this item.
Test
PURE BLACK TEXT: OFF
BLACK OVERPRINT
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing method for when the printer prints black text over a color
background or graphics.
Test
BLACK OVERPRINT: ON
If OFF is specified, black text is printed without being overlaid on a color
background. The printer first prints the color background with the text areas
"knocked out" (no color is printed in the text areas). The text is then printed in the
knocked out area, filling in the areas not printed in color. However, this may result
in the black text appearing lighter compared to when ON is specified or the
phenomenon in which the outlines of the printed black text are rimmed with white.
Test
BLACK OVERPRINT: OFF
NOTE
• The setting for this item is applied only when PURE BLACK TEXT (See p. 5-98) is
set to ON and is effective only for black text (100 %).
• This item is displayed only when PURE BLACK TEXT is set to ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-99
5
Printing Environment Settings
If ON is specified, the printer prints black text over a color background. If this
option is used with PURE BLACK TEXT, the printer prints all the background first,
and then prints the text over the color background using only the black (Bk) toner.
This alleviates the phenomenon in which the outlines of the printed black text are
rimmed with white.
BRIGHTNESS
85 to 115 %; 100 %*
Adjusts the brightness of the whole image (in 5 % increments). The smaller the
specified value is, the brighter the color is, and the larger, the darker it is.
NOTE
If TONER SAVE (See p. 5-44) in the common SETUP menu is set to ON, this item
cannot be used.
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT ..............RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS ....GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
IMAGE............GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR
DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION
5
Printing Environment Settings
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) of
black-and-white data for each of the following parts in one document.
• Text parts
• Graphics parts such as graphics and graphs
• Image parts such as picture images
Setting Value
5-100
Contents
RESOLUTION
Prints precisely so that the outlines of text data
appear clearly. This setting is appropriate for
printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION
Prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline
quality combined. This setting is appropriate
for printing diagrams or graphs in which
gradation is used.
COLOR TONE
Prints with a stable texture and distinct
gradation, by enhancing the contrast of tone.
This setting is appropriate for printing image
data such as photographic images.
HIGH RESOL
Although prints in higher resolution than
RESOLUTION does, the stability of the texture
is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate
for printing a document so that the outlines of
text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
SETUP Menu Settings
Setting Value
ERR DIFFUSION
Contents
Uses an error diffusion method that gives
priority to printing fine lines or text. This setting
is appropriate for printing images with small
text or very fine lines.
COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT.............. RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.,
ERR DIFFUSION*1
GRAPHICS .... COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE ........... COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
*1 ERR DIFFUSION is displayed only when RESOLUTION is set to FINE.
• Text parts
• Graphics parts such as graphics and graphs
• Image parts such as picture images
Setting Value
Contents
RESOLUTION
Prints precisely so that the outlines of text data
appear clearly. This setting is appropriate for
printing data that contains text or thin lines.
GRADATION
Prints with a stable texture and color hue, and
a smooth gradation combined. This setting is
appropriate for printing image data such as
photographic images, because it reduces a
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors".
COLOR TONE
Although prints precisely with the
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors"
reduced than GRADATION does, the stability
of the texture is lower in quality. This setting is
appropriate for printing diagrams, graphs, etc.
HIGH RESOL
Although prints in higher resolution than
RESOLUTION does, the stability of the texture
is lower in quality. This setting is appropriate
for printing a document so that the outlines of
text, thin lines, or CAD appear clearly.
SETUP Menu Settings
5-101
5
Printing Environment Settings
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium gradation) for color data
for each of the following parts in one document.
Setting Value
ERR DIFFUSION
Contents
Uses an error diffusion method that gives
priority to printing fine lines or text. This setting
is appropriate for printing images with small
text or very fine lines.
CMYK OVERPRINT
OFF*, ON
You can overprint CMYK data in the composite output.
All colors used for data are overlaid and printed on one plate so you can check the
finishing result without separating the colors.
ON
Printing Environment Settings
5
Cyan
Magenta
OFF
Yellow
Black
NOTE
• This item does not apply overprinting to spot colors.
• This item is only available for data having the overprint attribute set.
5-102
SETUP Menu Settings
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST) .............SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS*1 ........................OFF*, ON
TEXT*1..................................ON*, OFF
*1 Displayed only when SMOOTHING (AST) is set to SMOOTH 1 or SMOOTH 2.
Specifies whether to use the smoothing process which can print the outlines of
graphics (illustrations created by an application) and text smoothly.
SMOOTH 2 performs a smoother process than SMOOTH 1. Even if data is not
printed smoothly by specifying SMOOTH 1, specify SMOOTH 2.
You can also select a target for the smoothing process by switching ON/OFF in
GRAPHICS and TEXT.
NOTE
The effect of the advanced smoothing process varies depending on the pattern of
text or graphics.
Printing Environment Settings
5
SETUP Menu Settings
5-103
UTILITY Menu Settings
NOTE
For the output samples of CONFIG.PAGE, NW STATUS PRINT, and PRNTPOSNPRINT,
see "The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode," on p. 8-2. For the output
sample of the PCL fonts list, PS fonts list, and PS configuration page, see "The Lists
Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode," on p. 8-5.
CONFIG.PAGE
Prints the capacity of the built-in memory (RAM) or the contents specified in the
SETUP menu. You can select this item regardless of the setting for the print mode.
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
CONFIG.PAGE is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load a sheet of A4 size
paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
PCL UTILITY
FONTS LIST
Prints information about the printer settings in the PCL mode.
FONTS LIST
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed.
NOTE
FONTS LIST is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load a sheet of A4 size
paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
5-104
UTILITY Menu Settings
PS UTILITY
CONFIG.PAGE, FONTS LIST
Prints information about the printer settings in the PS mode.
CONFIG.PAGE
Prints the content specified in the PS SETUP menu.
FONTS LIST
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode is printed.
NOTE
• Each list is to be printed on A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper in the paper
cassette or multi-purpose tray.
• This item is displayed when PS ROM or PS/Barcode ROM is installed.
NW STATUS PRINT
Prints the version number and the settings of the print server equipped with this
printer.
NOTE
NW STATUS PRINT is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load a sheet of A4
size paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
EXT. CARD LIST
Prints the version, settings, etc. of the expansion interface board installed in the
expansion slot of the printer.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when the interface board is installed.
UTILITY Menu Settings
5-105
Printing Environment Settings
5
E-MAIL UTILITY
RECEIVE E-MAILS, RX LOG LIST
This printer can receive and print e-mails. This item allows you to receive e-mails
manually as well as print the e-mail receive log list.
RECEIVE E-MAILS
Performs manual receiving of e-mails. If there are any e-mails addressed to the
printer in the server, the printer receives the e-mails and print the text and
attached files.
RX LOG LIST
Prints the e-mail receive log list.
Information such as "Subject" and "From" of the e-mails is printed in the e-mail
receive log list.
5
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
• For more details on e-mail print, see "E-mail Print (Only When the Hard Disk Is
Installed)," on p. 2-34.
• E-mail text is printed with its mail header information.
• You can also specify the setting to receive e-mails automatically and periodically.
(See "E-MAIL PRT SET," on p. 5-65)
• The settings to receive e-mails, such as the setting for POP3 server name, are to
be specified in the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
• The e-mail receive log list is to be printed on A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper in
the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON.
CALIBRATION
Calibration is a function that adjusts the color hue and phenomenon of
"Out-of-Register Colors" for each toner color in color printing.
Perform this operation when the printed colors are different compared to earlier
printing, or a phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors" occurs.
NOTE
Calibration takes approximately 50 seconds.
5-106
UTILITY Menu Settings
PRNTPOSNPRINT
The printing position adjusted in ADJ.START POS. (See p. 5-69) is printed. Check
the printout results to confirm the setting for ADJ.START POS.
NOTE
For adjusting the printing position, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 6-62.
PAGE COUNT LIST
The number of [Print Total]* is printed on a departmental basis.
* [Print Total] indicates the number of printed surfaces. If you perform 2-sided printing on a sheet of
paper, the number of the printed surfaces is two.
NOTE
Depending on the printer you are using, this item is not displayed.
TEST CHART 1
Print Test Chart 1 when checking if the poor print quality is due to any problem in
the drum cartridges.
NOTE
• Test Chart 1 is printed on 8 sheets of A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.
• For how to view Test Chart 1, see "Printing Test Chart 1," on p. 7-87.
UTILITY Menu Settings
5-107
Printing Environment Settings
5
TEST CHART 2
Print Test Chart 2 when checking if the poor print quality is due to any problem in
the fixing unit.
NOTE
• Test Chart 2 is printed on a sheet of A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.
• For how to view Test Chart 2, see "Printing Test Chart 2," on p. 7-89.
Printing Environment Settings
5
5-108
UTILITY Menu Settings
JOB Menu Settings
ENCRYPTED PRINT
Prints encrypted secured print data.
Encrypted secured print is different from secured print in that the data security is
reinforced on communication between the computer and printer and when the
data is saved on a hard disk.
Perform an encrypted secured print job using the following procedure.
NOTE
• For the character restriction for the password for an encrypted secured print, see
Online Help of the encrypted secured print driver.
You can display the Online Help from the encrypted secured print driver after
installing it.
• Only numbers can be entered from the control panel. Enter them using the
following keys.
- Increases/decreases number .............[ ] [ ]
- Moves digits .......................................[ ] [ ]
- Determines the entered password ......[OK]
• Depending on the version of the encrypted secured print driver, you can specify
alphabetic characters and marks for passwords. Print an encrypted secured print
job from the Remote UI if the password contains any alphabetic characters or
marks (See Remote UI Guide).
• Specify the file name, user name, and password in the printer driver.
• The encrypted secured print data is deleted automatically after being printed.
Alternatively, encrypted secured print data is deleted by turning the printer OFF or
performing a hard reset or soft reset.
JOB Menu Settings
5-109
5
Printing Environment Settings
1. Select ENCRYPTED PRINT in the JOB menu, then press [OK].
2. If the user names appear, select the target user name, then press [OK].
When the user of all the saved print jobs is the same (or when there is only one
job), the user name is not displayed. Proceed to Step 3.
3. If the file names appear, select the target file name, then press [OK].
When only one print job is saved, the file name is not displayed. Proceed to
Step 4.
4. Enter the password.
The specified file is printed.
• You can automatically delete the unprinted encrypted secured print data when a
fixed period of time has elapsed. Specify the setting for the time when the printer
delete data in SECURING TIME (See p. 5-26) in the CONTROL MENU options in
the SETUP menu.
• Up to 8 encrypted secured print jobs can be saved.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, HARD DISK is
set to ON, and there is any encrypted secured print job.
SECURED PRINT
Prints secured print data.
Secured print is a function that prints data with the file name, user name, and
password previously specified for the data on the computer using the printer's
control panel. Because you cannot print without specifying the file name, user
name, and password in this item, this function is convenient when you print data
that you do not want others to read.
5
Printing Environment Settings
Perform a secured print job using the following procedure.
1. Select SECURED PRINT in the JOB menu, then press [OK].
2. If the user names appear, select the target user name, then press [OK].
When the user of all the saved print jobs is the same (or when there is only one
job), the user name is not displayed. Proceed to Step 3.
3. If the file names appear, select the target file name, then press [OK].
When only one print job is saved, the file name is not displayed. Proceed to
Step 4.
4. Enter the password.
The specified file is printed.
NOTE
• The password is to be specified only with numbers of 1 to 7 digits. Enter the
password using the following keys on the control panel.
- Increases/decreases number ............ [ ] [ ]
- Moves digits ....................................... [ ] [ ]
- Determines the entered password ...... [OK]
• Specify the file name, user name, and password in the printer driver.
• The secured print data is deleted automatically after being printed. Alternatively,
the encrypted secured print data is deleted by turning the printer OFF or
performing a hard reset or soft reset.
• You can automatically delete the unprinted secured print data when a fixed period
of time has elapsed. Specify the setting for the time when the printer delete data in
SECURING TIME (See p. 5-26) in the CONTROL MENU options in the SETUP
menu.
• Up to 8 secured print jobs can be saved.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, HARD DISK is
set to ON, and there is any secured print job.
5-110
JOB Menu Settings
STOREJOB LIST
Prints a list of the jobs stored in a box (the jobs saved on the hard disk).
The store job list prints the box name, box number, file name, and others.
NOTE
• If a password is specified for the box, the jobs in the box are not printed on the
store job list.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, HARD DISK is
set to ON, and there is any saved job.
STOREJOB PRINT
Prints a job stored in a box.
Perform a store job print using the following procedure.
1. Select STOREJOB PRINT in the JOB menu, then press [OK].
2. The box numbers are displayed. Select the number for the box in which the job
is stored, then press [OK].
3. If <PASSWORD> appears in the display, press [OK], and then enter the
password.
If a password is not specified only for the box, the entry screen for entering a
password does not appear. Proceed to Step 4.
4. Select the name of the target file, then press [OK].
The specified file is printed.
NOTE
• The password is to be specified only with numbers of 1 to 7 digits. Enter the
password using the following keys on the control panel.
- Increases/decreases number .............[ ] [ ]
- Moves digits .......................................[ ] [ ]
- Determines the entered password ......[OK]
• The saved jobs remains in the hard disk even after being printed. When you want to
delete the saved jobs, use the Remote UI. (See Remote UI Guide)
• Up to the total of 100 jobs in all the boxes can be saved.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, HARD DISK is
set to ON, and there is any saved job.
JOB Menu Settings
5-111
5
Printing Environment Settings
To store a job in a box, select [Store] in the printer driver, and then specify the box.
Because the jobs in a box are not deleted even after turning the printer OFF, it is
convenient if you store the documents that you want to print repeatedly in a box.
JOB LOG LIST
Prints the job logs printed from the computer.
File names, print dates, and other information are printed on the job log list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 60 jobs when an optional hard disk installed and up to 48 jobs without the
hard disk can be printed in the job log list.
• This item is displayed only when it is specified, in the [Job Log Display] page in the
Remote UI, so that job logs are to be displayed.
STORE LOG LST
5
Prints the job logs printed from a box.
Printing Environment Settings
-
File names, print dates, and other information are printed on the store log list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 60 job logs are printed on the stored log list.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON.
REPORTLOG LST
Prints the job logs of the printed CONFIG.PAGE or NW STATUS PRINT.
Print dates, etc are printed on the report log list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 60 jobs when an optional hard disk installed and up to 16 jobs without the
hard disk can be printed in the report log list.
5-112
JOB Menu Settings
E-MAIL PRT LOG
Prints e-mail print logs.
File names, print dates, and other information are printed on the e-mail print log
list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 60 job logs are printed on the e-mail print log list.
• This item is displayed only when an optional hard disk is installed, and HARD DISK
is set to ON.
Printing Environment Settings
5
JOB Menu Settings
5-113
RESET Menu Settings
SOFT RESET/HARD RESET
Resets the printer when a problem has occurred or you want to cancel printing.
If you perform a soft reset, the printer stops the current process and deletes the
jobs in the printer memory, received print data, and the job being processed. If
you perform a hard reset, the printer cancels all the process and deletes the jobs.
To perform a soft reset, select SOFT RESET in the RESET menu, and then press
[OK].
To perform a hard reset, select SOFT RESET in the RESET menu, hold down
[OK] for 3 seconds or more to display HARD RESET, and then release the button.
Printing Environment Settings
5
NOTE
• Be sure to cancel printing from the computer before performing a soft reset.
• When the soft reset or hard reset is performed, the data being printed and the data
being received by all the interfaces is deleted. Therefore, perform printing from the
computer again as needed.
• If you perform a soft reset or hard reset, the data that has been already sent to the
memory are all deleted even if it is the data of other interface. If you are using the
printer on a network, be careful so that this operation does not affect the data from
other computers when resetting the printer.
• If you perform a hard reset while the printer is receiving data, the data that has not
yet been sent to the memory will be sent after the reset. However, the data may not
be printed properly.
FORM FEED
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the
data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed
properly. As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot print the next job
because the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to
output the print data using the procedure for this item.
5-114
RESET Menu Settings
IMPORTANT
• Data from PCL/PS/UFR II Printer Driver cannot be output.
• If you have output data, the data being printed is deleted. Print the data from the
computer again.
• When you are using an optional hard disk, set MODE TIMEOUT in the SETUP
menu to a setting other than OFF. It is recommended that you should specify the
default setting, 15 seconds if possible.
NOTE
• The Job indicator is on when any print data remains in the printer memory or when
no print data remains in the printer but a job has not yet been completed.
• If MODE TIMEOUT for a job is specified, data less than one page is also output
automatically when the specified time has elapsed (Data from PCL/PS/UFR II
Printer Driver is not output.). MODE TIMEOUT for a job is set to 15 seconds in the
default settings.
• If the Job indicator does not go off even after outputting the data, perform a soft
reset. (See the previous item)
Shuts down the functions of the hard disk.
If a hard disk is installed, the printer may be turned OFF during access to the hard
disk when you turn the printer OFF. To prevent this accident, shut down the
functions of the hard disk before turning the printer OFF.
If you select SHUT DOWN in the RESET menu, the message that asks you if you
execute a shut down appears. Pressing [OK] at this point executes the shut down.
After executing a shut down, the printer cannot receive data, and panel operation
is disabled. Cycle the power of the printer if you want to print the data again.
IMPORTANT
If you perform a shutdown when any job of which you stopped the operation or of
secured print is in the hard disk, the message <CANNOT EXECUTE> is displayed.
If you want to execute a shutdown, perform a soft reset to delete the job, and then
perform a shutdown again.
If you do not want to execute a shutdown, press [Online].
NOTE
• You can also execute a shutdown by holding down the control panel power switch
(sub power supply) on the printer's control panel for 4 seconds or more.
• Even if you are not using a hard disk, it is recommended that you shut down the
printer using the following procedure when you want to turn the printer OFF. If you
are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned OFF.
RESET Menu Settings
5-115
Printing Environment Settings
5
SHUT DOWN
CHANGE TONER
K TONER, C TONER, M TONER, Y TONER
If you replaced a toner cartridge when the message <1G CHG."color" TNR> was
not being displayed, reset the counter in this item.
After K TONER, C TONER, M TONER, or Y TONER is selected, a confirmation
message <OK?> is displayed. Pressing [OK] at this point starts the initialization.
The printer does not initialize the counter if you press [Online] without pressing
[OK].
IMPORTANT
• Perform this operation only after replacing a toner cartridge. If you reset the
counter without replacing a toner cartridge, the counter does not operate properly,
resulting in damage to the printer.
• If you replaced a toner cartridge when the message <1G CHG."color" TNR> was
being displayed, you do not need to initialize the counter in this item because the
printer initializes the counter automatically.
Printing Environment Settings
5
5-116
RESET Menu Settings
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
PAPER SOURCE
AUTO*, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2*1, CASSETTE 3*1, CASSETTE 4*1,TRAY
*1 CASSETTE 2, CASSETTE 3, and CASSETTE 4 are displayed only when the optional paper feeders
are installed.
Selects the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray from which the printer feed
paper. After a paper source is selected, the corresponding Paper Source indicator
comes on.
Multi-purpose tray
Cassette 2*
Cassette 3*
Cassette 4*
*Optional
NOTE
• If AUTO is specified, you can specify the paper source to be automatically
selected. (See "AUTO SELECTION," on p. 5-33)
• If paper of the same size is loaded in two or more paper sources when the paper
source setting is specified to be selected automatically, paper is fed from the upper
paper source regardless of the status of the paper source indicators. When the
paper source runs out of paper, the paper source automatically switches to other
one in which paper of the same size is loaded.
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See p. 5-32) is set to ON, the setting for this item is ignored,
and the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper that is the
same size as the paper size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper
source.
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305 x 457 mm, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM
SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL,
ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
You can specify the same setting in TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "TRAY PAPER SIZE," on p.
5-29.
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
5-117
Printing Environment Settings
5
Cassette 1
CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4)
CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassettes (Cassette 2 to
Cassette 4) of the paper feeders.
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the
FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see
"CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4)," on p. 5-30.
TRAY PAPER TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY
PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
You can specify the same setting in TRAY PAPER TYPE in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "TRAY PAPER TYPE," on p.
5-34.
Printing Environment Settings
5
CASSETTE1 TYPE
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in Cassette 1.
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE1 TYPE in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "CASSETTE1 TYPE," on p.
5-35.
CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4)
MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
Specifies the type of the paper to be loaded in Cassette N (N = 2, 3, 4).
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4) in the
FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see
"CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4)," on p. 5-36.
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper.
You can specify the same setting in 2-SIDED PRINT. in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "2-SIDED PRINT.," on p. 5-38.
5-118
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
Routine Maintenance
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the printer such as replacing the
cartridges and cleaning the printer.
Replacing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
When <PREP."color" TNR>/<CHG."color" TNR> Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Precautions on Replacing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Replacing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Resetting the Counter of a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Storing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Replacing Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
When <PREP."color" DRM>/<CHG."color" DRUM> Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Precautions on Replacing a Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Replacing a Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Precautions for Handling Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Storing Drum Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
When the Message <PREP.FIX.UNIT> Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Precautions on Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Replacing the Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Resetting the Counter of the Fixing Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
When the Message <PRE.WST.T.CTN>/<CHG.WST.T.CTN> Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Precautions on Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Replacing the Waste Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Moving the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Handling the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6-1
Replacing Toner Cartridges
This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and
precautions on storing them.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to obtain replacement toner cartridges.
When <PREP."color" TNR>/<CHG."color" TNR> Appears
Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running out during
printing, a message appears in the display.
Message
When it is Displayed
Contents and Remedies
- You can continue to print.
- Have ready a new toner cartridge of the
When a toner
indicated color.
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) cartridge needs to be
- It is recommended that you replace the
replaced soon
toner cartridge before printing a large
amount of data.
16 PREP.X TNR
Routine Maintenance
6
- The printer stops printing.
- Pressing [Online] continues the job.
- Have ready a new toner cartridge of the
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) When a toner
indicated color.
cartridge needs to be
- It is recommended that you replace the
replaced soon
toner cartridge before printing a large
amount of data.
16 CHG.X TNR
- When <1G CHG.K TNR> appears, the
printer stops printing, and you cannot
continue the job.
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) When a toner
- When <1G CHG.X TNR> (X = Y, M, C)
cartridge has reached
appears, you can print only in black and
the end of its life.
white.
- Replace the toner cartridge of the
indicated color with a new one.
1G CHG.X TNR
* Whether <16 PREP."color" TNR> or <16 CHG."color" TNR> appears when lifetime of a toner cartridge has reached
depends on the setting for WARNING STEP (See p. 5-20) in the SETUP menu. The printer is set to display <16
PREP."color" TNR> in the default settings.
* "K", "Y", "C", and "M" in a message indicate Black, Yellow, Cyan, and Magenta respectively.
6-2
Replacing Toner Cartridges
IMPORTANT
If you replaced a toner cartridge when <1G CHG."color" TNR> was not being displayed,
be sure to reset the counter of the toner cartridge (See p. 6-10).
NOTE
The lifetime of the toner cartridges (Canon Genuine Cartridges) used in this printer are
as follows. The numbers of the pages are estimated when printing in the following
conditions.
Printing ratio: 5 %; Print density: the default; Paper size: A4; Paper type: plain paper
The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of documents printed. If
your average document contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner
cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner.
- Black: Approx. 10,000 pages
- Yellow: Approx. 6,000 pages
- Magenta: Approx. 6,000 pages
- Cyan: Approx. 6,000 pages
Precautions on Replacing a Toner Cartridge
WARNING
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
• Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.
• Be sure to use only the toner cartridges designed for this printer.
NOTE
• For details on handling toner cartridges, see "Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges,"
on p. 6-12.
• The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-3
Routine Maintenance
6
Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
Replacing a Toner Cartridge
If any of the following messages appears, replace the toner cartridge of the
indicated color with a new one.
• <1G
CHG.K TNR>...Replace the black toner cartridge.
• <1G CHG.Y TNR>...Replace the yellow toner cartridge.
• <1G CHG.M TNR>...Replace the magenta toner cartridge.
• <1G
CHG.C TNR>...Replace the cyan toner cartridge.
1
Open the toner cover.
Routine Maintenance
6
6-4
Replacing Toner Cartridges
IMPORTANT
The toner cartridges are installed from the bottom in order of Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan, and Black.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
Tilt the lock release lever (A) of the toner cartridge to be
replaced to the position of " " to lock the toner cartridge.
6
Routine Maintenance
2
(A)
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-5
Align the circle mark on the lock release lever with that on the toner cartridge.
Top View
Align at this part
3
Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
If the toner cartridge cannot be removed, check if the circle mark on the lock
release lever is aligned with that on the toner cartridge. If you try to remove the
toner cartridge forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer.
6-6
Replacing Toner Cartridges
4
Take the toner cartridge out of the box, and then take it out of
the protective bag.
While holding the center portion on the top of the protective pack, open it to left
and right.
5
Hold the toner cartridge so that the tab (A) is at the bottom,
and then shake it up and down 10 times each as shown in the
figure to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.
(A)
IMPORTANT
If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality. Be
sure to carry out this procedure properly.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-7
6
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Keep the protective pack for the toner cartridge. It may be required after taking out
the toner cartridge for printer maintenance.
6
While holding the tab, insert the toner cartridge into the
printer a, and then push it gently until it stops b as shown in
the figures.
a
6
Routine Maintenance
b
Insert the toner cartridge so that the orientation of the character on the toner
cartridge and that on the toner cover match.
Top View
Match the orientation
of the characters.
6-8
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Tilt the lock release lever (A) to the position of " " to lock the
toner cartridge.
(A)
Align the triangular mark on the lock release lever with that on the toner
cartridge.
6
Top View
Routine Maintenance
7
Align at this part
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-9
8
Close the toner cover.
IMPORTANT
• If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridges are installed
properly. If you try to close the toner cover forcefully, this may result in damage to
the printer or toner cartridges.
• Do not leave the toner cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.
Routine Maintenance
6
NOTE
The message <1G CHG."color" TNR> takes several seconds to disappear after the
toner cartridge is installed. If the message <1G CHG."color" TNR> does not
disappear, remove the replaced toner cartridge, hold the toner cartridge so that its
tab is at the bottom, shake the cartridge up and down forcefully again to evenly
distribute the toner inside the cartridge, and then install the toner cartridge.
If you replaced a toner cartridge when <1G CHG."color" TNR> was not being displayed,
reset the counter using the procedure "Resetting the Counter of a Toner Cartridge" (p.
6-10).
Resetting the Counter of a Toner Cartridge
If you replaced a toner cartridge when <1G CHG."color" TNR> was not being
displayed, reset the counter using the following procedure. If you do not reset the
counter, lifetime of the toner cartridge cannot be detected properly.
IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure only after you replaced a toner cartridge when <1G CHG."color"
TNR> was not being displayed.
6-10
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Reset
1
Press [Reset].
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
Utility
2
Select CHANGE TONER using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
CHANGE TONER
→
K TONER
→
The color of the toner cartridge is displayed.
3
Settings
Select the toner cartridge of which you want to reset the
counter using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
K TONER
OK
6
→
Routine Maintenance
Utility
OK?
A confirmation message is displayed.
OK
4
Press [OK].
The printer does not initialize the counter if you press [Online] without pressing
[OK].
CHANGING K TONER
DONE
NOTE
If the message <1G CHG."color" TNR> appears after resetting the counter of the
toner cartridge, remove the replaced toner cartridge, hold the toner cartridge so
that its tab is at the bottom, shake the cartridge up and down forcefully again to
evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge, and then install the toner cartridge.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-11
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges
A toner cartridge consists of intricate mechanical components. Handling the toner
cartridge without due care may lead to damage to the toner cartridge or
deterioration in print quality. Be careful of the following points when removing or
installing the toner cartridge.
WARNING
Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
• When you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer, place the
toner cartridge into the original protective pack, or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.
• When replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to replace the toner cartridge of the same
color.
• When handling a toner cartridge, hold the tabs (A) as shown in the figure.
Routine Maintenance
6
(A)
(A)
6-12
Replacing Toner Cartridges
• Do not hold the lock release lever (B) or shutter (C) of the toner cartridge as shown in the
figure. Be careful not to hold or touch areas that are not specified in this procedure. This
may result in damage to the cartridge.
(B)
(C)
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the toner cartridge.
• Condensation may form in and on a toner cartridge if it is brought into an environment
6
Routine Maintenance
that exposes it to sudden changes in temperature and/or humidity. If you move the toner
cartridge to a location that is warmer or has higher humidity, leave the cartridge in the
new location for 2 hours or longer without opening the protective pack to allow it to adjust
to the new temperature.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
6-13
Storing Toner Cartridges
Be careful of the following points when storing a new toner cartridge or handling a
toner cartridge that has been taken out of the printer for maintenance or moving the
printer.
IMPORTANT
• Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective pack until it is ready to be used.
• When you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer or other
purposes, place the toner cartridge into the original protective pack or wrap it with a thick
cloth immediately, and store it in the following conditions.
Routine Maintenance
6
• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not store cartridges in a hot or humid place, or a place where the temperature and
humidity can change significantly.
Storing environment temperature: 0 to 35 °C (32 to 95 °F)
Storing humidity range: 35 to 85 % RH (no condensation)
• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place where corrosive gases, such as ammonia, are
generated, or where a considerable amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there
is a lot of dust.
• Keep the toner cartridge out of the reach of small children.
■ Condensation
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may develop both inside and
outside of the toner cartridge due to the difference in temperature. The development of
water droplets is called condensation. Condensation will adversely affect the quality of the
toner cartridge.
6-14
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Replacing Drum Cartridges
This section describes how to replace or handle the drum cartridges and
precautions on storing them.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to obtain replacement drum cartridges.
When <PREP."color" DRM>/<CHG."color" DRUM> Appears
Drum cartridges are consumable products. When any drum cartridge is nearing the
end of its life, any of the following messages appears in the display. Follow the
directions in the message.
When it is Displayed
Contents and Remedies
- You can continue to print.
- Have ready a new drum cartridge of the
When a drum
indicated color.
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) cartridge needs to be
- It is recommended that you replace the
replaced soon
drum cartridge before printing a large
amount of data.
E0 PREP.X DRM
EF CHG.X DRUM
The drum cartridge
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) has reached the end
of its life.
98 CHG.X DRUM
When the drum
cartridge cannot be
(X indicates K, Y, M, or C) used.
- The printer stops printing.
- You can continue to print by pressing
[Online], however, this may result in
deterioration in print quality.
- Replace the drum cartridge of the
indicated color with a new one.
- The printer stops printing, and you
cannot continue the job.
- Replace the drum cartridge of the
indicated color with a new one.
* "K", "Y", "C", and "M" in a message indicate each Black, Yellow, Cyan, and Magenta drum cartridge respectively.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-15
6
Routine Maintenance
Message
NOTE
• The lifetime of the drum cartridges (Canon Genuine Drum Cartridges) used by this
printer is as follows.
The numbers of the pages are estimated when printing in the following conditions.
Paper size: A4; Paper type: Plain paper; Printing ratio: 5 %; Print density: the default;
Continuous/1-sided Printing
- Black: Approx. 50,000 pages
- Yellow: Approx. 50,000 pages
- Magenta: Approx. 50,000 pages
- Cyan: Approx. 50,000 pages
• When printing at interval of 2 sheets (2-sheet intermittent printing), the lifetime of the
drum cartridges (Canon Genuine Drum Cartridges) for this printer is approximately
45,000 pages for the black toner and approximately 40,000 pages for each color toner.
These values are the number of pages that you can print when performing only color
printing.
Even when printing in black and white, each of the color drum cartridges is consumed.
Therefore, when printing in black and white a lot, the lifetime of each of the color drum
cartridges may be half the number of pages you can print.
• Depending on the printing preferences or printing environment such as the intermit
printing, paper type, paper size, and 1-sided / 2-sided printing, the number of pages you
can print may be half the number.
Routine Maintenance
6
Precautions on Replacing a Drum Cartridge
WARNING
• Do not throw a used drum cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• The drum cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac
pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the drum cartridge
and consult your physician immediately.
CAUTION
• Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
6-16
Replacing Drum Cartridges
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Do not
touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
(A)
(A)
• A drum cartridge comes in a protective bag. Do not take the drum cartridge out of the
protective bag until the drum cartridge is ready to be set.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-17
6
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to use a drum cartridge designed for this printer.
• Do not install a used drum cartridge in the printer again. This may result in the life time of
the drum cartridge not being detected properly, or damage to the cartridge.
• When handling a drum cartridge, hold the blue tabs (A) properly as shown in the figure.
Do not place it vertically or upside-down.
• When removing or installing the drum cartridges, work from the left side of the printer as
shown in the figure.
• Be sure not to touch the high-voltage contacts (A) shown in the following figures, as this
may result in damage to the printer.
- Right side of the ITB unit; Inside of the printer
Routine Maintenance
6
(A)
6-18
Replacing Drum Cartridges
- Drum cartridge guides
(A)
• Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-19
6
Routine Maintenance
NOTE
• For details on handling drum cartridges, see "Precautions for Handling Drum
Cartridges," on p. 6-40.
• The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
Replacing a Drum Cartridge
Removing the Drum Cartridge to Be Replaced
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
2
Open the front cover.
Routine Maintenance
6
While pressing the lever on the right side of the front cover, open the front cover
toward you.
6-20
Replacing Drum Cartridges
IMPORTANT
Before opening the front cover, make sure that the multi-purpose tray and the
paper cassette of the printer are closed.
Tilt the fixing unit toward you.
While pressing the green lock release buttons (A) on the left and right side of the
fixing unit a, hold the tabs (B) and tilt the fixing unit toward you b as shown in
the figure.
(A)
a
a
6
(B)
Routine Maintenance
3
b
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-21
4
Open the top cover.
Press the blue lock release button of the top cover.
While holding the lever of the top cover, open the top cover.
Routine Maintenance
6
6-22
Replacing Drum Cartridges
IMPORTANT
• Do not touch the transfer belt of the ITB unit and the ITB unit cover. If the transfer
belt is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. If the
print quality deteriorates due to the transfer belt of the ITB unit being touched, see
"Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit" (p. 6-60) and clean the transfer belt of
the ITB unit. The transfer belt of the ITB unit is supplied with a function that cleans
itself, therefore, you do not need to clean the belt even when toner is on it.
Do not touch these parts.
6
• The drum cartridges are installed from the bottom in order of Yellow, Magenta,
Routine Maintenance
Cyan, and Black.
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-23
5
Slide the blue lock release lever (A) of the drum cartridge to
be replaced to the position of " " to release the lock of the
drum cartridge.
Slide the lock release lever until the triangular mark on the lock release lever
aligns with the triangular mark on the label.
(A)
Align the triangular marks.
Routine Maintenance
6
6
Remove the drum cartridge.
Remove the drum cartridge by holding the blue tab (A) as shown in the figure.
(A)
(A)
6-24
Replacing Drum Cartridges
Installing a New Drum Cartridge
1
Take the new drum cartridge out of the box.
2
Take the drum cartridge out of the protective bag.
IMPORTANT
Keep the protective bag for the drum cartridge. It may be required after taking out
the drum cartridge for printer maintenance.
3
There are two types of replacement drum cartridges.
Since the procedure varies depending on the packing
condition, check the condition.
● If a packing material is provided in
the following area
● If tape is provided in the following area
Routine Maintenance
6
Tape is provided.
A packing material is provided.
a Remove the caution sheet from the drum
cartridge, and read the contents
thoroughly.
After removing the tape a, remove the sheet b.
b
a
a Remove the caution sheet from the drum
cartridge, and read the contents
thoroughly.
After removing the tape a, remove the sheet b.
b
Replacing Drum Cartridges
a
6-25
Continuation of "If a packing material is
provided"
Continuation of "If tape is provided"
b Remove the drying agent attached with
b Remove the drying agent attached with
tape (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a, and then remove the drying
agent b.
tape (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a, and then remove the drying
agent b.
a
a
b
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the removed drying agent
according to local regulations.
c Turn over the drum cartridge in the
6
Routine Maintenance
direction of the arrow gently.
b
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the removed drying agent
according to local regulations.
c Remove the packing material attached with
tape (A) (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a and packing material at the
same time. If the packing material cannot be
removed, tilt the packing material b, and then
remove it c.
a
b
(A)
6-26
Replacing Drum Cartridges
c
Continuation of "If a packing material is
provided"
Continuation of "If tape is provided"
d Remove the packing materials (2 pieces)
d Remove the packing material attached with
on the both sides.
• Left side
tape (B) (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a and packing material at the
Remove the tape (1 piece) shown in the figure
a.
same time. If the packing material cannot be
removed, tilt the packing material b, and then
remove it c.
a
b
a
While pinching the tabs of the packing material
b, remove it diagonally upward c.
(B)
b
Routine Maintenance
6
c
c
• Right side
While pinching the tabs of the packing material
a, remove it diagonally upward b.
a
b
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the packing materials
according to local regulations.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-27
Continuation of "If a packing material is
provided"
Continuation of "If tape is provided"
e Turn the drum cartridge over gently to the
e Remove the packing material attached with
original side.
tape (C) (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a, and then pull the packing
material out b.
a
(C)
b
f
Remove the packing material attached with
tape (A) (1 piece) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape a, and then pull the packing
material out b.
f
Remove the tape (1 piece) and tags (2
pieces) shown in the figure.
Remove the tape gently while supporting the blue
shutter with a hand.
Routine Maintenance
6
(A)
a
b
Remove the tape while
supporting this part with a
hand.
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the packing materials
according to local regulations.
6-28
Replacing Drum Cartridges
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the packing materials
according to local regulations.
Continuation of "If a packing material is
provided"
Continuation of "If tape is provided"
g Remove the tape (1 piece) shown in the
g Remove the tape (3 pieces) shown in the
figure in order of a and b.
figure.
Remove this tape also.
a
b
h Proceed to Step 4.
Hold the blue tabs (A) of the drum cartridge and shake it up
and down 10 to 12 times each as shown in the figure to evenly
distribute the developer inside the cartridge.
Hold the blue tabs of the drum cartridge.
(A)
(A)
Shake the drum cartridge up and down 10 to 12 times each as shown in the
figure.
IMPORTANT
If the developer is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print
quality. Be sure to carry out this procedure properly.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6
Routine Maintenance
4
h Proceed to Step 4.
6-29
5
Place paper on a flat surface, place the drum cartridge on it,
and then fold back the tab (A) of the sealing tape as shown in
the figure.
(A)
IMPORTANT
• When placing the drum cartridge, be sure to place paper under the drum cartridge
to prevent a desk or others from being damaged by the bottom of the drum
cartridge.
• When pulling the sealing tape out, do not hold the area near the mouth of the
sealing tape with your hand. If the tape is severed, it may become difficult to pull
out completely.
Routine Maintenance
6
Do not hold this part
with your hand.
• When pulling the sealing tape out, be careful not to hold the drum protective shutter
(A) with your hands.
(A)
6-30
Replacing Drum Cartridges
Pull the sealing tape (approx. 70 cm long) out gently and
horizontally while supporting the drum cartridge.
When pulling the sealing tape out, you may feel it to be heavy.
However, because this is not printer malfunction, pull the
sealing tape out completely.
Support this part with your hand.
6
IMPORTANT
• If it is difficult to pull the sealing tape out by the tab, hold the tape and pull it out as
shown in the figure. However, your hands may become dirty as toner is on the
sealing tape.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-31
Routine Maintenance
6
• Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upwards, or downwards. If the tape is
severed, it may become difficult to pull out completely.
• Pull out the sealing tape completely from the drum cartridge. If any tape remains in
the drum cartridge, this may result in poor print quality.
• Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
7
Before installing the drum cartridge, align the triangular mark
on the lock release lever (A) with the triangular mark of " "
on the label as shown in the figure.
Routine Maintenance
6
(A)
Align the triangular
marks.
When installing the drum cartridge, hold the blue tabs as shown in the figure.
6-32
Replacing Drum Cartridges
Make sure that the levers (A) near the drum cartridge guides
on the both sides are in the proper position as shown in the
figure.
(A)
(A)
6
If the levers are not in the proper position, the drum cartridges cannot be
installed. Raise the levers to the proper position as shown in the figure.
- Incorrect position
Routine Maintenance
8
- Correct position
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-33
9
Install the drum cartridge in the printer.
Insert the drum cartridge firmly until it touches the back of the printer.
Insert the projections (A) on each side of the drum cartridge into the drum
cartridge guides as shown in the figure.
- Drum cartridge guides (left)
Yellow
6
Routine Maintenance
Magenta
Cyan
Black
(A)
- Drum cartridge guides (right)
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
(A)
IMPORTANT
Insert the drum cartridges firmly until they touch the back of the printer. If the drum
cartridges are not installed firmly, this may result in poor print quality.
6-34
Replacing Drum Cartridges
10 Make sure that the levers near the drum cartridge guides on
the both sides are in the proper position as shown in the
figure.
11 Make sure that the labels on the projections of the drum
cartridge are visible.
Routine Maintenance
6
Make sure that all of the three colors
on the label are visible.
If you cannot see any of the three colors on the label from the front, take out the
drum cartridge once, turn the projection (A) in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks and stops, and then reinstall the cartridge.
(A)
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-35
12 Slide the blue lock release lever (A) to the position of "
" to
lock the drum cartridge.
Slide the lock release lever until the triangular mark on the lock release lever
aligns with the triangular mark on the label.
(A)
Align the triangular
marks.
6
Routine Maintenance
13 Close the top cover.
Close the top cover of the printer while holding it by the lever (A) gently.
If you close the top cover forcefully, the ITB unit cover (B) may not move back to
the original position, and this may result in damage to the printer.
(B)
(A)
6-36
Replacing Drum Cartridges
By pressing the portion indicated "PUSH", close the top cover firmly until it
cannot be pressed down any further as shown in the figure.
14 By holding the lever as shown in the figure, make sure that
the top cover does not open.
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
Close the top cover firmly until it cannot be pressed down any further. If the top
cover is not closed firmly, this may result in poor print quality.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-37
15 While holding the tabs (A), move the fixing unit back to its
original position a, and then press the tabs on the both sides
as shown in the figure b.
(A)
a
6
Routine Maintenance
b
6-38
Replacing Drum Cartridges
b
16 Close the front cover.
While supporting the front cover a, push and close the front cover with both
hands as shown in the figure b.
a
6
Routine Maintenance
b
CAUTION
Push the front portion of the front cover to close it as shown in the figure.
If closing the front cover by the levers on the both sides, you may catch
your fingers, resulting in personal injury.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-39
Precautions for Handling Drum Cartridges
A drum cartridge consists of light-sensitive components and intricate mechanical
components. Handling the drum cartridge without due care may lead to damage to
the drum cartridge or deterioration in print quality. Be careful of the following points
when removing or installing the drum cartridge.
WARNING
• Do not throw a used drum cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• The drum cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac
pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the drum cartridge
and consult your physician immediately.
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
6
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the photosensitive drum inside the
drum cartridge. Be sure not to touch or open the drum protective shutter (A). Be careful
not to hold or touch areas that are not specified in this procedure, such as the electrical
contacts (B). This may result in damage to the cartridge.
(A)
(B)
• Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light.
• Keep the drum cartridge away from products that generate magnetic waves, such as a
display or computer.
• A drum cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the drum cartridges away from products
that may be damaged by magnetic waves, such as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may
lead to damage to data.
• When you take the drum cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer, place the
drum cartridge into the original protective bag immediately.
6-40
Replacing Drum Cartridges
• When handling a drum cartridge, hold the blue tabs (A) properly as shown in the figure.
Do not place it vertically or upside-down.
(A)
(A)
• When handling a drum cartridge, make sure that the blue lock release lever (A) is at the
position of "
".
(A)
Routine Maintenance
6
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the drum cartridge.
• Condensation may form in and on a drum cartridge if it is brought into an environment
that exposes it to sudden changes in temperature and/or humidity. If you move the drum
cartridge to a location that is warmer or has higher humidity, leave the cartridge in the
new location for 2 hours or longer without opening the protective bag to allow it to adjust
to the new temperature.
Replacing Drum Cartridges
6-41
Storing Drum Cartridges
Be careful of the following points when storing a new drum cartridge or handling a
drum cartridge that has been taken out of the printer for maintenance or moving the
printer.
IMPORTANT
• Do not take a new drum cartridge out of the protective bag until it is ready to be used.
• When you take the drum cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer or other
purposes, place the drum cartridge into the original protective bag, or wrap it with a thick
cloth immediately.
• Do not store the drum cartridge in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not store cartridges in a hot or humid place, or a place where the temperature and
humidity can change significantly.
Storing environment temperature: 0 to 35 °C (32 to 95 °F)
Storing humidity range: 35 to 85 % RH (no condensation)
• Do not store the drum cartridge in a place where corrosive gases, such as ammonia, are
generated, or where a considerable amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there
is a lot of dust.
• Keep the drum cartridge out of the reach of small children.
6
Routine Maintenance
■ Condensation
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may develop both inside and
outside of the drum cartridge due to the difference in temperature. The development of
water droplets is called condensation. Condensation will adversely affect the quality of the
drum cartridge.
6-42
Replacing Drum Cartridges
Replacing the Fixing Unit
This section describes how to replace the fixing unit.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to obtain replacement fixing unit.
When the Message <PREP.FIX.UNIT> Appears
When the counter of the fixing unit reaches the stipulated value, the message <E5
PREP.FIX.UNIT> appears. You can continue printing, however, the print quality will
deteriorate. When <E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT> appears and the print quality deteriorates,
it is recommended that you replace the fixing unit with a new one. Although the
fixing unit is a periodical replacement part, you can replace it as needed.
NOTE
The lifetime of the fixing unit (Canon Genuine Fixing Unit) designed for this printer is
approximately 150,000 pages when performing 1-sided printing on A4 size paper.
Precautions on Replacing the Fixing Unit
WARNING
There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6-43
Routine Maintenance
6
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make
sure the fixing unit is completely cool before replacing it. Touching the fixing
unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
• The fixing unit weighs approximately 2.9 kg. When carrying the fixing unit, hold
the tabs on both sides with both hands securely. If you drop the fixing unit on
your feet, this may result in personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
• Reset the counter after replacing the fixing unit.
- "Resetting the Counter of the Fixing Unit" (See p. 6-52)
• Be careful not to hold or touch areas that are not specified in this procedure, such as the
roller in the fixing unit.
This may result in deterioration in print quality or damage to the fixing unit.
• Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.
NOTE
The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
6-44
Replacing the Fixing Unit
Replacing the Fixing Unit
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
2
Open the front cover.
While pressing the lever on the right side of the front cover, open the front cover
toward you.
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6-45
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
Before opening the front cover, make sure that the multi-purpose tray and the
paper cassette of the printer are closed.
3
Tilt the fixing unit toward you.
While pressing the green lock release buttons (A) on the left and right side of the
fixing unit a, hold the tabs (B) and tilt the fixing unit toward you b as shown in
the figure.
(A)
a
a
6
Routine Maintenance
(B)
b
4
6-46
Tilt the lock release levers located on both sides of the back
of the fixing unit in the direction of the arrows to release the
lock.
Replacing the Fixing Unit
5
Hook your fingers into the tabs on both sides of the fixing unit
a, tilt them backward a little , and then remove the fixing unit
b.
a
a
b
Take the new fixing unit out of the protective bag.
7
Remove the tape attached to the fixing unit.
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6
Routine Maintenance
6
6-47
Make sure that the lock release levers (A) located on both sides of the back of
the fixing unit are tilted.
(A)
8
Install the fixing unit in the printer.
Hang the hooks of the fixing unit (A) on the projections on the printer (B) as
shown in the figure.
6
Routine Maintenance
(A)
(B)
6-48
Replacing the Fixing Unit
Hang the hooks on the projections at the inner side of the triangular marks (A).
Make sure that they are hooked properly.
(A)
Tilt the lock release levers located on both sides of the back
of the fixing unit in the direction of the arrows to lock the
fixing unit.
6
Routine Maintenance
9
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6-49
10 While holding the tabs (A), move the fixing unit back to its
original position a, and then press the tabs on the both sides
as shown in the figure b.
(A)
a
6
Routine Maintenance
b
6-50
Replacing the Fixing Unit
b
11 Close the front cover.
While supporting the front cover a, push and close the front cover with both
hands as shown in the figure b.
a
6
Routine Maintenance
b
CAUTION
Push the front portion of the front cover to close it as shown in the figure.
If closing the front cover by the levers on the both sides, you may catch
your fingers, resulting in personal injury.
After replacing the fixing unit, reset the counter of the fixing unit following the procedure
in "Resetting the Counter of the Fixing Unit" (See p. 6-52).
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6-51
Resetting the Counter of the Fixing Unit
After replacing the fixing unit, reset the counter using the following procedure in
order to clear the message <E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT> displayed in the control panel.
IMPORTANT
Perform this operation only after replacing the fixing unit. If you reset the counter without
replacing the fixing unit, the counter does not operate properly, resulting in damage to the
printer.
Online
1
Press [Online].
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control
panel.
Settings
2
Press [Settings].
SETUP
Routine Maintenance
6
CONTROL MENU
Utility
3
Settings
→
Select USER MAIN. using [
USER MAIN.
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
ADJ.START POS. →
OK
The options for USER MAIN. are displayed.
Utility
Settings
OK
4
Select INIT.COUNTER using [
INIT.COUNTER
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
FIXING UNIT
The settings for initializing the counter are displayed.
6-52
Replacing the Fixing Unit
Utility
5
Settings
Press [OK].
FIXING UNIT
OK?
OK
A confirmation message is displayed.
OK
6
Press [OK].
The printer does not initialize the counter if you press [Online] without pressing
[OK].
INITIALIZING
DONE
7
Press [Online].
The Online indicator comes on, and the message <E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT> displayed
in the display disappears.
6
Routine Maintenance
Online
Replacing the Fixing Unit
6-53
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
This section describes the procedure for replacing the waste toner container.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to obtain replacement waste toner
container.
When the Message <PRE.WST.T.CTN>/<CHG.WST.T.CTN>
Appears
When the waste toner container is filled to capacity, a message appears on the
display. Follow the directions in the message.
Message
Routine Maintenance
6
When it is Displayed
Contents and Remedies
E1 PRE.WST.T.CTN
When the waste toner - You can continue to print.
container needs to be - Have ready a new waste toner
replaced soon
container.
E1 CHG.EST.T.CTN
- The printer stops printing.
When the waste toner
- Replace the waste toner container with
container is full
a new one.
IMPORTANT
You cannot reinstall a waste toner container for which the message <E1
PRE.WST.T.CTN> or <E1 CHG.WST.T.CTN> has appeared after you remove it from the
printer. If you do so, the toner inside the container may spill out. Be sure to replace the
waste toner container with a new one.
NOTE
• The waste toner container (Canon Genuine Waste Toner Container) for this printer will be
filled to capacity after printing approximately 6,200 pages.
The numbers of the pages are estimated when printing in the following conditions.
Paper size: A4; Paper type: Plain paper; Printing ratio: 5 %; Print density: the default;
2-sheet intermittent/1-sided Printing
• Depending on the printing preferences or printing environment such as the intermit
printing, paper type, paper size, and 1-sided / 2-sided printing, the number of pages you
can print may be half the number.
6-54
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
Precautions on Replacing the Waste Toner Container
WARNING
• Do not throw a used waste toner container into open flames, as this may cause
the toner remaining inside the waste toner container to ignite, resulting in burns
or a fire.
• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Do not
touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to use the waste toner container designed for this printer.
• You cannot reinstall a waste toner container for which the message <E1
PRE.WST.T.CTN> or <E1 CHG.WST.T.CTN> has appeared after you remove it from the
printer. If you do so, the toner inside the container may spill out. Be sure to replace the
waste toner container with a new one.
• Waste toner cannot be reused. Do not mix the waste toner with new one.
NOTE
The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
6-55
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
2
Open the front cover.
Routine Maintenance
6
While pressing the lever on the right side of the front cover, open the front cover
toward you.
6-56
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
IMPORTANT
Before opening the front cover, make sure that the multi-purpose tray and the
paper cassette of the printer are closed.
3
Open the waste toner cover while holding it by the tab (A).
(A)
6
Remove the used waste toner container a, then attach the
supplied cap b.
Routine Maintenance
4
a
b
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
6-57
5
Take the new waste toner container out of the protective bag.
6
Install the waste toner container in the printer.
Routine Maintenance
6
Make sure that the cap is
not attached here.
7
6-58
Close the waste toner cover.
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
Close the front cover.
While supporting the front cover a, push and close the front cover with both
hands as shown in the figure b.
a
6
b
Routine Maintenance
8
CAUTION
Push the front portion of the front cover to close it as shown in the figure.
If closing the front cover by the levers on the both sides, you may catch
your fingers, resulting in personal injury.
● Used Waste Toner Container
Place the used waste toner container into the protective bag in which the new
one was contained, and then seal the bag.
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
6-59
Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit
If the print quality deteriorates due to the transfer belt of the ITB unit being touched,
clean the transfer belt of the ITB unit using the following procedure.
Online
1
Press [Online].
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control
panel.
Settings
2
Press [Settings].
SETUP
Routine Maintenance
6
CONTROL MENU
Utility
3
→
Select USER MAIN. using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
USER MAIN.
→
ADJ.START POS. →
OK
The options for USER MAIN. are displayed.
Utility
4
Select CLEANING using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
CLEANING
OK
→
OK?
A confirmation message is displayed.
The message <01 CLEANING> is displayed, and the printer starts cleaning the
transfer belt of the ITB unit.
NOTE
• Cleaning takes approximately 180 seconds.
• The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
6-60
Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit
5
Press [OK].
01 CLEANING
6
Routine Maintenance
OK
Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit
6-61
Adjusting the Printing Position
If the printing position is skewed when printing from a certain paper source, you can
adjust the position from the control panel.
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing
position, the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
Be aware that, when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, the orientation of
the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing orientation or setting
for BIND.LOCATION.
Checking the Printing Position
Routine Maintenance
6
Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print and check the position and direction
to be adjusted.
IMPORTANT
When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, set 2-SIDED PRINT. (See p.
5-38) to ON previously.
Feeder Selection
1
Press [Feeder Selection].
When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, select the desired
paper source.
SELECT FEEDER
PAPER SOURCE
Utility
2
→
Select PAPER SOURCE using [
Settings
OK
6-62
PAPER SOURCE
→
=AUTO
→
Adjusting the Printing Position
] and [
], then press [OK].
Utility
3
Settings
OK
Online
4
Select the paper source that you want to check the printing
position using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
CASSETTE 1
→
=CASSETTE 1
→
PAPER SOURCE
→
Press [Online].
PAPER SOURCE
00 READY
Online
5
→
A4
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
6
6
Press [Utility].
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
Utility
7
→
Select PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
PRNTPOSNPRINT
OK
→
EXECUTING
PRNTPOSNPRINT
(Approx. 1 sec.)
→
Adjusting the Printing Position
6-63
Routine Maintenance
Utility
The Printing Position Adjustment Print is printed as shown in the following. The
top of the output paper is the top of the Printing Position Adjustment Print.
Top
Feeding direction
Next, check the printout results and specify the direction and position to be adjusted in
"Adjusting the Printing Position" (See the next item).
Adjusting the Printing Position
Routine Maintenance
6
Next, check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and specify
the direction and position to be adjusted.
The measurements of " " printed on paper are as the following:
10 mm
5 mm
10 mm
5 mm
*5 mm from each edge of paper
This section describes the setting procedure for the following Printing Position
Adjustment Print printed with Cassette 1 specified, as an example.
6-64
Adjusting the Printing Position
In this case, adjust the printing position by -5.0 mm to the left.
Top
Feeding direction
NOTE
The printing position can be adjusted within a range from -5.0 to +5.0 mm in the vertical
direction and from -10.0 to +10.0 mm in the horizontal direction.
Online
1
Press [Online].
The Online indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the control
panel.
Settings
2
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
→
Adjusting the Printing Position
6-65
6
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
Adjust the printing position in the vertical direction using OFFSET Y.
Adjust the printing position in the horizontal direction using OFFSET X for each paper
source.
You can also adjust the printing position for 2-sided printing using OFFSET Y as well as
OFFSET X for each paper source.
Additionally, if you want to adjust the printing position of only the surface of paper which
is output to the output tray with the side facing down, use OFFSET X (DUP.).
Utility
3
Select USER MAIN. using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
USER MAIN.
→
ADJ.START POS. →
OK
The options for USER MAIN. are displayed.
Utility
4
Select ADJ.START POS. using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
ADJ.START POS. →
OFFSET Y
OK
→
The settings for the printing position are displayed.
Utility
5
Settings
Routine Maintenance
6
Select the paper source that you want to check the printing
position using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
OFFSET X(CASS1)→
OK
=0.0
Utility
6
Settings
→
Specify the target numeric value using [
press [OK].
] and [
], then
Next, check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and
select the numerical value to adjust the position.
OK
Each time you press [ ], the value increases in + 0.1 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in - 0.1 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
-5.0
→
=-5.0
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the value, and the printing position is specified.
Online
7
Press [Online].
USER MAIN.
00 READY
6-66
Adjusting the Printing Position
→
A4
Online
Utility
8
Press [Online] to place the printer online.
9
Press [Utility].
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
Utility
→
10 Select PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
PRNTPOSNPRINT
EXECUTING
PRNTPOSNPRINT
(Approx. 1 sec.)
→
The printing position adjustment print in which the setting is changed is printed.
Check the printout results to confirm the printing position.
To make further adjustment, repeat Step 1 to 10.
6
Routine Maintenance
OK
→
Adjusting the Printing Position
6-67
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Periodically clean the outer surfaces and ventilation slots of the printer to maintain
the optimal printing quality. When cleaning the printer, be careful of the following
points in order to prevent an electrical shock or printer malfunctions.
WARNING
• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the
power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If
flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer,
it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to use a cleaning agent other than water or a mild detergent diluted with
water, as this may deform or crack the plastic materials in the printer.
• When using a mild detergent, be sure to dilute it with water.
• Grease or oil does not have to be applied to this printer. Be sure not to apply grease or
oil.
Routine Maintenance
6
6-68
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Turn the printer and computer OFF a, remove the USB cable
b, and then disconnect the power plug from the AC power
outlet c.
If you are using a hard disk, turn the printer OFF after performing a shutdown
using the RESET menu.
If you are not using a hard disk, make sure that the Job indicator is off and that
the printer is not printing by checking the display.
b
a
c
6
Routine Maintenance
1
a
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
6-69
2
Firmly wring a soft cloth dampened with water or a mild
detergent diluted with water, and wipe off the dirt.
If you use a mild detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe away the detergent with
a soft cloth dampened with water.
3
6
Routine Maintenance
4
6-70
After wiping off the dirt, wipe the printer with a dry cloth.
When the printer is completely dry, plug the power plug into
the AC power outlet, and then connect the USB cable.
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Moving the Printer
When changing the location of the printer or moving the printer for maintenance, be
sure to perform the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the front cover and multi-purpose tray are closed before carrying the
printer.
NOTE
For details on the installation site, see "Getting Started Guide".
Turn the printer and computer OFF a, remove the USB cable
b, and then disconnect the power plug from the AC power
outlet c.
If you are using a hard disk, turn the printer OFF after performing a shutdown
using the RESET menu.
If you are not using a hard disk, make sure that the Job indicator is off and that
the printer is not printing by checking the display.
b
a
c
a
Moving the Printer
6-71
6
Routine Maintenance
1
WARNING
Be sure to turn the printer and computer OFF, unplug the power plug, and
then disconnect all the interface cables from the printer before moving the
printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
2
3
Remove all the interface cables and the power cord from the
printer.
Pull out the paper cassette.
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
6
Routine Maintenance
a
6-72
Moving the Printer
After lifting the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting it with the
other hand c as shown in the figures.
b
c
Routine Maintenance
6
IMPORTANT
The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out
forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.
Moving the Printer
6-73
4
Move the printer unit from the installation site.
Carry the printer with 4 or more people by holding the lift handles on the lower
portion of the printer and lifting it up at the same time.
Routine Maintenance
6
CAUTION
• The printer weight is approximately 55.7 kg without the paper cassette
installed. The printer must be carried by 4 or more people, and care must
be taken to avoid hurting your back or other portions of your body when
carrying the printer.
6-74
Moving the Printer
• Be sure not to hold the printer by the front cover, multi-purpose tray, or any
portions other than the lift handles. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
• Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the
paper cassette may drop resulting in personal injury.
• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeders installed. If you do so, the
paper feeders may drop resulting in personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
6
NOTE
If the optional paper feeder was previously installed in the printer, place the paper
feeder on the new installation site before carrying the printer to the site. For details
on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Getting Started Guide".
Moving the Printer
6-75
5
Put the printer down carefully at the new installation site.
CAUTION
Put the printer down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your
hands.
IMPORTANT
Secure sufficient space around the printer at the installation site so that you can
install the optional accessories and connect cables.
6
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, insert it until it stops a as
shown in the figure.
Routine Maintenance
6
a
6-76
Moving the Printer
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the printer c.
b
c
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the paper feeder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
7
8
Connect the interface cables except for the USB cable, and
connect the power cord.
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
Moving the Printer
6-77
Routine Maintenance
6
9
Connect the USB cable.
● Transporting the Printer
When transporting the printer for reasons such as relocating, remove the toner
cartridges and drum cartridges and store the printer and the parts in the
package that they came in with the packing materials attached in order to
prevent them from being damaged while being transported.
If the original package and packing materials are not available, find an
appropriate box and packing materials and pack the printer and the parts
appropriately.
Routine Maintenance
6
6-78
Moving the Printer
Handling the Printer
This printer consists of various electronic and precise optical parts. Read the
following section so that you can handle the printer properly.
CAUTION
If an error should occurred to the hard disk in the printer unit, the received,
recorded, and saved data may be deleted. It is recommended not to record or
save important data on the hard disk. Canon assumes no responsibility
whatsoever for any damages or losses arising from data loss by the customers.
• Do not leave any cover open longer than required. Exposing the printer to direct sunlight
or strong light may result in deterioration in print quality.
Handling the Printer
6-79
6
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• For details on how to handle the printer, also read "Important Safety Instructions" (See p.
xvii).
• Make sure that the multi-purpose tray is closed before opening the front cover. If you
open the front cover with the multi-purpose tray opened, this may result in damage to the
printer.
• Do not place any heavy objects on the printer, trays, or covers. This may result in damage
to the printer.
• Avoid vibration while the printer is printing. This may result in deterioration in print quality.
• Be sure not to open the covers on the printer during printing. This may result in damage
to the printer.
• Handle each cover of the printer such as the front cover and multi-purpose tray gently
when opening or closing it. Failure to do so may result in damage to the printer.
• If you want to spread a blanket on the printer to prevent dust from entering the printer,
turn the power OFF and allow the printer to cool down sufficiently before covering the
printer.
• If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, unplug the power plug from
the AC power outlet.
• Do not use or store the printer in a room where chemicals are used.
• Do not touch the transfer belt of the ITB unit and the ITB unit cover. If the transfer belt is
damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. If the print quality
deteriorates due to the transfer belt of the ITB unit being touched, see "Cleaning the
Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit" (p. 6-60) and clean the transfer belt of the ITB unit. The
transfer belt of the ITB unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, you do
not need to clean the belt even when toner is on it.
Routine Maintenance
6
Do not touch these parts.
6-80
Handling the Printer
Troubleshooting
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the remedies for problems such as a paper jam or an error message
appearing.
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Paper Jam Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Message List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Service Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Problems with the Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
When Any Print Defect Appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69
Printing Test Chart 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87
Printing Test Chart 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-89
Print Defect Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-91
Adjusting the Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Yes
Printing is
impossible.
No
Yes
The layout is
skewed.
The print setting in the application is inappropriate.
See the instruction manual supplied with your application
No
The printing position is skewed.
See "Adjusting the Printing Position" on p. 6-62
Troubleshooting
7
Yes
The print quality
is deteriorated.
No
The paper setting is inappropriate.
See Help of the printer driver
The process has been changed due to insufficient memory.
See "Message List" on p. 7-23
Paper that cannot be used with this printer is being used.
See "Paper Requirements" on p. 3-2
The toner cartridge is nearing the end of its life.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on p. 6-2
Miscellaneous Problems
See "Message List" on p. 7-23
See "Service Call Display" on p. 7-45
See "When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results" on p. 7-48
7-2
Troubleshooting Flowchart
No
A message is being displayed
on the print monitor.
This printer is not selected for the printer destination.
The printer is OFF.
See "Turning the Printer ON/OFF" on p. 2-2
Yes
Yes
The printer is offline.
See "Online and Offline" on p. 2-10
<Unable to get status.> is
displayed.
The cable is not connected properly.
See Getting Started Guide
No
<NO "size" PAPER> is being displayed.
See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette" on p. 3-18
See "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" on p. 3-48
Yes
7
An error message
is being displayed.
Troubleshooting
<PAPER JAM> is being displayed.
See "Paper Jams" on p. 7-4
<CHG. "color" TNR> is being displayed.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on p. 6-2
No
<CHG. "color" DRUM> is being displayed.
See "Replacing Drum Cartridges" on p. 6-15
<PREP. FIX. UNIT> is being displayed.
See "Replacing the Fixing Unit" on p. 6-43
<CHG. WST. T. CTN> is being displayed.
See "Replacing the Waste Toner Container" on p. 6-54
A service call is being displayed.
See "Service Call Display" on p. 7-45
The Job indicator on
the printer is blinking.
No
Other error message is being displayed.
See "Message List" on p. 7-23
Yes
Cannot print because of the previous job remaining.
See "Canceling a Job" on p. 2-59
The printer is processing the print data.
Please wait a moment.
Troubleshooting Flowchart
7-3
Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurs during printing for some reason, the printer beeps,
displaying the message <13 PAPER JAM> in the display. When a paper jam occurs,
remove the jammed paper using the following procedure, and then resume the job.
If the message that indicates the paper jam does not disappear even after removing
the jammed paper following the procedure, there is a possibility that torn pieces of
paper are still left inside the printer. Inspect each part of the printer again, and
completely remove all pieces of jammed paper.
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams
WARNING
7
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make
sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper.
Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm
water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
7-4
Paper Jams
• When removing paper jammed inside the printer, remove the jammed paper
gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your
eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges
of the paper.
• Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area after
removing jammed paper completely. Even if the printer is not printing, sudden
rotation of the roller may catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
• Remove jammed paper while the power of the printer is ON. If the power is turned OFF,
the data being printed will be deleted.
• Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer.
When removing jammed paper, pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction,
judging from the position of the paper.
• If paper is torn, be sure to find and remove any remaining pieces of paper.
Troubleshooting
7
Paper Jams
7-5
Paper Jam Area
The message that appears in the display shows the location where the paper jam
occurred.
Output Tray
A
Duplex Print Transport Area
C
B
Multi-purpose Tray
Cassette 1
D
Paper Feeder Unit
(Optional)
E
Cassette 2
F
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
G
Paper flow for 1-sided printing
Paper flow for 2-sided printing
7
Troubleshooting
Paper Jam Area
7-6
Paper Jam
Area Mark*
Message
A
Output Area
<OUTPUT AREA>
B
Inside the front cover
<FRONT COVER>
C
Inside the front cover (Duplex print
transport area)
<DUPLEX UNIT>
D
Cassette 1
<CASS.1 AREA>
Paper Jams
Paper Jam Area
Paper Jam
Area Mark*
Message
E
Cassette 2 (Only when the paper
feeder is installed)
<CASS.2 AREA>
F
Cassette 3 (Only when the paper
feeder is installed)
<CASS.3 AREA>
G
Cassette 4 (Only when the paper
feeder is installed)
<CASS.4 AREA>
* In "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams" (See p. 7-7), this mark is attached to the left of each step, indicating the
paper jam area where the operation described in the step is required.
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams
IMPORTANT
The error message may remain if jammed paper is removed without opening the front
cover. In this case, open and close the front cover once.
NOTE
The illustrations of the printer on the left of each step indicate paper jam areas where the
operation described in the step is required.
1
Confirm all the messages that appear in the display.
Messages appear one at a time. Confirm all of them.
As the messages disappear when the cover is open, take a note of them if
required.
13 PAPER JAM
FRONT COVER
Paper Jams
7-7
Troubleshooting
7
Remove the jammed paper using the following procedure.
2
A B C D
E F G
Check the output tray, then remove all the jammed paper a
and output paper b.
a
b
IMPORTANT
• If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 3.
• Do not place any paper or object on the output tray during printing, as this may
result in paper jams.
NOTE
If no toner is on the removed paper, it may adhere to the paper to be printed next.
Troubleshooting
7
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, remove any paper
jammed in the multi-purpose tray.
A B C D
E F G
IMPORTANT
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 4.
7-8
Paper Jams
4
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
5
Pull out the paper cassette.
A B C D
E F G
Troubleshooting
7
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
A B C D
E F G
a
Paper Jams
7-9
After lifting the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting it with the
other hand c as shown in the figures.
b
c
7
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
The paper cassette cannot be pulled out horizontally. If you try to pull it out
forcefully, this may result in damage to the paper cassette.
7-10
Paper Jams
A B C D
E F G
If the paper feeders are installed, pull all the paper cassettes
out from the top.
Pull the paper cassette out until it stops a.
a
7
Troubleshooting
6
Paper Jams
7-11
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, pull it out while supporting
the cassette with your left hand until the handle (A) on the right side of the paper
cassette appears completely c.
b
c
(A)
Troubleshooting
7
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, pull it out completely d as
shown in the figure.
d
IMPORTANT
• Because the paper cassette is heavy, hold it with your both hands securely.
• Place the removed paper cassette on an even and stable surface.
7-12
Paper Jams
A B C D
E F G
Remove any jammed paper while pushing it downward to
some extent.
In case of the printer
In case of the paper feeder
7
Troubleshooting
7
IMPORTANT
• If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 8.
Paper Jams
7-13
• Do not touch the paper feed roller (A) or switch (B) on the lower portion of the
printer. This may result in damage to the printer or printer error.
(B)
(A)
8
Open the front cover.
While pressing the lever on the right side of the front cover, open the front cover
toward you.
A B C D
E F G
Troubleshooting
7
IMPORTANT
Before opening the front cover, make sure that the multi-purpose tray is closed.
7-14
Paper Jams
9
A B C D
E F G
Tilt the fixing unit toward you.
While pressing the green lock release buttons (A) on the left and right side of the
fixing unit a, hold the tabs (B) and tilt the fixing unit toward you b as shown in
the figure.
(A)
a
a
(B)
b
10 Remove any jammed paper from the front of the fixing unit.
A B C D
E F G
IMPORTANT
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, pull the jammed paper out slowly
and forcefully to remove it. If the jammed paper still cannot be removed, do not try
to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 11.
Paper Jams
7-15
Troubleshooting
7
11 Remove any jammed paper from the rear of the fixing unit.
A B C D
E F G
IMPORTANT
Remove the jammed paper slowly and forcefully to prevent the unfixed toner from
scattering.
12 While holding the tabs (A), move the fixing unit back to its
A B C D
E F G
(A)
Troubleshooting
7
original position a, and then press the tabs on the both sides
as shown in the figure b.
a
b
7-16
Paper Jams
b
13 Remove any paper jammed under the fixing unit.
Turn the dial on the left of the fixing unit in the direction of the arrow to send any
jammed paper a as shown in the figure.
A B C D
E F G
a
Remove any jammed paper as shown in the figure b.
Troubleshooting
7
b
IMPORTANT
As the paper may be jammed in the back of the printer, turn the dial sufficiently to
send the paper.
Paper Jams
7-17
14 If the paper jam occurred when performing 2-sided printing,
open the cover of the duplex print transport area while
holding it by the tab (A) inside the front cover as shown in the
figure a, and then remove any jammed paper b.
A B C D
E F G
(A)
a
b
Troubleshooting
7
7-18
Paper Jams
15 Close the front cover.
While supporting the front cover a, push and close the front cover with both
hands as shown in the figure b.
A B C D
E F G
a
b
Troubleshooting
7
CAUTION
Push the front portion of the front cover to close it as shown in the figure.
If closing the front cover by the levers on the both sides, you may catch
your fingers, resulting in personal injury.
Paper Jams
7-19
16 Set the paper cassette in the printer.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, insert it until it stops a as
shown in the figure.
A B C D
E F G
a
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little b, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the printer c.
Troubleshooting
7
b
c
7-20
Paper Jams
17 If the paper feeders are installed, set all the paper cassettes in
the paper feeders from the top.
While holding the paper cassette with both hands, push it to the position shown
in the figure a. Then, hold the front of the paper cassette with your right hand
and push it until it stops b.
a
7
b
Troubleshooting
A B C D
E F G
Paper Jams
7-21
After lifting the front of the paper cassette up a little c, push the paper cassette
into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper cassette is flush with the
front surface of the paper feeder d.
c
d
Troubleshooting
7
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the paper feeder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
If the message that indicates the paper jam inside the front cover does not
disappear even after removing the jammed paper following the procedure, there is
a possibility that some paper still remains under the fixing unit. Following Step 14,
turn the dial sufficiently to send the paper and remove it.
7-22
Paper Jams
Message List
When the printer cannot continue printing for some reason (an error status), the
printer beeps, the Message indicator comes on, and an error message that
indicates the description of the error appears in the display. A Warning message
appears in the display when the printer requires some remedy (a warning status)
although the job is not affected.
If either of these messages appears, perform the following procedures according to
the message.
<E nnn-nnnn> ("n" represents a number)
Cause
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Remedy
Solve the problem following the instructions in "Service Call Display" (See p.
7-45).
<OF OPT.CONN.ERR.>
Cause 1
Any optional paper feeder is not installed properly.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder properly, and then turn it ON again.
(See Getting Started Guide)
Cause 2
Any optional paper feeder is installed or removed when the printer is ON.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install or remove the paper feeder, then turn the printer ON
again. (See Getting Started Guide)
Message List
7-23
7
Troubleshooting
NOTE
• When multiple warnings are occurring at the same time, the Warning messages appear
by rotation.
• When the printer is in error status and warning status at the same time, the Warning
message does not appear.
• If WARNING STEP in the SETUP menu is set to OFF, a message with (Warning
Message) does not appear even when the printer is in a warning status.
• For a message with the <Auto Error Skip> mark, you can skip the error by pressing
[Online] and continue printing. However, part of the print data may be missing or it may
not be printed properly. When you want to stop the process, perform a soft reset to
eliminate the cause of the error, press [Online], and then print again. Also, you can
automatically skip the errors to which this mark is attached by setting AUTO ERROR
SKIP in the SETUP menu to ON.
Cause 3
The connector of any optional paper feeder is disconnected.
Remedy
Turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Cause 4
A paper feeder that is not for this printer is installed.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder for this printer, and then turn it ON
again. (See Getting Started Guide)
<11 NO "size" PAPER>
Cause
Paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper
source (in all the paper sources when PAPER SOURCE is set to AUTO; in
the specified paper source when the setting is fixed).
Remedy 1 Refill or load paper.
Remedy 2 Press [Feeder Selection], then select other paper source for the same paper
size or larger paper size. (See "Selecting a Paper Source," on p. 3-12)
<12 COVER OPEN>
Troubleshooting
7
Cause
The front cover or top cover is open.
Remedy
Close the cover indicated in the display firmly. If the printer is not online, press
[Online].
NOTE
If the message still appears even after one cover is closed, the other cover is open.
Check the other cover and close both the covers.
<13 PAPER JAM>
Cause
Paper is jammed inside the printer
Remedy
Remove the jammed paper and set the paper cassette and covers to the
original position. If the printer is not online, press [Online]. (See "Paper Jams,"
on p. 7-4)
IMPORTANT
• If paper jams have occurred at multiple areas at the same time, the areas appear in the
display by rotation.
• If you have removed the jammed paper without opening any cover, be sure to open and
close the front cover once, and then press [Online].
7-24
Message List
<14 CHK TNR/COVER>
Cause 1
The toner cartridge of Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan), or K (Black) is not
installed or installed improperly.
Remedy
Install the toner cartridge properly. (See "Replacing Toner Cartridges," on p.
6-2)
Cause 2
The toner cover is open.
Remedy
Close the toner cover firmly.
IMPORTANT
If you cannot close the toner cover, check if the toner cartridges are installed properly. If
you try to close the toner cover forcefully, this may result in damage to the printer or toner
cartridges.
(Warning Message)
Cause
The toner cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) is
nearing the end of its life.
Remedy
Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new toner cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one before printing
a large amount of data. After replacing the toner cartridge, reset the counter of
the color of the replaced toner cartridge. (See "Replacing Toner Cartridges," on
p. 6-2)
<16 CHG."color" TNR>
Cause
The toner cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) has
reached the end of its life.
Remedy
Press [Online]. Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new
toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new
one before printing a large amount of data. After replacing the toner cartridge,
reset the counter of the color of the replaced toner cartridge. (See "Replacing
Toner Cartridges," on p. 6-2)
<18 FEED ERROR>
Cause
Paper of the size or type that cannot be fed from the multi-purpose tray or
paper cassettes is specified.
Remedy 1 If a paper source is specified, press [Feeder Selection], then set PAPER
SOURCE to AUTO.
Message List
7-25
7
Troubleshooting
<16 PREP."color" TNR>
Remedy 2 Press [Feeder Selection], select a paper source from which paper of the
specified size or type can be fed, then load paper.
Remedy 3 Specify the settings for STD PAPER SIZE and STD PAPER TYPE in the
FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu to the size or type of paper that
can be loaded in the paper source.
Remedy 4 Press [Online], then print from the currently selected paper source. However,
this may result in deterioration in print quality.
<18 NO CASSETTE 1>
Cause
Cassette 1 is not set.
Remedy 1 Set Cassette 1. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18)
Remedy 2 Press [Feeder Selection], then select the multi-purpose tray. (See "Selecting a
Paper Source," on p. 3-12)
<18 NO CASSETTE 2>
Cause
Cassette 2 is not set.
Remedy 1 Set Cassette 2. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18)
7
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 Press [Feeder Selection], then select the multi-purpose tray. (See "Selecting a
Paper Source," on p. 3-12)
<18 NO CASSETTE 3>
Cause
Cassette 3 is not set.
Remedy 1 Set Cassette 3. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18)
Remedy 2 Press [Feeder Selection], then select the multi-purpose tray. (See "Selecting a
Paper Source," on p. 3-12)
<1G CHG."color" TNR>
7-26
Cause 1
The toner cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) has
reached the end of its life.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one. (See
"Replacing Toner Cartridges," on p. 6-2)
Message List
Cause 2
(When the message is displayed even after the cartridge is replaced with a
new one) The toner is harden at the bottom of the toner cartridge.
Remedy
Remove the replaced toner cartridge, hold the toner cartridge so that its tab is
at the bottom, shake the cartridge up and down forcefully again to evenly
distribute the toner inside the cartridge, and then install the toner cartridge.
<23 DOWN.MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The memory for registering macro and custom characters has run out and
overflowed.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the overflowed
data cannot be registered.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM
using the following procedure, register the data again, and then print again.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The work memory required for the printer process has run out while the
system is processing the data (mainly the graphics data and text data).
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data with
which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, and then increase the free space
of RAM using the following procedure.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
<27 JOB START ERR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The specified emulation does not exist.
Remedy
Press [Online] to continue printing from the next data. However, the data with
which an error has occurred is not printed.
Message List
7-27
7
Troubleshooting
<26 SYS.MEM.FULL>
<30 MEMORY FULL>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause 1
The work memory has run out while the system is processing the data.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data with
which an error has occurred may not be printed properly.
Cause 2
(If this error has occurred while the printer is ON) The amount of memory
specified in NVRAM could not be secured because the memory
construction had been changed (The expansion RAM is removed).
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data may not
be printed properly due to the change of the memory construction.
IMPORTANT
The memory construction of NVRAM is rewrote to a securable value when <30
MEMORY FULL> appears. (* The settings for RIP Once and the hard disk is restored to
the default value.) (See "SETUP Menu Settings," on p. 5-18)
Remedy 2 After turning the printer OFF, restore the memory to the original condition
(install the removed RAM), and then print again. (See Getting Started Guide)
Remedy 3 Set EXT.RX BUFFER (See p. 5-66) in the INTERFACE MENU options in the
SETUP menu to OFF, and then print again.
7
Troubleshooting
<32 2-SIDED ERROR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause 1
Paper on which automatic 2-sided printing cannot performed is selected.
Remedy
Select a standard paper size for the paper source and paper size setting in the
computer, and then print again.
Cause 2
The printer received data for 2-sided printing on which the printer cannot
perform automatic 2-sided printing.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data on each
side is printed on two pages.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, change the paper size of the data to
the one on which the printer can perform 2-sided printing, and then print again.
<33 WORK MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The work memory for each print mode cannot be secured.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data with
which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
7-28
Message List
IMPORTANT
When you continue printing by pressing [Online], be aware that the data of macro that is
already registered may be deleted.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM using
the following procedure, and then print again.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory that the printer has received will be deleted).
- If you are using UFR II Printer Driver, install an optional expansion RAM
module. However, the problem may not be solved even after the expansion
RAM module is installed.
<35 PDF SIZE ERR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
There is not sufficient free space to print the PDF file using the direct print
function.
Remedy
Press [Online] to cancel the job. Afterward, perform the following processes
(decreasing the size of the PDF file), and then print again.
- Optimizing the PDF file
- Dividing the PDF file into multiple files
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The number of the documents in a job has exceeded 16.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the job with which
an error has occurred is not printed.
<36 DIS.LIST FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The memory required for processing has run out and overflowed.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the job with which an error has
occurred is not printed.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM using
the following procedures, and then print again.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory that the printer has received will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module (256 MB or more*). (See Getting
Started Guide)
*
However, even if a 512-MB expansion RAM module is installed, the free space to be increased is
the same as when a 256-MB expansion RAM module is installed.
Message List
7-29
7
Troubleshooting
<35 TABLE FULL>
<38 LOW IMGE QLTY>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer cannot process the data in the Super Fine mode because it is
too complicated.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the printer prints
with the resolution level of the data being lowered.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set RESOLUTION (See p. 5-43) in the
QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to FINE, and then print again.
Remedy 3 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set GRADATION LEVEL (See p. 5-44)
in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to HIGH 1, and then print
again.
Remedy 4 If you want to print in the Super Fine mode, perform a soft reset using the
RESET menu, and then increase the free space of RAM using the following
procedure.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory that the printer has received will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
<39 SPL MEM.FULL>
7
Troubleshooting
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
Because spool memory has run out, the printer cannot print.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the page with
which an error has occurred is not printed.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, specify the paper size smaller, and
then print again.
Remedy 3 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set GRADATION LEVEL (See p. 5-44)
in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to HIGH 1, and then print
again.
Remedy 4 If 2-SIDED PRINT. in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu is set to
ON, specify OFF, and then print again.
Remedy 5 Change the setting for HALFTONES (See p. 5-47) in the QUALITY MENU
options in the SETUP menu, and then print again.
Remedy 6 Install an optional expansion RAM module, then print again. (See Getting
Started Guide)
7-30
Message List
<41 CHK PAPER SZE>
Cause 1
The size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette is
different from the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE, CASSETTE2 SIZE,
CASSETTE3 SIZE, or CASSETTE4 SIZE specified from the computer or
control panel.
Remedy
Match the size specified in TRAY PAPER SIZE (See p. 5-29) and the size of the
loaded paper, and then press [Online].
Cause 2
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 297.0 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE2 SIZE, CASSETTE3 SIZE, or CASSETTE4 SIZE in the FEEDER
MENU options in the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
Cause 3
When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was
loaded in landscape orientation to be printed.
Remedy
Load the paper in portrait orientation, then print again.
Cause 4
CHK PAPER SIZE in the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP is set to ON.
Remedy
Set CHK PAPER SIZE (See p. 5-70) to OFF, then print again.
Cause
7
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer received data in format that it does not support during printing
in the Raster mode.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the data may not
be printed properly.
Remedy 2 Print again from the printer driver for LBP5970.
<53 SEC.PRINT ERR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause 1
Secured print data is sent from a printer driver that is not for LBP5970.
Remedy
Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu to delete the print data.
Cause 2
The printer received secured print data when the hard disk cannot be
used.
Remedy
Press [Online] to cancel printing, set HARD DISK (See p. 5-25) in the
CONTROL MENU options in the SETUP menu to ON, perform a hard reset,
and then print again.
Message List
7-31
Troubleshooting
<52 RAST.MODE ERR>
Cause 3
The number of the jobs exceeded the amount of jobs the printer can save
as secured print jobs (You can save up to 8 secured print jobs in the hard
disk.)
Remedy
Press [Online] to cancel printing, delete any unnecessary secured print jobs,
and then print again.
Cause 4
The amount of the job data exceeded the amount of job data that you can
save on the hard disk as secured print jobs (You can save the data in total
of up to 4GB of secured print jobs, stored jobs, and paused jobs in the
hard disk. However, when SECURED TYPE in the CONTROL MENU
options is set to PDL, you can save only up to 1.88GB of data.
Remedy
Press [Online] to cancel printing, resume any paused jobs or delete
unnecessary secured print jobs, and then print again.
<53 STORE ERROR>
Cause 1
The data for which a stored job print had been specified was sent from a
printer driver that is not for LBP5970.
Remedy
Press [Online] to cancel the job.
Cause 2
The data cannot be saved on the hard disk because there is not sufficient
free space in the hard disk.
Remedy
The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data.
Cause 3
The number of the jobs exceeded the number of jobs you can save on the
hard disk.
7
Troubleshooting
<Auto Error Skip>
Remedy 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data.
Remedy 2 Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the hard disk.
Cause 4
The amount of the print jobs exceeded the amount of jobs you can save
on the hard disk.
Remedy 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data.
Remedy 2 Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the hard disk.
7-32
Cause 5
The specified box number is not correct.
Remedy
Specify the correct box number.
Cause 6
HARD DISK in the CONTROL MENU options in the SETUP menu is set to
OFF.
Remedy
Set HARD DISK (See p. 5-25) to ON.
Message List
<55 HDD ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
An error has occurred in the hard disk.
Remedy 1 The printer reformats the hard disk automatically.
Remedy 2 The printer starts up with its settings not using the hard disk by pressing
[Online]. However, you cannot print with the functions that require the hard disk.
Remedy 3 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing.
<56 HDD ERROR>
Cause
An error has occurred in the hard disk.
Remedy
Format the hard disk in HDD MAINTENANCE (See p. 5-73) in the USER MAIN.
options in the SETUP menu. If the same error occurs, you need to replace the
hard disk. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing.
<57 RIP ONCE ERR.>
The printer cannot continue to print multiple copies using RIP Once
because the hard disk has run out of free space.
7
Remedy 1 Divide the job into multiple jobs, then print again.
Remedy 2 Set RIP ONCE (See p. 5-27) in the CONTROL MENU options in the SETUP
menu to OFF, and then perform a hard reset. (The functions of RIP Once
become disabled.)
Remedy 3 A copy of the data is printed by pressing [Online].
Cause 2
The number of the copies that the printer can process exceeded when
printing in the [Edit and Preview] mode.
Remedy 1 Print all the print jobs again using the printer driver for this printer.
Remedy 2 Reduce the number of the pages you print at a time and print again with the job
divided into multiple jobs.
<58 JOB MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
There is not sufficient free RAM space to process jobs.
Remedy 1 If you are processing multiple jobs at once, press [Online] to cancel printing,
wait for other jobs complete, and then print again.
Remedy 2 If the job data is too large, divide the job and print again.
Message List
7-33
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
<Auto Error Skip>
<59 JOB RX ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer received any unanalyzable data while it is receiving a job, or it
timed out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to cancel printing, then print again.
Remedy 2 A problem may be occurring in the network you are using. Check the status of
the network that you are using.
<60 KEY MNG.ERR.1>
Cause
The file related to key management is broken.
Remedy
Select the SETUP menu ➞ the INTERFACE MENU options ➞ NETWORK
MENU ➞ REMOTE UI SET. ➞ SSL, and then make sure that OFF is specified.
After that, restart the printer, and then regenerate the key and certificate and
specify the settings for SSL from the Remote UI. After setting the key
management and SSL, restart the printer again. (See Remote UI Guide
"Chapter 3 Appendix")
<60 DECODE ERROR>
Troubleshooting
7
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The printer could not analyze encrypted secured print data.
Remedy
Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, then print again.
<61 PRINT SET ERR>
Cause
Long size paper was printed in the Super Fine mode.
Remedy 1 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set RESOLUTION (See p. 5-43) in the
QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to FINE, and then print again.
Remedy 2 Press [Online] to continue printing from the next data. However, the data with
which an error has occurred is not printed.
<98 CHG."color" DRUM>
7-34
Cause
The drum cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan)
cannot be used.
Remedy
Replace the drum cartridge of the indicated color with a new one. (See
"Replacing Drum Cartridges," on p. 6-15)
Message List
<A4 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<A5 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<A7 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<BT CLOCK ERROR>
(Warning Message)
Cause
The clock in this printer has a problem.
Remedy
Though printing is possible as is, logs such as the print logs cannot be recorded
correctly. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<D7 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<D8 LAYOUT ERROR>
Cause
The page cannot be laid out because the memory has run out.
Remedy 1 Set [Graphics Mode] in UFR II Printer Driver to [Raster Mode], then print again.
(See Help of UFR II Printer Driver)
Message List
7-35
7
Troubleshooting
Cause
Remedy 2 After performing a soft reset using the RESET menu, perform a hard reset to
increase the free memory space or cycle the power of the printer, and then print
again. (Be aware that all the data in the memory that the printer has received
will be deleted.)
Remedy 3 Perform "Error Skip" to continue the job. However, the data with which an error
has occurred is not printed properly.
<D8 VERSION ERROR>
Cause
You tried to print from a printer driver that is not for LBP5970.
Remedy
Print from the printer driver for LBP5970.
<D8 SYNTAX ERROR>
Cause
Invalid data is sent when printing using UFR II Printer Driver.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing from the next data. However, the page with
which an error has occurred and its subsequent pages are not printed.
Remedy 2 Confirm the data to be printed, then print again.
<D8 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Troubleshooting
7
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<D9 IMG.DATA ERR.>
Cause
Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data or JPEG
data.
Remedy
This printer cannot print the data. Press [Online] to cancel the job.
<D9 IMG.REFER.ERR>
7-36
Cause
Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data.
Remedy
This printer cannot print the data. Press [Online] to cancel the job.
Message List
<D9 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA PDF DATA ERR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent.
Remedy 1 Remake the PDF data in a format which this printer supports and print again.
Remedy 2 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
<DA COMP.ANALY.ER>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
Data compressed in a format which this printer cannot process is
included in pages of the PDF data.
Remedy 1 Remake the PDF data in a format which this printer supports and print again.
<DA PAGE COMP.ERR>
Cause
Pages compressed in a format which this printer cannot process are
included in the PDF data.
Remedy 1 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, then remake the PDF data in a format
which this printer supports, and then print again.
Remedy 2 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA DATA PROC.ERR>
Cause
PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent.
Remedy 1 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, then remake the PDF data in a format
which this printer supports, and then print again.
Remedy 2 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Message List
7-37
7
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
<DA PDF MEM.FULL>
Cause
There is no memory to process the PDF file being processed.
Remedy 1 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, optimize the PDF in Adobe Acrobat,
reduce the size of the data you are going to print at one time by resetting the
resolution to an appropriate level or by another method, and then try printing
again. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, then reduce the number of pages to
print at one time by dividing the PDF data you are going to print in Adobe
Acrobat into several files, before trying to print again. (See the Adobe Acrobat
Help.)
Remedy 3 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, open the data in the application
software, and then print again via the printer driver. (See the Adobe Acrobat
Help.)
<DA TEMP.FILE ERR>
7
Cause
An error has occurred while a temporary file of the PDF data is being
processed.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Troubleshooting
<DA CLR ANALY.ERR>
Cause
A color space definition which this printer cannot render was sent.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA DATA SCAN ERR>
Cause
An error has occurred when the PDF data was read.
Remedy
Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, then remake the PDF data in a format
which this printer supports, and then print again.
<DA OUTPUT SEL.ER>
Cause
An error has occurred to the output mode of the PDF data.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA PDF PROF.ERR>
7-38
Cause
An error has occurred while the ICC profile is being processed.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Message List
<DA PDF ACC.ERR 1>
Cause
An error has occurred when the PDF data was read.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA PDF ACC.ERR 2>
Cause
An error has occurred when the PDF data was read.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA PDF FONT ERR>
Cause
Fonts which this printer cannot process are included in the PDF data.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
<DA RENDERING ERR>
Cause
An error has occurred while the PDF data is being rendered.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
7
Cause 1
An incorrect password was entered to print the PDF data.
Remedy
Enter the correct password.
Cause 2
The Security settings in the PDF file do not allow printing.
Remedy
Change the settings to allow printing.
Troubleshooting
<DA DATA DECDE ER>
NOTE
If you enter an incorrect password for PDF data by restriction on low resolution printing,
this error will not be displayed. Instead, the printed PDF will be of low quality.
<DA PRT RANGE ERR>
Cause
The specified print range is incorrect.
Remedy
Specify the print range correctly, then print again.
NOTE
This error will not be displayed if there are printable pages within the print range you
specified. For example, if PDF data has five pages, and you specify a print range from
page 2 to 10, page 2 to 5 will be printed without an error being displayed.
Message List
7-39
<DA PDF ERROR>
Cause
PDF data which this printer cannot process was sent.
Remedy
Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
<DA TRANSP.ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
Transparent image objects which this printer cannot process are included
in the PDF data.
Remedy 1 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, optimize the PDF or flatten the
transparent object to convert it into a format that this printer can process, and
then print again. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)
Remedy 2 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the page with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
<DB FONT MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The font memory of this printer has run out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Troubleshooting
7
Remedy 2 Decrease the number of the fonts to be downloaded onto this printer in the PS
printer driver, then print again.
<DB SYS.MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The memory required for processing has run out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM
using the following procedure, register the data again, and then print again.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
7-40
Message List
<DB MACROMEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The macro memory of this printer has run out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Decrease the number of the macros to be downloaded onto this printer in the
PS printer driver, then print again.
<DB IMG.MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The image memory of this printer has run out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Decrease the number of the images to be downloaded onto this printer in the
PS printer driver, then print again.
<DB PTRN MEM.FULL>
The pattern memory of this printer has run out.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Decrease the number of the patterns to be downloaded onto this printer in the
PS printer driver, then print again.
<DB HDD ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
An internal error has occurred.
Remedy 1 Press [Online] to continue printing. However, the data with which an error has
occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<E0 PREP."color" DRM>
(Warning Message)
Cause
The drum cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) is
nearing the end of its life.
Remedy
Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new drum cartridge.
Replace the drum cartridge of the indicated color with a new one before printing
a large amount of data. (See "Replacing Drum Cartridges," on p. 6-15)
Message List
7-41
7
Troubleshooting
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
<E1 NO WST.T.CTN>
Cause
The waste toner container is not installed or installed improperly.
Remedy
Install the waste toner container properly. (See "Replacing the Waste Toner
Container," on p. 6-54)
<E1 PRE.WST.T.CTN>
(Warning Message)
Cause
The waste toner container needs to be replaced soon.
Remedy
Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new waste toner
container.
<E1 CHG.WST.T.CTN>
Cause
The waste toner container is full.
Remedy
Replace the waste toner container with a new one. (See "Replacing the Waste
Toner Container," on p. 6-54)
<E2 NO "color" DRUM>
Troubleshooting
7
Cause
The drum cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) is not
installed or installed improperly.
Remedy
Install the drum cartridge of the indicated color properly. (See "Replacing Drum
Cartridges," on p. 6-15)
<E5 PREP.FIX.UNIT>
Cause
The fixing unit is nearing the end of its life.
Remedy
Although you can continue to print for a while, have ready a new fixing unit.
(See "Replacing the Fixing Unit," on p. 6-43)
<E7 CHK FIX.UNIT>
7-42
(Warning Message)
(Warning Message)
Cause
The fixing unit is not installed or installed improperly.
Remedy
Install the fixing unit properly. (See "Replacing the Fixing Unit," on p. 6-43)
Message List
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The drum cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), or C (Cyan) has
reached the end of its life.
Remedy
Press [Online]. Although you can continue to print, the print quality may
deteriorate. Replace the drum cartridge with a new one. If the printer is not
online after replacing the drum cartridge, press [Online]. (See "Replacing Drum
Cartridges," on p. 6-15)
<EM SERVER ERROR>
(Warning Message)
Cause
The printer could not connect to the POP3/SMTP server when printing
e-mails, or the settings for the POP3/SMTP server are not correct.
Remedy
Check the error in detail using the Remote UI or N/W Status Print. (See "When
E-mail Print Fails," on p. 2-45)
<EM E-MAIL ERROR>
(Warning Message)
Cause
The printer could not connect to the POP3 server because an error had
occurred in its hard disk.
Remedy
Clear the hard disk error on the POP3 server.
7
<F9-nn PWR OFF>ON> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred while the printer is processing print data.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<FF FONT FULL>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
Because of too many fonts to be registered, the field (font table) for
registering font information has run out and overflowed.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the page with
which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
<FM SIZE ERROR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
There is some font with its size exceeds the pseudo-scalable font size.
Remedy
Perform "Error Skip", then continue printing. However, the characters with which
an error has occurred are not printed properly.
Message List
7-43
Troubleshooting
<EF CHG."color" DRUM>
<FM SCALE ERROR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
There is a character in which the number of coordinate points on the
contour lines exceeds the limitation of a pseudo-scalable font.
Remedy
Perform "Error Skip", then continue printing. However, the characters with which
an error has occurred are not printed properly.
<HF HDD FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
Free space in the hard disk has run out.
Remedy 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the current process.
Remedy 2 Delete any unnecessary data from among the data saved on the hard disk.
<PC LOAD "size">
Cause
The paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the
paper cassette or multi-purpose tray, or the paper source for the different
paper size is selected.
Remedy 1 Load the paper of the size selected in the application (or the one specified by
scaling factors). (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18)
7
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 If you are using the multi-purpose tray, check the size of the paper in the
multi-purpose tray, and when the size does not match the size specified in the
application (or the one specified by scaling factors), specify the setting properly.
(See "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 3-48)
Remedy 3 Press [Feeder Selection], then select the paper cassette in which the paper of
the matched size is loaded. (See "Selecting a Paper Source," on p. 3-12)
Remedy 4 Press [Online], then print to the currently loaded paper forcibly. If you are using
the multi-purpose tray, the paper size setting for the multi-purpose tray
automatically changes to the setting specified in the application.
IMPORTANT
If you open the front cover when the message <PC LOAD "size"> is displayed, the
message may disappear. However, be sure to follow the directions in the displayed
message to change the paper.
7-44
Message List
Service Call Display
When a problem has occurred and the printer does not work properly, the service
call shown in the figure appears:
Ennn-nnnn
("n" represents a
number)
E001-nnnn
E003-nnnn
("n" represents a
number)
F9-nn PWR OFF>ON
("nn" represents
two-digit
alphanumeric
characters)
Cause
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer using the
following procedure. If the message does not
A problem has
occurred inside the disappear after cycling the power of the printer
several times, contact your local authorized
printer.
Canon dealer.
A problem has
occurred with the
fixing unit of the
printer.
A problem has
occurred while the
printer is
processing print
data.
Perform the following procedures from the
Step 2 to contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
7
Cycle the power of the printer using the
following procedure.
Service Call Display
Troubleshooting
Message
7-45
1
Turn the printer and the computer OFF, wait for 10 seconds or
longer, and then turn it ON again.
OFF
After 10 seconds
ON
If the message does not reappear, the printer can be used as normal. If the error
message still appears, proceed to Step 2.
2
Troubleshooting
7
7-46
Note down the eight-digit alphanumeric characters and
message in the display.
Service Call Display
3
Turn the printer and computer OFF a, remove the USB cable
b, and then disconnect the power plug from the AC power
outlet c.
b
a
c
a
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Troubleshooting
4
7
When contacting your Canon dealer, please report the problems and code
number (eight-digit alphanumeric characters) that you have noted.
Service Call Display
7-47
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
If any problem occurs while you are using the printer, take the following measures
depending on the symptoms.
IMPORTANT
• If the printer does not operate properly or an error message appears, see "Message List"
(p. 7-23) and "Service Call Display" (p. 7-45).
• When a paper jam occurs, see "Paper Jams," on p. 7-4.
• If a symptom that is not indicated in this section occurs, if none of the indicated remedies
do not solve the problem, or if you cannot determine the problem, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation
7
Cause 1
The power plug is unplugged from the AC power outlet.
Troubleshooting
The printer cannot be turned ON.
Remedy
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
Cause 2
The printer is plugged to an extension cord or multiple power strip.
Remedy
Plug the power plug of the printer directly into the AC power outlet on the wall.
Cause 3
The breakers have tripped.
Remedy
Reset the breakers on the switch board.
Cause 4
There is a break in the power cord.
Remedy
If the printer is turned ON after replacing the power cord with the one that is of
the same type and is used for other device, there is a break in the power cord.
In this case, purchase a new power cord and replace it with the broken one.
The printer does not operate.
7-48
Cause 1
The printer is offline.
Remedy
Press [Online] to turn on the Online indicator. (See "Online and Offline," on p.
2-10)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Cause 2
There is data remaining in the memory (the Job indicator is on).
Remedy
Press [Online] to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED in the
RESET menu to output all the data remaining in the memory. (See "Canceling a
Job," on p. 2-59)
Cause 3
The interface cable is disconnected.
Remedy
Connect the interface cable firmly to the interface connectors on the computer
and printer unit. (See Getting Started Guide)
Cause 4
This printer or any optional accessory is broken.
Remedy
Clear the problem referring to the message in the display. (See "Message List,"
on p. 7-23, "Service Call Display," on p. 7-45)
All the indicators on the print server are off.
Cause 1
The LAN cable is not connected properly or broken.
Remedy 1 Remove the LAN cable once, then connect it again.
Remedy 2 Replace the LAN cable with another one, then connect it.
The cable is connected to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub.
7
Remedy 1 Connect the LAN cable to a port with a "X" mark.
Remedy 2 If the hub has a UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to "X".
Cause 3
A cross LAN cable is being used.
Remedy 1 Replace the cable with a straight LAN cable.
Remedy 2 Connect the cross LAN cable to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub. If the
hub has a UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to "=".
NOTE
A cross LAN cable is a cable used to connect to a printer and computer directly.
Cause 4
Cannot communicate with the hub.
Remedy 1 Make sure that the power of the hub is on.
Remedy 2 Set network transmission setting for the print server according to the
transmission speed of the connected hub. (See "ETHERNET DRIVER," on p.
5-65)
Remedy 3 Replace the hub.
Cause 5
The hardware of the print server is in an abnormal condition.
Remedy
Report the problems to your local authorized Canon dealer.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-49
Troubleshooting
Cause 2
The printer stopped printing during a job.
Cause
There is data remaining in the memory (the Job indicator is on).
Remedy
Press [Online] to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED in the
RESET menu to output all the data remaining in the memory. (See "Canceling a
Job," on p. 2-59)
The indicators on the control panel do not come on.
Cause 1
The printer is not ON.
Remedy
Turn the printer ON.
Cause 2
The printer is in Power Save Mode.
Remedy
The printer will be ready to print after you send print data or press any key on
the control panel.
The keys on the control panel do not function.
Cause
There is data remaining in the memory (the Job indicator is on).
Remedy
Press [Online] to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED in the
RESET menu. (See "Canceling a Job," on p. 2-59)
Troubleshooting
7
A paper jam occurs each time you print.
7-50
Cause 1
The amount of the paper loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose
tray exceeds the load limitation.
Remedy
Reduce the amount of paper to within the load limitation and print again. (See
"Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18, "Loading Paper in the
Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 3-48)
Cause 2
Paper is not loaded properly in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Remedy
Load the paper properly and print again. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper
Cassette," on p. 3-18, "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 3-48)
Cause 3
Unusable paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Cause 4
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 297.0 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE2 SIZE, CASSETTE3 SIZE, or CASSETTE4 SIZE in the FEEDER
MENU options in the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
Cause 5
When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was
loaded in landscape orientation to be printed.
Remedy
Load the paper in portrait orientation, then print again.
Cause 6
There is still jammed paper inside the printer.
Remedy
Remove any jammed paper and print again. (See "Paper Jams," on p. 7-4)
The hard disk cannot be used.
HARD DISK in the CONTROL MENU options in the SETUP is set to OFF.
Remedy
Set HARD DISK (See p. 5-25) to ON, and then perform a hard reset.
Cause 2
An error has occurred in the hard disk.
Remedy
Format the hard disk in HDD MAINTENANCE (See p. 5-73) in the USER MAIN.
options in the SETUP menu. If the same error occurs, replace the hard disk.
Cause 3
The hard disk is not installed properly.
Remedy
Turn the printer OFF, then check if the hard disk is installed properly. (See
Getting Started Guide)
Cause 4
The data cannot be saved on the hard disk because there is not sufficient
free space in the hard disk.
Remedy
Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the hard disk.
Jobs cannot be saved.
Cause 1
The data cannot be saved on the hard disk because there is not sufficient
free space in the hard disk.
Remedy
The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data. The
data of 2GB or larger in total cannot be saved.
Cause 2
The number of the jobs exceeded the number of jobs you can save in the
hard disk.
Remedy 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data. Up to
100 jobs can be saved all together.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-51
7
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
Remedy 2 Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the hard disk.
Cause 3
The amount of the print jobs exceeded the amount of jobs you can save in
the hard disk.
Remedy 1 The printer is ready to print by pressing [Online], ignoring the print data. The
data of 2GB or larger cannot be saved.
Remedy 2 Delete any unnecessary jobs from among the jobs saved on the hard disk.
The printing speed drops when printing paper with a narrower width continuously.
Cause
This kind of phenomenon may occur depending on the printing
preferences or setting for SP.S-SIZE MODE2.
Remedy
Set SP.S-SIZE MODE2 (See p. 5-72) in the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP
menu to 1 or 2, and then print again. However, the print quality may deteriorate
because the printer gives the priority to the printing speed.
Problems with the Printout Results
Unreadable characters are printed.
Troubleshooting
7
Cause 1
The data is printed from Windows without the supplied printer driver
installed for Windows.
Remedy
Install the supplied printer driver for Windows, then print again.
Cause 2
The printer setting in the DOS application is not appropriate.
Remedy
Specify the printer setting in the DOS application to the one that is compatible
with this printer.
A blank page cannot be printed.
7-52
Cause
PAPER SAVE is set to ON.
Remedy
When printing a blank page, set PAPER SAVE (See p. 5-75) and (See p. 5-80)
to OFF.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
The last page cannot be printed.
Cause
The command that notifies of the end of the data is not sent from the
computer (the Job indicator is on).
Remedy
Press [Online] to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED in the
RESET menu (If you print using an application that does not have a printing
function, the last page in which data is less than one page remains in the
memory). (See "Canceling a Job," on p. 2-59)
The data lies outside the paper.
Cause 1
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 297.0 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE2 SIZE, CASSETTE3 SIZE, or CASSETTE4 SIZE in the FEEDER
MENU options in the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
Cause 2
When the UFR II printer driver was not used, custom size paper was
loaded in landscape orientation to be printed.
Remedy
Load the paper in portrait orientation, then print again.
Cause 3
Paper of the size smaller than the data size is loaded.
Remedy
Load the paper of the size that matches the data size or print the data in the
reduced size that matches the paper size.
Cause 4
The position of the paper is incorrect.
Remedy
Load the paper properly and print again. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper
Cassette," on p. 3-18, "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 3-48)
Cause 5
A document with no margins was printed.
Remedy 1 If you are using UFR II Printer Driver, secure a margin of 5 mm or more (10 mm
or more for envelopes) around the data, then print again (Data cannot be
printed within a 5 mm margin (10 mm for envelopes) on all sides of the paper).
(See the instruction manual supplied with your application)
Remedy 2 If you are using PCL Printer Driver, secure a margin of 4.23 mm or more (10
mm or more for envelopes) around the data, then print again (Data cannot be
printed within a 4.23 mm margin (10 mm for envelopes) on all sides of the
paper). (See the instruction manual supplied with your application)
Remedy 3
If you are using PS Printer Driver, secure a margin of 4 mm or more around the
data, then print again (Data cannot be printed within a 4 mm margin on all sides
of the paper). (See the instruction manual supplied with your application)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-53
Troubleshooting
7
Remedy 4 If you are using the PS/UFR II printer driver and select the [Print with Upper Left
of Sheet as Starting Point] check box in the printer driver, you can extend the
printable area to near the edges of the paper. However, data may be printed
with the edges missing.
In order to specify the setting for [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting
Point], display the following dialog box.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Finishing Details] dialog box by clicking
[Finishing Details] in the [Finishing] sheet.
- For PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PS printer driver.
Cause 6
The printing position has been adjusted using ADJ.START POS. in the
USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu.
Remedy
Adjust the printing position to the appropriate value using ADJ.START POS. in
the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu. (See "Adjusting the Printing
Position," on p. 6-62)
The printing position is skewed.
Cause 1
GUTTER, OFFSET Y, or OFFSET X in the LAYOUT MENU options in the
SETUP menu is specified.
Remedy
Set GUTTER, OFFSET Y, or OFFSET X in the LAYOUT MENU options in the
SETUP menu to "0", and then print again.
Cause 2
"Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application are not specified
properly.
Remedy
Specify the settings for "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application
properly, and then print again. (See the instruction manual supplied with your
application)
Cause 3
The printing position has been adjusted using ADJ.START POS. in the
USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu.
Remedy
Adjust the printing position to the appropriate value using ADJ.START POS. in
the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu. (See "Adjusting the Printing
Position," on p. 6-62)
Troubleshooting
7
The next page is printed from halfway across the previous page.
7-54
Cause 1
"Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application is not specified
properly.
Remedy
Specify the settings for "Line Spacing" and "Lines/Page" in the application so
that data fits in one page, and print again. (See the instruction manual supplied
with your application)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Cause 2
MODE SELECTION in the PRINT MODE options in the SETUP menu is set
to AUTO SELECTION, and the set time for MODE TIMEOUT in the
INTERFACE MENU options in the SETUP menu is too short.
Remedy
Set MODE SELECTION in the PRINT MODE options in the SETUP menu to a
setting value other than AUTO SELECTION or lengthen the set time for MODE
TIMEOUT enough. (See "MODE SELECTION," on p. 5-66)
Data is printed with its size reduced.
Cause
The printer is set to reduce the print size.
Remedy
Confirm the setting for [Manual Scaling] in the printer driver.
Paper comes out wrinkled.
Paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray at an angle.
Remedy
Load the paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray straight. (See
"Loading Paper in Cassette 1," on p. 3-20, "Loading Paper (Other than
Envelopes)," on p. 3-49)
Cause 2
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 3-2)
Cause 3
The fixing unit is nearing the end of its life.
Remedy
Perform Configuration Page Print, check the value of the counter of the fixing
unit. If the number of sheets has been increased by approximately 150,000
sheets since you replaced the fixing unit last time, replace the fixing unit with a
new one. (See "Replacing the Fixing Unit," on p. 6-43)
Paper curls.
Cause 1
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 3-2)
Cause 2
Paper is inappropriate.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
Cause 3
The paper is too thin.
Remedy
Set [Paper Type] to [Plain Paper L] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Paper Type], display the [Paper Source] sheet.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-55
7
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
Nothing is printed on the paper.
Cause 1
Multiple sheets of paper were fed at a time.
Remedy
Align the paper stack in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray properly and
load it again. If you are using coated paper or labels, fan them thoroughly and
load them again. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 3-18,
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 3-48)
Cause 2
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Remedy 1 If <Ennn-nnnn> is displayed in the display, turn the power OFF, wait for 10
seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. This may clear the
message.
Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear even after applying the Remedy 1, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing.
Print Quality Problems
Nothing is printed on the paper, but the paper is filled with a certain color.
Troubleshooting
7
Cause 1
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated or is damaged.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
Cause 2
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Remedy 1 If <Ennn-nnnn> is displayed in the display, turn the power OFF, wait for 10
seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. This may clear the
message.
Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear even after applying the Remedy 1, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing.
White streaks appear.
Cause
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated or is damaged.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
7-56
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Color streaks appear.
Cause
A problem has occurred in the printer, or the ITB unit has been
deteriorated or is damaged.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
Printed pages have white specks.
Cause 1
Appropriate paper is not being used.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
Cause 2
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 3-2)
Cause 3
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
7
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
Residual images appear on the non-printed areas.
Cause 1
Printing paper is inappropriate.
Remedy
Change the paper and print again. (See "Paper Requirements," on p. 3-2)
Cause 2
This kind of phenomenon may occur depending on the printing
preferences or setting for SP.S-SIZE MODE1.
Remedy
Set SP.S-SIZE MODE1 (See p. 5-72) in the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP
to -1 or -2, and then print again.
However, the printing speed may drop because the printer gives the priority to
the print quality.
Cause 3
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-57
The overall print result is faint.
Cause 1
The setting for the toner density is not appropriate.
Remedy
Adjust DENSITY:"color" (See p. 5-45) in the QUALITY MENU options in the
SETUP menu.
Cause 2
TONER SAVE in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu is set to
ON.
Remedy
Set TONER SAVE (See p. 5-44) in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP
menu to OFF.
The overall print result is dark.
7
Cause 1
The setting for the toner density is not appropriate.
Remedy
Adjust DENSITY:"color" (See p. 5-45) in the QUALITY MENU options in the
SETUP menu.
Cause 2
The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light.
Remedy
Move the printer to a place where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
strong light. Alternatively, move the strong light source away from the printer.
Troubleshooting
The print is uneven.
Cause 1
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
Cause 2
Paper is too moist or too dry.
Remedy
Replace the paper with appropriate one and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
The images appear rough or the data could not be printed properly when printing in
the Super Fine mode.
Cause
The printer could not process the data in the Super Fine mode because it
was too complicated or too large.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing [Online]. However, the printer prints
with the resolution level of the data being lowered.
7-58
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, then print again with the resolution
level being lowered.
Remedy 3 If you want to print in the Super Fine mode, perform a soft reset by pressing
[Reset], and then increase the free space of RAM using the following
procedure.
- Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory that the printer has received will be deleted).
- Install an optional expansion RAM module. (See Getting Started Guide)
A portion of a page is not printed.
Cause 1
The scale factor is incorrect.
Remedy 1 Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box in the printer driver. If the check box is
cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size] and [Output Size]
automatically.
In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], display the [Page Setup]
sheet.
Cause 2
The position of the paper is incorrect.
Remedy
Load the paper properly. (See "Loading Paper in Cassette 1," on p. 3-20,
"Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes)," on p. 3-49)
Cause 3
A document with no margins was printed.
Remedy 1 The printable area of this printer is as follows (10 mm for envelopes if you are
using the UFR II/PCL printer driver). Secure a margin around the data.
When the UFR II printer driver is used: The area except for 5 mm of the edges
of paper
When the PCL printer driver is used:
The area except for 4.23 mm of the
edges of paper
When the PS printer driver is used:
The area except for 4 mm of the edges
of paper
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-59
7
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 Select the [Manual Scaling] check box in the printer driver, then specify an
appropriate scale factor according to the paper size to be used.
In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], display the [Page Setup]
sheet.
Remedy 2 If you are using the PS/UFR II printer driver and select the [Print with Upper Left
of Sheet as Starting Point] check box in the printer driver, you can extend the
printable area to near the edges of the paper.
In order to specify the setting for [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting
Point], display the following dialog box.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Finishing Details] dialog box by clicking
[Finishing Details] in the [Finishing] sheet.
- For PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PS printer driver.
IMPORTANT
Depending on the print data to be printed, the edge of paper may be missing partly
during printing or may blot during color printing.
Toner does not fix well.
Cause 1
Appropriate paper is not being used.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
Cause 2
Toner may not fix onto paper completely depending on the paper type.
Remedy
Set [Gray Compensation] to [On] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Gray Compensation], display the following
dialog box.
Troubleshooting
7
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet, then clicking [Advanced Settings] in the
[Detailed Settings] dialog box.
- For PCL/PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver.
Cause 3
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Remedy 1 If <Ennn-nnnn> is displayed in the display, turn the power OFF, wait for 10
seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. This may clear the
message.
Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear even after applying the Remedy 1, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer for servicing.
The printed colors appear different from those printed by another LBP5970 being
used at the same time.
7-60
Cause 1
The default setting of the toner density of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), or C (Cyan) is somewhat varied.
Remedy
Adjust the toner density of the drum cartridge of K (Black), Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), or C (Cyan). (See "Adjusting the Color Balance," on p. 7-95)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
IMPORTANT
Adjustment of the toner density affects all the color print jobs. Normally, use the printer
with the toner density left to the default value (9).
Cause 2
Any of the four color toner cartridges is running out, or the drum cartridge
has been deteriorated.
Remedy 1 Replace the toner cartridge of the color for which <PREP. "color" TNR> or
<CHG."color" TNR> is indicated with a new one. (See "Replacing Toner
Cartridges," on p. 6-2)
Remedy 2 See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
Data is not printed in correct colors or colored text appears to be blurred due to a
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors".
Cause 1
The drum cartridges are not installed properly.
Remedy
Check if the drum cartridges are installed properly. (See "Replacing Drum
Cartridges," on p. 6-15)
Cause 2
Any of the four color toner cartridges is running out, or the drum cartridge
has been deteriorated.
Remedy 1 Replace the toner cartridge of the color for which <PREP. "color" TNR> or
<CHG."color" TNR> is indicated with a new one. (See "Replacing Toner
Cartridges," on p. 6-2)
Troubleshooting
7
Remedy 2 See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
Cause 3
Appropriate paper is not being used.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 3-2)
The colors of thin lines or filled-in patterns are different from the specified colors, or
do not appear at all.
Cause 1
Some colors cannot be reproduced due to the combination of colors or
patterns.
Remedy 1 Adjust the colors in the application and print again.
Remedy 2 Change the patterns in the application and print again.
Cause 2
The color may appear different depending on the fill-pattern.
Remedy 1 Readjust to a darker color and print again.
Remedy 2 Reload paper to change the feeding direction, then print again.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-61
Fill-patterns are not printed in the correct color (specified color).
Cause
The fill-pattern of the print data and the dither pattern of the printer are
interfering with one another.
Remedy 1 Print again without specifying a fill-pattern in the application.
Remedy 2 Set [Halftones] to [Gradation] or [Color Tone] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Halftones], display the following dialog box.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Detailed Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet.
- For PCL/PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver.
Remedy 3 If you are using UFR II Printer Driver, set [Halftones] to [Error Diffusion].
In order to specify the setting for [Halftones], display the [Detailed Settings]
dialog box by clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet.
The displayed color and printed color differ when printing photos, etc.
Cause
The method for adjusting color on the screen (RGB) and in the printer
(YMC) is different. Therefore, there may be cases when the color on the
screen cannot be printed out exactly as it appears.
Remedy 1 Set [Matching Method] to [Perceptual [Monitor Color Matched]] in the printer
driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Matching Method], display the following sheet.
Troubleshooting
7
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL/PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver.
Remedy 2 When using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, adjust [Gamma] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Gamma], display the following sheet.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Remedy 3 If you are using the PS printer driver, set RGB SRCE PROF. (See p. 5-50) in the
QUALITY MENU options to HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, or
HDTV_gamma_2.4.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
7-62
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Streaks appear in the gradated portions when printing diagrams with gradations.
Cause 1
When you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, gray compensation is
applied to the gray color portions of the "streaks" in the diagrams.
Remedy
Set [Gray Compensation] to [Off] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Gray Compensation], display the following
dialog box.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet, then clicking [Advanced Settings] in the
[Detailed Settings] dialog box.
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Cause 2
When you are using the PS printer driver, TR Normal or TR Photo in
OUTPUT PROFILE is applied to the gray color portions of the "streaks" in
the diagrams.
Remedy 1 Set OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97) in the PS options to NORMAL or PHOTO.
Remedy 2 Set RGB PURE BLACK (See p. 5-98) in the PS options to OFF.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
Cause
When you are using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, a special process may
be applied depending on the line width of the border so that thin lines are
printed clearly.
Remedy 1 Set [Matching Method] to a setting other than [Standard] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Matching Method], display the following sheet.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Remedy 2 Adjust [Gamma] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Gamma], display the following sheet.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-63
7
Troubleshooting
Data is not printed in the correct color (specified color) even after specifying the same
color for a filled-in pattern and its border.
When printing from Windows, streaks appear on the printed paper, diagrams are
printed with their colors partially different from the data, or diagrams that are not filled
in with any color do not appear through another data over them and cannot be printed
in correct color.
Cause
The superimposed areas are misaligned because the document is printed
with its size enlarged or reduced, or any complicated superimpose
process is specified in the application.
Remedy
Specify the following settings in the PCL 6/UFR II printer driver.
- For the UFR II printer driver: In the [Quality] sheet, click [Details], and then set
[Rendering Rate] to [24 BPP].
- For PCL 6 Printer Driver: Specify the same setting as for the UFR II printer
driver. For more details, see Help of the PCL 6 printer driver.
Colored text appears to be blurred.
Cause
A bold font is being used for the colored text.
Remedy 1 Print again with thinner fonts.
Remedy 2 Set [Matching Method] to [Perceptual [Monitor Color Matched]] in the printer
driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Matching Method], display the [Matching]
sheet by selecting the [Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet,
and then clicking [Color Settings].
Troubleshooting
7
Black text appears to be blurred.
Cause
When you are using the PS printer driver, black text is printed with the
toner of Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (Bk).
Remedy 1 Set PURE BLACK TEXT (See p. 5-98) in the PS options to ON.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
Remedy 2 Set OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97) in the PS options to TR Normal or TR
Photo.
Remedy 3 Set RGB PURE BLACK (See p. 5-98) in the PS options to ON.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
7-64
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Thin lines and thin text blot.
Cause
When you were using the PS printer driver, certain thin lines and text were
subject to constraint of an internal process.
Remedy 1 Adjust the colors in the application and print again. (See the instruction manual
supplied with your application)
Remedy 2 Make the lines bold or use a bold font for the text, then print again.
Remedy 3 Set B & W HALFTONES (See p. 5-100) or COLOR HALFTONES (See p. 5-101)
in the PS options to ERR DIFFUSION or RESOLUTION.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
Remedy 4 If you are using Illustrator 8.0 or later for Windows as an application, set the
setting for [Bitmap Print] to off. (See the instruction manual supplied with
Illustrator)
Remedy 5 Set OUTPUT PROFILE (See p. 5-97) in the PS options to TR Normal or TR
Photo.
If [Collate] is specified when data is printed from the PostScript application, the
printed colors are different from the original colors of the data.
Data was printed with [Collate] specified from the PS printer driver when
an optional hard disk was not installed. (The RGB-based color model was
used via GDI.)
Remedy 1 Set [Finishing] to [Group] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Finishing], display the [Finishing] sheet.
NOTE
If an optional hard disk is not installed, you cannot print data without changing the
original colors with [Collate] specified from the PostScript application.
Remedy 2 Install an optional hard disk.
Streaks, flaws, or unevenness of gloss appears in the areas dense in color.
Cause
The drum cartridge has been deteriorated or is damaged, or a problem
has occurred in the fixing unit.
Remedy
See "When Any Print Defect Appears" (p. 7-69) and solve the problem.
NOTE
The samples are provided in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91).
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-65
7
Troubleshooting
Cause
The back of the printed paper has smudge marks.
Cause
The size of the print data was larger than that of the loaded paper.
Remedy
Check if the size of the print data matches that of the loaded paper.
Square areas that cannot be seen on the display appear around lines or text and are
printed in a different color from the other areas.
Cause
A process that is different from the specified halftone process or color
process may be applied depending on the operating system or
application.
Remedy 1 When using the UFR II printer driver, set [Gray Compensation] to [Off].
In order to specify the setting for [Gray Compensation], display the following
dialog box.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet, then clicking [Advanced Settings] in the
[Detailed Settings] dialog box.
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Remedy 2 When using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, set [Halftones] to [High Resolution],
[Resolution], [Gradation], or [Color Tone].
In order to specify the setting for [Halftones], display the following dialog box.
7
Troubleshooting
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Detailed Settings] dialog box by clicking
[Details] in the [Quality] sheet.
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Remedy 3 When using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, set [Matching Mode] to [Gamma
Adjustment].
In order to specify the setting for [Matching Mode], display the following sheet.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
Remedy 4 When using the PCL/UFR II printer driver, set [Matching Mode] to [Printer
Default], and then specify the same setting for TEXT, GRAPHICS, and IMAGE
in MATCHING METHOD (See p. 5-86).
In order to specify the setting for [Matching Mode], display the following sheet.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Matching] sheet by selecting the
[Manual Color Settings] check box in the [Quality] sheet, and then clicking
[Color Settings].
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
7-66
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Remedy 5 If you are using the PS printer driver, set B & W HALFTONES (See p. 5-100) or
COLOR HALFTONES (See p. 5-101) in the PS options to ERR DIFFUSION,
RESOLUTION, or GRADATION.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
Remedy 6
Set RGB PURE BLACK (See p. 5-98) in the PS options to OFF.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details, see
Help of the PS printer driver.
Colored lines and text come out faint.
Cause
Thin lines or text are being used.
Remedy
Select the [Prioritize Printing of Colored Lines and Text] check box in the printer
driver.
In order to specify the settings for [Prioritize Printing of Colored Lines and Text],
display the following dialog boxes.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet, then clicking [Advanced Settings] in the
[Detailed Settings] dialog box.
- For PCL/PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL/PS printer driver.
The printing position is skewed slightly depending on the color to be printed.
Cause
Although laser printers are manufactured with technology of high
precision, a phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors" may be slightly
conspicuous depending on the print image. Please note that this is due to
the structure of laser printers, but not due to printer malfunction.
Remedy 1 Adjust the phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors" in CALIBRATION (See p.
5-106) in the UTILITY menu.
Remedy 2 If [Gray Compensation] in the printer driver is set to [Off], poor print quality (a
phenomenon of "Out-of-Register Colors") may be alleviated.
In order to specify the setting for [Gray Compensation], display the following
dialog box.
- For the UFR II printer driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Details] in the [Quality] sheet, then clicking [Advanced Settings] in the
[Detailed Settings] dialog box.
- For PCL Printer Driver: See Help of the PCL printer driver.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
7-67
7
Troubleshooting
NOTE
When using the PS printer driver, you can also specify the same setting using OUTPUT
PROFILE (See p. 5-97) in the printer's control panel. When doing so, set OUTPUT
PROFILE to TR Normal or TR Photo.
Gradation in the black or gray parts of the image does not appear smooth (the color
changes stand out).
Cause
Data in black or gray was printed with the setting for RGB PURE BLACK
enabled.
Remedy
Set RGB PURE BLACK (See p. 5-98) in the PS options to OFF.
Also, you can specify the same setting in the PS printer driver. For more details,
see Help of the PS printer driver.
IMPORTANT
When printing is performed with the setting for RGB PURE BLACK set to OFF, data in
black or gray is printed with 4-color toner of CMYK. Therefore, the data may be printed in
color, even if all the pages are in black and white.
Gray data appears grainy.
Cause
Data in black or gray was printed with the settings for RGB PURE BLACK
and OUTPUT PROFILE enabled.
Remedy
Set RGB PURE BLACK (See p. 5-98) to OFF, then set OUTPUT PROFILE (See
p. 5-97) to NORMAL in the PS options.
IMPORTANT
When printing is performed with the setting for RGB PURE BLACK set to OFF, data in
black or gray is printed with 4-color toner of CMYK. Therefore, the data may be printed in
color, even if all the pages are in black and white.
Troubleshooting
7
7-68
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
When Any Print Defect Appears
When any print defects such as those in "Print Defect Samples" (See p. 7-91)
appears, perform the following procedures in number order to solve the problem.
1. Clean the inside of the printer, then perform calibration. (See p. 7-69)
2. Print Test Chart 1. (See p. 7-87)
3. Print Test Chart 2. (See p. 7-89)
IMPORTANT
If any error message or service call is displayed in the display on the control panel, see
"Message List" (p. 7-23) and "Service Call Display" (p. 7-45).
Cleaning the Inside of the Printer
If any print defects as those in "Print Defect Samples" (p. 7-91) appears on the
printout result, clean the inside of the printer and perform calibration using the
following procedure.
WARNING
There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-69
Troubleshooting
7
Precautions on Cleaning the Inside of the Printer
CAUTION
The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make
sure the fixing unit is completely cool before cleaning the inside of the printer.
Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
IMPORTANT
• When handling a drum cartridge, hold the blue tabs (A) properly as shown in the figure.
Do not place it vertically or upside-down.
(A)
Troubleshooting
7
(A)
7-70
When Any Print Defect Appears
• When removing or installing the drum cartridges, work from the left side of the printer as
shown in the figure.
• Be sure not to touch the high-voltage contacts (A) shown in the figure. This may result in
damage to the printer.
- Right side of the ITB unit; Inside of the printer
Troubleshooting
7
(A)
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-71
- Drum cartridge guides
(A)
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
Troubleshooting
7
7-72
When Any Print Defect Appears
2
Open the front cover.
While pressing the lever on the right side of the front cover, open the front cover
toward you.
IMPORTANT
Before opening the front cover, make sure that the multi-purpose tray and the
paper cassette of the printer are closed.
Tilt the fixing unit toward you.
7
While pressing the green lock release buttons (A) on the left and right side of the
fixing unit a, hold the tabs (B) and tilt the fixing unit toward you b as shown in
the figure.
(A)
a
a
(B)
b
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-73
Troubleshooting
3
4
Open the top cover.
Press the blue lock release button of the top cover.
While holding the lever of the top cover, open the top cover.
Troubleshooting
7
7-74
When Any Print Defect Appears
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the transfer belt of the ITB unit and the ITB unit cover. If the transfer
belt is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. If the
print quality deteriorates due to the transfer belt of the ITB unit being touched, see
"Cleaning the Transfer Belt of the ITB Unit" (p. 6-60) and clean the transfer belt of
the ITB unit. The transfer belt of the ITB unit is supplied with a function that cleans
itself, therefore, you do not need to clean the belt even when toner is on it.
Do not touch these parts.
Slide the blue lock release lever (A) of all the drum cartridges
to the position of " " to release the locks of the drum
cartridges.
Slide the lock release lever until the triangular mark on the lock release lever
aligns with the triangular mark on the label.
(A)
Align the triangular marks.
When Any Print Defect Appears
7
Troubleshooting
5
7-75
6
Remove all the drum cartridges.
Remove the drum cartridge by holding the blue tab (A) as shown in the figure.
(A)
(A)
Troubleshooting
7
IMPORTANT
Place the removed drum cartridge into the original protective bag immediately.
7
Remove the cleaning brush on the right side of the inside of
the printer.
Raise the rear end of the cleaning brush a, pull it out sideways b.
a
b
7-76
When Any Print Defect Appears
8
Insert the cleaning brush into the slot.
Insert the cleaning brush so that the triangular mark (A) on the brush aligns with
that on the printer.
(A)
Slide the cleaning brush from side to side along the slot
several times.
When you slide the cleaning brush a, the cover opens automatically b.
7
b
Troubleshooting
9
a
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-77
10 Pull the cleaning brush out of the slot.
Repeat Step 8 to 10 to clean the slots of each color.
11 Put the cleaning brush back to its original position.
b
Troubleshooting
7
a
7-78
When Any Print Defect Appears
12 Before installing the drum cartridge, align the triangular mark
on the lock release lever (A) with the triangular mark of "
on the label as shown in the figure.
(A)
"
Align the triangular
marks.
When installing the drum cartridge, hold the blue tabs as shown in the figure.
Troubleshooting
7
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-79
13 Make sure that the levers (A) near the drum cartridge guides
on the both sides are in the proper position as shown in the
figure.
(A)
(A)
If the levers are not in the proper position, the drum cartridges cannot be
installed. Raise the levers to the proper position as shown in the figure.
7
Troubleshooting
- Incorrect position
7-80
When Any Print Defect Appears
- Correct position
14 Install the drum cartridge in the printer.
Insert the drum cartridge firmly until it touches the back of the printer.
Insert the projections (A) on each side of the drum cartridge into the drum
cartridge guides as shown in the figure.
- Drum cartridge guides (left)
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
7
Troubleshooting
Black
(A)
- Drum cartridge guides (right)
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
(A)
IMPORTANT
Insert the drum cartridges firmly until they touch the back of the printer. If the drum
cartridges are not installed firmly, this may result in poor print quality.
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-81
15 Make sure that the levers near the drum cartridge guides on
the both sides are in the proper position as shown in the
figure.
16 Make sure that the labels on the projections of the drum
cartridge are visible.
Troubleshooting
7
Make sure that all of the three colors
on the label are visible.
If you cannot see any of the three colors on the label from the front, take out the
drum cartridge once, turn the projection (A) in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks and stops, and then reinstall the cartridge.
(A)
7-82
When Any Print Defect Appears
17 Slide the blue lock release lever (A) to the position of "
" to
lock the drum cartridge.
Slide the lock release lever until the triangular mark on the lock release lever
aligns with the triangular mark on the label.
(A)
Align the triangular
marks.
18 Close the top cover.
(B)
(A)
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-83
7
Troubleshooting
Close the top cover of the printer while holding it by the lever (A) gently.
If you close the top cover forcefully, the ITB unit cover (B) may not move back to
the original position, and this may result in damage to the printer.
By pressing the portion indicated "PUSH", close the top cover firmly until it
cannot be pressed down any further as shown in the figure.
19 By holding the lever as shown in the figure, make sure that
the top cover does not open.
Troubleshooting
7
IMPORTANT
Close the top cover firmly until it cannot be pressed down any further. If the top
cover is not closed firmly, this may result in poor print quality.
7-84
When Any Print Defect Appears
20 While holding the tabs (A), move the fixing unit back to its
original position a, and then press the tabs on the both sides
as shown in the figure b.
(A)
a
b
7
Troubleshooting
b
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-85
21 Close the front cover.
While supporting the front cover a, push and close the front cover with both
hands as shown in the figure b.
a
b
Troubleshooting
7
After cleaning the inside of the printer, perform calibration using the following
procedure.
CAUTION
Push the front portion of the front cover to close it as shown in the figure.
If closing the front cover by the levers on the both sides, you may catch
your fingers, resulting in personal injury.
Online
22 Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
7-86
When Any Print Defect Appears
Utility
23 Press [Utility].
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
Utility
→
24 Select CALIBRATION using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
CALIBRATION
→
02 CALIBRATING
OK
Calibration is performed. The Ready indicator and Online indicator blink during
the calibration.
After completing the calibration, the message <00 READY> appears in the
display.
NOTE
Calibration takes approximately 50 seconds.
25 After performing calibration, print the print data in which print
If the print defect problem is solved, you can use the printer as normal. If the print
defect problem is not solved, go on to perform "Printing Test Chart 1" (See p.
7-87).
Printing Test Chart 1
Print Test Chart 1 when checking if the poor print quality is due to any problem in
the drum cartridges. Print Test Chart 1 using the following procedure.
NOTE
Test Chart 1 is printed on 8 sheets of A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.
Online
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-87
7
Troubleshooting
defect appeared again.
Utility
2
Press [Utility].
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
Utility
3
→
Select TEST CHART 1 using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
TEST CHART 1
→
EXECUTING
OK
TEST CHART 1
(Approx. 1 sec.)
→
Test Chart 1 is printed.
4
Check if any flaws, unevenness, or streaks appear on the
printed Test Chart 1.
- When problems (flaws, uneven prints, streaks) do not appear on the printed
paper
Troubleshooting
7
7-88
When Any Print Defect Appears
If there is no print defect (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appearing on every sheet of
Test Chart 1, go on to perform "Printing Test Chart 2" (See p. 7-89).
- When problems (flaws, uneven prints, streaks) appear on the printed paper
Uneven print
Uneven print
Flaws
White streak
If you find any print defects (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appearing on the sheets of
all the colors of Test Chart 1, and if all of those are at the same areas or their features
are all the same, go on to perform "Printing Test Chart 2" (See p. 7-89).
If you find any print defects (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appearing only on the
sheets of certain colors of Test Chart 1, and if all of those are at the same areas or their
features are all the same, apply the following remedies.
- If white streaks appear on Test Chart 1: Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Printing Test Chart 2
Print Test Chart 2 when checking if the poor print quality is due to any problem in
the fixing unit. Print Test Chart 2 using the following procedure.
NOTE
Test Chart 2 is printed on a sheet of A4 size paper. Load A4 size paper.
Online
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press [Online].
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-89
7
Troubleshooting
- If white streaks do not appear on Test Chart 1: Replace the drum cartridge of the color
in which the print defect (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appeared. For details on the
procedure for replacing the drum cartridges, see "Storing Drum Cartridges," on p.
6-42. If the print defect problem is not solved even after replacing the drum cartridge,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Utility
2
Press [Utility].
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
Utility
3
→
Select TEST CHART 2 using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
TEST CHART 2
→
EXECUTING
OK
TEST CHART 2
(Approx. 1 sec.)
→
Test Chart 2 is printed.
4
Check if any flaws, unevenness, or streaks appear on the
printed Test Chart 2.
- When problems (flaws, uneven prints, streaks) do not appear on the printed
paper
Troubleshooting
7
7-90
When Any Print Defect Appears
If there is no print defect (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appearing on Test Chart 2,
there is a possibility that some problem has occurred in the printer. Contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
- When problems (flaws, uneven prints, streaks) appear on the printed paper
Flaw
Streak
Uneven print
If there are any print defects (flaws, uneven print, or streaks) appearing on Test Chart 2,
replace the fixing unit. For details on the procedure for replacing the fixing unit, see
"Replacing the Fixing Unit," on p. 6-43. If the print defect problem is not solved even
after replacing the fixing unit, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Print Defect Samples
7
Troubleshooting
■ Nothing is printed on the paper, but the paper is filled with a certain color.
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-91
■ White streaks appear.
■ Color streaks appear.
Troubleshooting
7
7-92
When Any Print Defect Appears
■ Printed pages have white specks.
■ Residual images appear on the non-printed areas.
Troubleshooting
7
When Any Print Defect Appears
7-93
■ The print is uneven.
■ Streaks, flaws, or unevenness of gloss appears in the areas dense in color.
Troubleshooting
7
7-94
When Any Print Defect Appears
Adjusting the Color Balance
When all the printout results appear reddish or bluish, or the color balance is not
appropriate, you can correct the colors by adjusting each toner density of C (Cyan),
M (Magenta), Y (Yellow), K (Black). The toner density can be specified in the range
of 1 to 16 and is set to the standard density (9) before shipment.
When adjusting the toner density using the control panel, use the following
procedure.
IMPORTANT
While adjusting the toner density little by little, print the defective print data from the
computer and check the printout results. If you cannot adjust the toner density, reset the
density to the default value (9), and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
1
Press [Settings].
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Utility
2
7
→
Select QUALITY MENU using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Settings
OK
QUALITY MENU
→
RESOLUTION
→
The options for QUALITY MENU are displayed.
Utility
Settings
OK
3
Select DENSITY of the target color using [
press [OK].
DENSITY:BLACK
→
=9
→
] and [
], then
The toner density setting is displayed.
Adjusting the Color Balance
7-95
Troubleshooting
Settings
Utility
Settings
OK
4
Select the toner density using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
The toner density is lightest when 1 is selected and densest when 16 is selected.
6
→
=6
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the value, and the density is specified.
Troubleshooting
7
7-96
Adjusting the Color Balance
Appendix
8
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the contents of the various lists, printer specifications, and index.
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Typeface Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
PS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Symbol Sets Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Character Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8-1
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
This section describes the lists common to all the settings in the print mode.
IMPORTANT
The following list is a sample. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by
your printer.
Configuration Page
The capacity of the built-in RAM and the
settings for the common printing environment
are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] to display CONFIG.PAGE.
4. Press [OK] to output the page.
Appendix
8
8-2
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
Network Status Print
Prints the version number and the settings of
the print server equipped with this printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] to display NW STATUS PRINT.
4. Press [OK] to output the page.
Printing Position Adjustment Print
Displays the current printing positions of each
paper source. Adjust the printing positions
referring to this print. For more details, see
"Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 6-62.
1. Press [Feeder Selection].
] and [
8
], then
Appendix
2. Select PAPER SOURCE using [
press [OK].
3. Select the paper source that you want to check the
printing position using [ ] and [ ], then press
[OK].
4. Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is
not online, press [Online].
5. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
6. Display PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
7. Press [OK] to output the page.
].
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
8-3
Page Count List (Depending on the printer you are using, it
cannot print this list.)
The number of [Print Total]* is printed on a
departmental basis.
* [Print Total] indicates the number of printed surfaces. If you
perform 2-sided printing on a sheet of paper, the number of
the printed surfaces is two.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] to display PAGE COUNT LIST.
4. Press [OK] to print.
Appendix
8
8-4
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
This section describes the lists common to certain settings in the print mode.
IMPORTANT
The following list is a sample. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by
your printer.
PCL Fonts List
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL
mode is printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] to display PCL UTILITY.
4. Press [OK] to display Exclusive Utilities for PCL.
5. Press [ ] to display FONTS LIST.
6. Press [OK] to output the page.
Appendix
8
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
8-5
PS Configuration Page
The settings of the PS menu are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
3. Press [ ] to display PS UTILITY.
4. Press [OK] to display Exclusive Utilities for PS.
5. Press [ ] to display CONFIG.PAGE.
6. Press [OK] to print.
PS Fonts List
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PS
mode is printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press [Utility] to display the UTILITY menu.
8
Appendix
3. Press [ ] to display PS UTILITY.
4. Press [OK] to display Exclusive Utilities for PS.
5. Press [ ] to display FONTS LIST.
6. Press [OK] to print.
8-6
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
Typeface Samples
The fonts lists printed from the UTILITY menu are a comprehensive listing of all
fonts currently available. The listing contains the names and print samples of the
fonts stored on the printer.
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Courier
CG Times
CG Times Bold
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Omega
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic
Coronet
8
Appendix
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Univers Medium
Univers Bold
Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Typeface Samples
8-7
Garamond Kursiv Halbfeet
Marigold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
Arial
Arial Bold
Arial Italic
Arial Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Helvetica
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Oblique
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Palatino Roman
Palatino Bold
8
Appendix
Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Times Roman
8-8
Typeface Samples
Times Bold
Times Italic
Times Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Symbol
SymbolPS
Wingdings
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Courier Bold
Courier Italic
Courier Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
CourierPS
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold Oblique
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
Line Printer (10U)
8
Appendix
Line Printer (8U)
Line Printer (0N)
Line Printer (11U)
Line Printer (12U)
Line Printer (1U)
Line Printer (2N)
Line Printer (5N)
Line Printer (6N)
Line Printer (9N)
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)
OCR A
OCR B
Typeface Samples
8-9
PS Fonts
NOTE
127 PS fonts for Macintosh are included in the User Manual CD-ROM.
AlbertusMT
AlbertusMT Italic
AlbertusMT Light
AntiqueOlive Bold
AntiqueOlive Compact
AntiqueOlive Italic
AntiqueOlive Roman
AntiqueOliveCE Bold
AntiqueOliveCE Compact
AntiqueOliveCE Italic
AntiqueOliveCE Roman
Apple Chancery
Apple ChanceryCE
Arial BoldItalicMT
Arial BoldMT
Arial ItalicMT
ArialCE
8
ArialCE BoldItalic
Appendix
ArialCE Bold
ArialMT
ArialCE Italic
AvantGarde Book
AvantGarde BookOblique
AvantGarde Demi
AvantGarde DemiOblique
AvantGardeCE Book
AvantGardeCE BookOblique
AvantGardeCE Demi
AvantGardeCE DemiOblique
Bodoni
8-10
Typeface Samples
Bodoni Bold
Bodoni BoldItalic
Bodoni Italic
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni PosterCompressed
BodoniCE
BodoniCE Bold
BodoniCE BoldItalic
BodoniCE Italic
BodoniCE Poster
BodoniCE PosterCompressed
Bookman Demi
Bookman DemiItalic
Bookman Light
Bookman LightItalic
BookmanCE Demi
BookmanCE DemiItalic
BookmanCE Light
BookmanCE LightItalic
Candid
Chicago
Chicago CE
Clarendon
8
Clarendon Bold
Appendix
Clarendon Light
ClarendonCE
ClarendonCE Bold
ClarendonCE Light
CooperBlack
CooperBlack Italic
Typeface Samples
8-11
Copperplate ThirtyThreeBC
Copperplate ThirtyTwoBC
Coronet Regular
CoronetCE Regular
Courier
Courier Bold
Courier BoldOblique
Courier Oblique
CourierCE
CourierCE Bold
CourierCE BoldOblique
CourierCE Oblique
Eurostile
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile BoldExtendedTwo
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
EurostileCE
EurostileCE Bold
EurostileCE BoldExtendedTwo
EurostileCE ExtendedTwo
Geneva
GenevaCE
GillSans
8
GillSans Bold
Appendix
GillSans BoldCondensed
GillSans BoldItalic
GillSans Condensed
GillSans ExtraBold
GillSans Italic
GillSans Light
8-12
Typeface Samples
GillSans LightItalic
GillSansCE Bold
GillSansCE BoldCondensed
GillSansCE BoldItalic
GillSansCE Condensed
GillSansCE ExtraBold
GillSansCE Italic
GillSansCE Light
GillSansCE LightItalic
GillSansCE Roman
Goudy
Goudy Bold
Goudy BoldItalic
Goudy ExtraBold
Goudy Italic
Helvetica
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica BoldOblique
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed BoldObl
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Bold
8
Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique
Appendix
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Oblique
HelveticaCE
HelveticaCE Bold
HelveticaCE BoldOblique
Typeface Samples
8-13
HelveticaCE Cond
HelveticaCE CondBold
HelveticaCE CondBoldObl
HelveticaCE CondObl
HelveticaCE Narrow
HelveticaCE NarrowBold
HelveticaCE Narrow BoldOblique
HelveticaCE NarrowOblique
HelveticaCE Oblique
HoeflerText Black
HoeflerText BlackItalic
HoeflerText Italic
HoeflerText Ornaments
HoeflerText Regular
HoeflerTextCE Black
HoeflerTextCE BlackItalic
HoeflerTextCE Italic
HoeflerTextCE Regular
JoannaMT
JoannaMT Bold
JoannaMT BoldItalic
JoannaMT Italic
8
JoannaMTCE Bold
Appendix
JoannaMTCE
JoannaMTCE Italic
JoannaMTCE BoldItalic
LetterGothic
LetterGothic Bold
LetterGothic BoldSlanted
LetterGothic Slanted
8-14
Typeface Samples
LetterGothicCE
LetterGothicCE Bold
LetterGothicCE BoldSlanted
LetterGothicCE Slanted
LubalinGraph Book
LubalinGraph BookOblique
LubalinGraph Demi
LubalinGraph DemiOblique
LubalinGraphCE Book
LubalinGraphCE BookOblique
LubalinGraphCE Demi
LubalinGraphCE DemiOblique
Marigold
Monaco
MonacoCE
MonaLisa Recut
NewCenturySchlbk Bold
NewCenturySchlbk BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbk Italic
NewCenturySchlbk Roman
NewCenturySchlbkCE Bold
NewCenturySchlbkCE BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbkCE Italic
NewCenturySchlbkCE Roman
8
Appendix
NewYork
NewYorkCE
Optima
Optima Bold
Optima BoldItalic
Optima Italic
Typeface Samples
8-15
OptimaCE Bold
OptimaCE BoldItalic
OptimaCE Italic
OptimaCE Roman
Oxford
Palatino Bold
Palatino BoldItalic
Palatino Italic
Palatino Roman
PalatinoCE Bold
PalatinoCE BoldItalic
PalatinoCE Italic
PalatinoCE Roman
StempelGaramond Bold
StempelGaramond BoldItalic
StempelGaramond Italic
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramondCE Bold
StempelGaramondCE BoldItalic
StempelGaramondCE Italic
StempelGaramondCE Roman
Symbol
Taffy
8
Times Bold
Appendix
Times BoldItalic
Times Italic
Times Roman
TimesCE Bold
TimesCE BoldItalic
TimesCE Italic
8-16
Typeface Samples
TimesCE Roman
TimesNewRomanCE
TimesNewRomanCE Bold
TimesNewRomanCE BoldItalic
TimesNewRomanCE Italic
TimesNewRomanPS BoldItalicMT
TlmesNewRomanPS BoldMT
TimesNewRomanPS ItalicMT
TimesNewRomanPSMT
Univers
Univers Bold
Univers BoldExt
Univers BoldExtObl
Univers BoldOblique
Univers Condensed
Univers CondensedBold
Univers CondensedBoldOblique
Univers CondensedOblique
Univers Extended
Univers ExtendedObl
Univers Light
Univers LightOblique
Univers Oblique
8
UniversCE Bold
Appendix
UniversCE BoldExt
UniversCE BoldExtObl
UniversCE BoldOblique
UniversCE Condensed
UniversCE CondensedBold
UniversCE CondensedBoldOblique
Typeface Samples
8-17
UniversCE CondensedOblique
UniversCE Extended
UniversCE ExtendedObl
UniversCE Light
UniversCE LightOblique
UniversCE Medium
UniversCE Oblique
Wingdings Regular
ZapfChancery MediumItalic
ZapfChanceryCE MediumItalic
ZapfDingbats
Appendix
8
8-18
Typeface Samples
Symbol Sets Supported
This section provides a list to the character code tables for the characters in each
symbol set.
Character Code Tables
■ Desktop (7J: 234)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-19
■ ISO 4: United Kingdom (1E: 37)
■ ISO 6: ASCII (0U: 21)
Appendix
8
8-20
Symbol Sets Supported
■ ISO 11: Swedish (0S: 19)
■ ISO 15: Italian (0I: 9)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-21
■ ISO 17: Spanish (2S: 83)
■ ISO 21: German (1G: 39)
Appendix
8
8-22
Symbol Sets Supported
■ ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian (0D: 4)
■ ISO 69: French (1F: 38)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-23
■ ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (0N: 14)
■ ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 (2N: 78)
Appendix
8
8-24
Symbol Sets Supported
■ ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 (5N: 179)
■ ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 (6N: 206)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-25
■ ISO 8859/15 Latin 9 (9N: 302)
■ ITC Zapf Dingbats MS (14L: 460)
Appendix
8
8-26
Symbol Sets Supported
■ Legal (1U: 53)
■ Math-8 (8M: 269)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-27
■ MC Text (12J: 682)
■ Microsoft Publishing (6J: 202)
Appendix
8
8-28
Symbol Sets Supported
■ OCR-A (0O: 15)
■ OCR-B (1O: 47)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-29
■ PC-8 (10U: 341)
■ PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (11U: 373)
Appendix
8
8-30
Symbol Sets Supported
■ PC-8 Greek (14G: 455)
■ PC-775 (26U: 853)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-31
■ PC-850 (12U: 405)
■ PC-852 (17U: 565)
Appendix
8
8-32
Symbol Sets Supported
■ PC-858 (13U: 437)
■ PC-860 (20U: 661)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-33
■ PC-865 (25U: 821)
■ PC-1004 (9J: 298)
Appendix
8
8-34
Symbol Sets Supported
■ PC-Turkish (9T: 308)
■ Pi Font (15U: 501)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-35
■ PS Math (5M: 173)
■ PS Text (10J: 330)
Appendix
8
8-36
Symbol Sets Supported
■ Roman-8 (8U: 277)
■ Roman-9 (4U: 149)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-37
■ Symbol (19M: 621)
■ Unicode (18N: 590)
Appendix
8
8-38
Symbol Sets Supported
■ Ventura International (13J: 426)
■ Ventura Math (6M: 205)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-39
■ Ventura US (14J: 458)
■ Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (9U: 309)
Appendix
8
8-40
Symbol Sets Supported
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (19U: 629)
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (9E: 293)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-41
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (5T: 180)
■ Windows Baltic (19L: 620)
Appendix
8
8-42
Symbol Sets Supported
■ Wingdings (579L: 18540)
Appendix
8
Symbol Sets Supported
8-43
Specifications
Hardware Specifications
Type
Desktop Page Printer
Printing method
Electrophoto Method (On-demand fixing)
Resolution
1200dpi (Super Fine Mode)/600dpi (Fine Mode)
Printing speed
Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
When printing A4 continuously
Black and white printing: 32 pages/min.
Color printing: 30 pages/min.
* Print speed may drop in stages depending on
the paper size, paper type, print copies, and
the settings of the fixing mode. (This is
because the safety function that prevents
damage caused by heat becomes active.)
Warm up time (Time from power
on to printer ready)
30 seconds or less
* May vary depending on the use conditions
(such as the availability of the optional
accessories and installation environment).
Recovery time (Time from sleep
mode to printer ready)
- During Printer Power Save Mode
(Power Save Mode 2): 3 seconds or less*1*2
- During Deep Sleep Mode
(Power Save Mode 3): 30 seconds or less
*1 This is the default setting.
*2 30 seconds or less when 8 hours or more have
elapsed after the printer entered Printer Power
Save Mode (Power Save Mode 2)
First print time
When printing A4 size paper
Black and white: approx. 7.5 seconds
Color: approx. 9 seconds
* May vary depending on the output
environment.
Appendix
8
8-44
Specifications
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Cassette 3
(Optional)
Cassette 4
(Optional)
Paper size
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal,
Letter, Executive
Paper capacity: approx. 230 sheets (80 g/m2)
- Standard sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal,
Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K
- Custom sizes
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width
210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 210.0 to 431.8 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only
when UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 210.0 to
297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
Paper capacity: approx. 550 sheets (80 g/m2)
- Standard sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12 x 18, Ledger (11 x 17),
Legal, Statement, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K,
Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope C5,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope B5
- Custom sizes
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width
Multi-purpose
98.0 to 320.0 mm; Length 139.7 to 457.2 mm
Tray
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only
when UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 139.7 to
297.0 mm; Length 139.7 to 297.0 mm
- Long size paper
Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 457.3 to 1,200.0
mm
Paper capacity: approx. 90 sheets (80 g/m2)
Automatic 2-sided printing
- Standard sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal,
Statement, Letter, Executive, 8K, 16K
- Custom sizes
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width
210.0 to 312.0 mm; Length 210.0 to 431.8 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only
when UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 210.0 to
297.0 mm; Length 148.0 to 297.0 mm
Paper output
Face down
Output capacity
Approx. 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Lwad (declared A-weighted sound power level
(1B = 10dB))
During standby: Background noise level
Noise (Declared noise emission in
During operation: 7.0 B or less
accordance with ISO 9296)
Sound pressure level (Bystander position)
During standby: Background noise level
During operation: 53.0 dB (A) or less
Specifications
8-45
8
Appendix
Cassette 1
Operating environment
(Printer unit only)
Operating environment temperature: 10 to 30 °C
(50 to 86 °F)
Humidity: 10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Power supply
220 -240 V (± 10 %) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
Power consumption (at
temperature of 20 °C (68 °F))
Average during operation: approx. 645 W
Average during standby: approx. 36 W
Average during Panel Off Mode (Power Save
Mode 1): approx. 35 W
Average during Printer Power Save Mode (Power
Save Mode 2): approx. 16 W*
Average during Deep Sleep Mode (Power Save
Mode 3): approx. 1 W
Maximum: 1,495 W or less
* This is the default setting.
Appendix
8
8-46
Specifications
- Canon Toner Cartridge (Black)
Printable pages: approx. 10,000 pages*
* Canon genuine toner cartridges, and for A4 size
paper at 5 % page coverage with the default print
density setting
Consumables
Drum cartridge
Fixing unit
- Canon Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
- Canon Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
- Canon Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
Printable pages: approx. 6,000 pages*
* Canon genuine toner cartridges, and for A4 size
paper at 5 % page coverage with the default print
density setting
- Canon Drum Cartridge (Black)
- Canon Drum Cartridge (Yellow)
- Canon Drum Cartridge (Magenta)
- Canon Drum Cartridge (Cyan)
Printable pages: approx. 50,000 pages*1*2*3
*1 The numbers of the pages are estimated when
printing in the following conditions.
Canon genuine drum cartridges; Paper size: A4;
Paper type: Plain paper; Printing ratio: 5 %; Print
density: the default; Continuous/1-sided Printing
*2 When printing at interval of 2 sheets (2-sheet
intermittent printing), the lifetime of the drum
cartridges (Canon Genuine Drum Cartridges) for this
printer is approximately 45,000 pages for the black
toner and approximately 40,000 pages for each color
toner. These values are the number of pages that
you can print when performing only color printing.
Even when printing in black and white, each of the
color drum cartridges is consumed. Therefore, when
printing in black and white a lot, the lifetime of each
of the color drum cartridges may be half the number
of pages you can print.
*3 Depending on the printing preferences or printing
environment such as the intermittency of printing,
paper types, paper sizes, and 1-sided / 2-sided
printing, the number of pages that you can print may
be half this number.
- Canon Fixing Unit
Printable pages: approx. 150,000* pages
* Canon genuine fixing unit, and for 1-sided printing
on A4 size paper
Specifications
8-47
8
Appendix
Toner cartridge
Consumables
Weight
Appendix
8
8-48
Specifications
Waste toner
container
- Canon Waste Toner Container*1*2
*1 The waste toner container (Canon Genuine Waste
Toner Container) for this printer will be filled to
capacity after printing approximately 6,200 pages.
The numbers of the pages are estimated when
printing in the following conditions.
Paper size: A4; Paper type: Plain paper; Printing
ratio: 5 %; Print density: the default; 2-sheet
intermittent/1-sided Printing
*2 Depending on the printing preferences or printing
environment such as the intermittency of printing,
paper types, paper sizes, and 1-sided / 2-sided
printing, the number of pages that you can print may
be half this number.
Printer
unit and included
parts
Printer
(excluding the toner cartridges and drum cartridges)
.....................................................approx. 48.5 kg
Toner cartridge (Black) ..................approx. 0.4 kg
Toner cartridge
(Yellow, Magenta, Cyan) ................approx. 0.3 kg
Drum cartridge...............................approx. 1.9 kg
Fixing unit ......................................approx. 2.9 kg
Waste toner container....................approx. 0.2 kg
Toner cartridge (Black)
(Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge)
.......................................................approx. 0.4
Toner cartridge (Cyan, Yellow, Magenta)
(Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge)
.......................................................approx. 0.3
Consumables,
Drum cartridge
periodical
(Canon Genuine Drum Cartridge)
replacement parts,
.......................................................approx. 1.9
and optional
Fixing unit
accessories
(Canon Genuine Fixing Unit) .........approx. 2.9
Waste toner container
(Canon Genuine Waste Toner Container)
.......................................................approx. 0.2
PAPER FEEDER PF-98B
(including the cassette)...................approx. 11
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
Controller Specifications
CPU
R4000 series (400 MHz), MIPS64 series (533 MHz)
* The upper limit of the frequency range
Memory (RAM)
capacity
Standard 256 MB
Expandable up to 768 MB by installing an optional expansion
RAM module
Host interface
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent) X 1
LAN connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) X 1
User interface
LCD 16 characters X 1 line
11 LED indicators
9 Operation keys
RAM slot
1
ROM slot
1
Expansion slot
2
Software Specifications
Command language
PCL 5c, PCL 6, PostScript 3 emulation, and UFR II
Built-in fonts
PCL: 80 Scalable fonts, 2 OCR fonts and 10 Bitmap fonts
PS: 136 standard fonts, 115 Central Europe fonts
Appendix
8
Specifications
8-49
Printable area
Appendix
8
8-50
Specifications
PCL 5c/PCL 6
Data cannot be printed within a 4.23 mm (10 mm for
envelopes) margin on all sides of the paper.
PS
Data cannot be printed within a 4 mm margin on all sides
of the paper.
UFR II
Data cannot be printed within a 5 mm (10 mm for
envelopes) margin on all sides of the paper.
* If you are using the PS/UFR II printer driver and select
the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point]
check box in the printer driver, you can extend the
printable area to near the edges of the paper.
In order to specify the setting for [Print with Upper Left of
Sheet as Starting Point], display the following dialog box.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Finishing
Details] dialog box by clicking [Finishing Details] in the
[Finishing] sheet.
- For PS Printer Driver: See Help of the PS printer
driver.
However, when a document with no margins is printed,
the data may be printed with the edges missing or the
edge of paper may blot during color printing even if the
[Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point] check
box is selected. In this case, specify the scaling factor in
the PS/UFR II printer driver to print smaller so that any
data on the document will not miss, and then print again.
Dimensions of Each Part
■ Printer
• Standard state
(mm)
Top cover
Toner cover
Front cover
380
545
Paper cassette
300
258
160
78
45
Tray extension
230
Auxiliary tray
Multi-purpose tray
636.5
651
• When three paper feeders are installed
(mm)
Cassette Protective Cover
691.5
651
46
■ PAPER FEEDER PF-98B
(mm)
545
697
141.5
Dimensions of Each Part
8
Appendix
798
656.5
517
545
Paper cassette
8-51
Index
Numerics
10 Indicator (Green), 1-8
100 Indicator (Green), 1-8
2-SIDED PRINT., 5-38, 5-118
2-sided Printing, 3-63
Manual 2-sided Printing, 3-65
A
Appendix
8
ACT Indicator (Green), 1-8
ADJ.START POS., 5-69
Adjusting the Color Balance, 7-95
Adjusting the Printing Position, 6-62
ALT.METHOD, 5-42
APPEND CR TO LF, 5-78
APPLETALK, 5-62
ASSURE JOB LOG, 5-28
AUTO ERROR SKIP, 5-20, 7-23
Auto Error Skip, 7-23
AUTO SELECTION, 5-33
AUTO SWITCH, 5-68
Auxiliary Tray, 1-8
B
B & W HALFTONES
PDF1.5, 5-92
PS, 5-100
QUALITY MENU, 5-47
BARDIMM, 5-80
BIND.LOCATION, 5-40
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL), 8-9
BLACK OVERPRINT
PDF1.5, 5-88
PS, 5-99
BRIGHTNESS
8-52
Index
PDF1.5, 5-89
PS, 5-100
C
CALIBRATE TIME, 5-25
CALIBRATE TIMER, 5-25
CALIBRATION, 5-106
Cancel Job, 2-60
[Cancel Job] Key, 1-11, 4-5
CANCEL JOB Menu, 4-14
Canceling a Job, 2-59
CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 2, 3, 4), 5-30, 5-118
CASSETTE(n) TYPE (n = 2, 3, 4), 5-36, 5-118
CASSETTE1 TYPE, 5-35, 5-118
CHANGE TONER, 5-116
Character Code Tables, 8-19
CHK PAPER SIZE, 5-70
CLEANING, 5-72
Cleaning
Inside of the Printer, 7-69
Outside of the Printer, 6-68
Transfer Belt, 6-60
Cleaning Brush, 7-76
CMS, 5-49
CMS SELECTION, 5-49
CMS/GAMMA, 5-49
CMYK OVERPRINT
PDF1.5, 5-89
PS, 5-102
CMYK PROFILE, 5-85
COATED PAPER, 5-74
Coated Paper, 3-4
COLOR HALFTONES
PDF1.5, 5-93
PS, 5-101
QUALITY MENU, 5-48
COLOR MODE, 5-47
D
DATE AND TIME, 5-22
DATE SETTING, 5-22
DAYLIGHT SAVING, 5-22
DENSITY
BLACK, 5-46
CYAN, 5-45
MAGENTA, 5-46
YELLOW, 5-46
Dimensions, 8-51
Direct Print, 2-12
Display, 1-13
Drum Cartridge
Handling, 6-40
Message, 6-15
Replacement, 6-15, 6-20
Storage, 6-42
E
[Edit and Preview] Mode, 2-51
E-mail Print, 2-34
E-MAIL PRT LOG, 5-113
E-MAIL PRT SET, 5-65
E-MAIL UTILITY, 5-106
ENCRYPTED PRINT, 5-109
Encrypted Secured Print, 2-52
ENLRG A4 WIDTH, 5-79
ENLRG PRT AREA
IMAGING, 5-83
PDF1.5, 5-90
Envelopes, 3-5, 3-54
Error Message, 7-23
ETHERNET DRIVER, 5-65
EXIF ADJUSTMENT, 5-84
Expansion RAM, 1-5
Expansion Slot, 1-8
EXT. CARD LIST, 5-105
EXT.RX BUFFER, 5-66
EXTENSION CARD, 5-66
F
FEEDER MENU Options, 5-3
[Feeder Selection] Key, 1-11, 4-5
FINISHING, 5-91
FIT TO PAGE, 5-90
FIXING UNIT, 5-70
Fixing Unit, 1-10
Message, 6-43
Replacement, 6-43, 6-45
Resetting the Counter, 6-52
FONT NUMBER, 5-76
FONTS LIST, 5-104, 5-105
Forced Output, 2-59
FORM FEED, 5-114
FORM LINES, 5-76
FREESCAPE, 5-80
Front Cover, 1-7
8
Appendix
Command Prompt, 2-33
COMMENT PRINT, 5-94
Condensation, 6-14, 6-42
CONFIG.PAGE, 5-104, 5-105
Configuration Page, 8-2
CONNECT.RECOG., 5-66
CONTROL MENU Options, 5-2
Control Panel, 1-11
Control Panel Power Switch, 1-12, 4-6
COPIES, 5-39
Counter Check, 4-17
CUSTOM SIZE, 5-77
G
GAMMA, 5-52
GRADATION LEVEL, 5-44
GRADATION SET., 5-53
GRAY COMPENSATE
PDF1.5, 5-90
QUALITY MENU, 5-48
GRAY PROFILE
PDF1.5, 5-86
Index
8-53
PS, 5-96
GUTTER, 5-41
Gutter, 3-67
JOB TIMEOUT, 5-95
K
H
Keys, 4-5
HALFTONES, 5-47
Handling
Drum Cartridge, 6-40
Multi-purpose Tray, 3-13
Paper Cassette, 3-13
Printer, 6-79
Toner Cartridge, 6-12
HARD DISK, 5-25
Hard Disk, 1-6, 2-4
Hard Disk Slot, 1-8
HARD RESET, 5-114
Hard Reset, 2-62
HDD ALL ERASE, 5-73
HDD Indicator, 1-12, 2-5
HDD MAINTENANCE, 5-73
Heavy Paper, 3-4
How to View the Display, 4-7
Appendix
8
Labels, 3-5
LAN Connector, 1-8
Laser Beam, xxi
LAYOUT MENU Options, 5-4
Lift Handles, 1-8
LIMIT EMAIL PRT, 5-83
LINE CONTROL, 5-54
Loading Paper
Envelopes, 3-54
Multi-purpose Tray, 3-48
Paper Cassette, 3-18
Lock Release Button, 1-10
Long Size Paper, 3-52
M
I
I/F CONNECTION, 5-55
IMAGING SETUP Options, 5-12
INIT.COUNTER, 5-70
INIT.N/W SET., 5-65
INTERFACE MENU Options, 5-7
INTERRUPT PRINT, 5-26
INVLDPAPER TRAY, 5-32
ITB Unit, 1-10
Cleaning the Transfer Belt, 6-60
J
Job Indicator, 1-12
[Job] Key, 1-12, 4-6
JOB LOG LIST, 5-112
JOB Menu, 4-12, 5-16
8-54
L
Index
Main Power Indicator, 1-12
MANUAL 2-SIDED, 5-37
MATCHING METHOD
PDF1.5, 5-86
PS, 5-97
QUALITY MENU, 5-51
Menu Categories, 4-4
Menu Functions, 4-2
Menu Functions and Menu Operation, 4-9
Message, 7-23
Message Indicator, 1-12
MODE PRIORITY, 5-68
MODE SELECTION, 5-66
MODE TIMEOUT, 5-56
Multi-purpose Tray, 1-8
Handling, 3-13
How to Close, 3-15
Paper Size Setting, 3-59
N
NETWARE SETTING, 5-62
NETWORK, 5-75
NETWORK MENU, 5-57
Network Status Print, 8-3
N-UP PRINT, 5-91
NW STATUS PRINT, 5-105
O
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL), 8-9
Offline, 2-11
OFFSET X, 5-39
OFFSET Y, 5-39
[OK] Key, 1-12, 4-6
Online, 2-10
Online Indicator, 1-11
[Online] Key, 1-11, 4-5
Optional Equipment, 1-5
ORIENTATION
IMAGING, 5-81
PCL, 5-75
OUTPUT PROFILE
PDF1.5, 5-86
PS, 5-97
QUALITY MENU, 5-51
Output Tray, 1-8, 3-16
Paper Capacity, 3-12
Output Trays, 3-16
Outputting Data (Forced Output), 2-59
P
PAGE COUNT LIST, 5-107
Page Count List, 8-4
PANEL LANGUAGE, 5-20
Paper
Loading Orientation, 3-70
Printable Area, 3-7
Storage, 3-9
Paper Cassette, 1-8, 3-18
Handling, 3-13
Paper Type Setting, 3-46
Paper Feed Roller, 7-14
Paper Feeder, 1-5
Paper Guides, 1-8
Paper Jams, 7-4
PAPER SAVE (PCL SETUP), 5-75
PAPER SAVE (UFR II SETUP), 5-80
Paper Size, 3-2
List, 3-2
Setting, 3-59
Paper Size Guide, 1-8
PAPER SOURCE, 5-117
Paper Source, 3-11
Paper Capacity, 3-12
Selection, 3-12
Type, 3-11
Paper Source Indicators, 1-11
Paper Type List, 3-4
Paper Type Setting
Multi-purpose Tray, 3-61
Paper Cassette, 3-46
Parts and Their Functions, 1-7
PCL Fonts List, 8-5
PCL SETUP Options, 5-11
PCL UTILITY, 5-104
PDF1.5 Options, 5-13
PDL SELECT(PnP), 5-29
PITCH, 5-76
PLAIN PAPER, 5-74
Plain Paper, 3-4
POINT SIZE, 5-76
POW. SAVE TIMER, 5-24
POWER SAVE MODE, 5-18
Power Save Mode, 2-6
POWER SAVE TIME, 5-19
POWER SAVE TIME (TIMER SETTINGS), 5-25
Power Socket, 1-9
Power Supply
Problems, 7-48
Turning the Printer ON, 2-2
Power Switch, 1-8, 2-3, 2-5, 2-6
Print Defect Samples, 7-91
PRINT EMAIL TXT, 5-83
Index
8-55
8
Appendix
Paper Type Setting, 3-61
Appendix
8
PRINT GUARANTEE, 5-82
[Print] Mode, 2-50
Print Mode, 2-57
PRINT MODE Options, 5-10
PRINT POSITION, 5-82
PRINT PS ERRORS, 5-95
Print Quality, 7-69
Print Quality Problems, 7-56
Printer
Cleaning, 6-68
Cleaning Inside, 7-69
Handling, 6-79
Moving, 6-71
Operation Problems, 7-48
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation, 4-4
Printing Position Adjustment Print, 8-3
PRNTPOSNPRINT, 5-107
Problems
Paper Jams, 7-4
Print Quality, 7-69
Problems with the Printout Results, 7-52
PS Configuration Page, 8-6
PS Fonts, 8-10
PS Fonts List, 8-6
PS Options, 5-14
PS ROM, 1-5
PS UTILITY, 5-105
PS/Barcode ROM, 1-5
PURE BLACK TEXT
PDF1.5, 5-87
PS, 5-98
PWR SAVE IN ERR, 5-19
Q
QUALITY CHANGE, 5-55
QUALITY MENU Options, 5-5
QUICK FORMAT, 5-73
QUIET MODE, 5-28
R
Rating Label, 1-9
8-56
Index
Ready Indicator, 1-12
Rear Cover, 1-9
RECEIVE E-MAILS, 5-106
RECVRY PRINTING, 5-70
REMOTE UI SET., 5-64
RENDER CL SPACE, 5-84
REPORTLOG LST, 5-112
[Reset] Key, 1-12, 4-6
RESET Menu, 4-13, 5-16
RESOLUTION, 5-43
RGB PURE BLACK, 5-98
RGB SRCE PROF.
PDF1.5, 5-84
PS, 5-95
QUALITY MENU, 5-50
RIP ONCE, 5-27
RX LOG LIST, 5-106
S
Scalable Fonts (PCL), 8-7
SECURED PRINT, 5-110
Secured Print, 2-52
[Secured Print] Mode, 2-50
SECURED TYPE, 5-27
SECURING TIME, 5-26
SELECT FEEDER Menu, 4-15, 5-17
Self-diagnostic Test, 2-3
Service Call Display, 7-45
Setting Items, 5-2
Setting Priority, 4-3
[Settings] Key, 1-12, 4-6
SETUP Menu, 4-9, 5-2
SETUP Menu Initialization, 4-18
SHOW WARNINGS, 5-21
CONTROL MENU, 5-21
IMAGING, 5-82
SHUT DOWN, 5-115
SMB, 5-62
SMOOTHING (AST)
PDF1.5, 5-94
PS, 5-103
QUALITY MENU, 5-53
SNMP V. 1, 5-63
SNMP V. 3 SET., 5-63
TRAY PAPER TYPE, 5-34, 5-118
TRAY PRIORITY, 5-31
Typeface Samples, 8-7
U
UFR II SETUP Options, 5-12
UNIT OF MEASURE, 5-77
Unusable Paper, 3-8
UPDATE FIRMWARE, 5-75
Usable Paper, 3-2
USB, 5-75
USB Connector, 1-8
USER MAIN. Options, 5-10
[Utility] Key, 1-12, 4-6
UTILITY Menu, 4-11, 5-15
V
Ventilation Slots, 1-8, 1-9
T
W
TCP/IP SETTINGS, 5-57
TEST CHART 1, 5-107
Test Chart 1, 7-87
TEST CHART 2, 5-108
Test Chart 2, 7-89
TIME SETTING, 5-22
TIME ZONE, 5-23
TIMER SETTINGS, 5-23
Toner Cartridge
Handling, 6-12
Message, 6-2
Replacement, 6-2, 6-4
Resetting the Counter, 6-10
Storage, 6-14
Toner Cover, 1-8
TONER SAVE, 5-44
TONER VOLUME, 5-54
Top Cover, 1-8, 1-10
Tray Extension, 1-8
TRAY PAPER SIZE, 5-29, 5-117
WAIT TIMEOUT, 5-95
WAKE UP TIME, 5-24
WAKE UP TIMER, 5-23
Warning Message, 7-23
WARNING STEP, 5-20
Waste Toner Container
Message, 6-54
Replacement, 6-54, 6-56
Waste Toner Cover, 1-9
8
Appendix
SOFT RESET, 5-114
Soft Reset, 2-61
SP.IMAGE MODE, 5-71
SP.PRINT MODE, 5-74
SP.S-SIZE MODE1, 5-72
SP.S-SIZE MODE2, 5-72
Specifications, 8-44
SPOOLER, 5-64
START WAIT TIME, 5-64
STD FORMAT, 5-74
STD PAPER SIZE, 5-31
STD PAPER TYPE, 5-33
STORE LOG LST, 5-112
[Store] Mode, 2-51
Stored Job Print, 2-54
STOREJOB LIST, 5-111
STOREJOB PRINT, 5-111
Storing Printouts, 3-10
Sub Power Supply, 1-12
SUBSTITUTE SIZE, 5-71
SYMBOL SET, 5-77
Symbol Sets Supported, 8-19
X
X DIMENSION, 5-77
Index
8-57
Y
Y DIMENSION, 5-78
Z
ZOOM, 5-81
Appendix
8
8-58
Index
USRM1-2636 (06)
© CANON INC. 2010